IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hi! I am James Lockman, and I would
like to welcome you to Captivate 5
| | 00:07 | Essential Training.
| | 00:08 | In this course, I will show you how
to use Captivate to create exciting
| | 00:12 | presentations, software
simulations, and e-learning programs.
| | 00:16 | I'll show you how to build a project
from scratch and use project templates and
| | 00:19 | styles to create a
branded presentation workflow.
| | 00:23 | I'll demonstrate how to use your
existing PowerPoint files in your Captivate
| | 00:26 | projects, so you can take advantage
of presentations you already have.
| | 00:30 | We'll explore how to turn full motion
screen capture into self-running movies,
| | 00:34 | interactive trainings, and assessments.
| | 00:38 | I'll also introduce you to learning
management systems, and show you some new
| | 00:42 | options for managing your assessments.
| | 00:44 | There're lots new here, so whether
you are new to Captivate or a seasoned
| | 00:48 | veteran, Captivate's features are sure
to make your presentations and e-learning
| | 00:52 | projects go more smoothly.
| | 00:54 | Now, let's get right into
Captivate 5 Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you are a premium member of the
lynda.com Online Training Library, you have
| | 00:04 | access to the exercise files
used throughout this title.
| | 00:07 | The exercise files are in the Exercise
Files folder, which I have placed on the
| | 00:11 | Desktop of my computer.
| | 00:12 | You can store it wherever you like.
| | 00:14 | There are files for most movies.
| | 00:16 | They reside in subfolders
named according to the chapters.
| | 00:20 | It's not necessary for you to use these files.
| | 00:23 | You can use files of your own in place of them.
| | 00:26 | If you are a monthly or annual
subscriber to lynda.com, you don't have access to
| | 00:30 | these exercise files, but you can
follow along with your own work.
| | 00:34 | Let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Updates for Captivate 5.5| 00:04 | When Adobe released Captivate 5.5,
it extended some features that already
| | 00:08 | existed in Captivate 5.
| | 00:10 | We have recorded some movies to help you to
understand the new additions to the application.
| | 00:14 | We've added some movies about free
rotation, gradients, and shadows to our
| | 00:18 | "Building a basic presentation" chapter.
| | 00:21 | We've added movies about the new
quizzing interface and the new quiz templates
| | 00:25 | to our "Quizzing" chapter and we've
added some movies about exporting your
| | 00:28 | projects to our "Publishing Your Project" chapter.
| | 00:31 | If any additional features become
available in Captivate, we'll be sure to
| | 00:35 | include some movies for you to be able
to take advantage of those new features.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Introducing CaptivateCaptivate 101| 00:00 | In this lesson, I am going to provide a brief
overview of the things that we do with Captivate.
| | 00:04 | Many people ask, well, isn't
Captivate just screen capture?
| | 00:08 | It turns out that it isn't.
| | 00:09 | Captivate can make many types of
projects that go well beyond simply
| | 00:13 | capturing the screen.
| | 00:15 | Captivate can build presentations,
and these presentations aren't just things
| | 00:19 | that go from one end to the other;
| | 00:20 | they often include interactivity and
movies and audio and other types of
| | 00:25 | interactions that you can build
that you just can't get any place else.
| | 00:29 | They can include simulations,
and simulations aren't just about software.
| | 00:33 | It can also be about hardware.
| | 00:35 | It can be about business
processes or manufacturing processes.
| | 00:39 | Captivate is very useful in building
simulations because then you can take
| | 00:42 | advantage of training opportunities
that perhaps could be very expensive or
| | 00:46 | dangerous if you were working on actual
equipment, or in dangerous situations.
| | 00:51 | You can also build assessments with Captivate.
| | 00:54 | Assessments allow us to figure out
whether or not a learner has actually
| | 00:57 | internalized the information
we are trying to teach them.
| | 01:00 | Assessments could be quizzes, like
short answer questions, or true or false
| | 01:04 | question, or perhaps a matching question.
| | 01:07 | Captivate can also build task-based assessments.
| | 01:10 | These types of assessments require
that the user interact with the program in
| | 01:14 | order to pass the assessment.
| | 01:16 | Oftentimes these get build for
software simulations and software assessments,
| | 01:20 | but they can also get used for
situational assessments and for process training.
| | 01:25 | Who is the typical Captivate user?
| | 01:28 | Many of us are trainers who use Captivate.
| | 01:30 | We use Captivate to build content that
will either augment what we are doing in
| | 01:34 | a classroom, or perhaps it would be the
entire interaction that a student might
| | 01:38 | have with that course material.
| | 01:40 | As more and more school systems,
colleges, and companies are moving towards
| | 01:44 | e-learning, Captivate is an essential
tool to help enable that transition.
| | 01:49 | Salespeople often use Captivate as well.
| | 01:52 | Salespeople will build
persuasion-based presentations.
| | 01:55 | They are trying to get you to change
your mind, or perhaps to buy their product.
| | 02:00 | Sometimes it's all about getting
you to think about their product in
| | 02:03 | anticipation of a visit from them later on.
| | 02:06 | Many people use Captivate to build self-
running presentations that can be sent
| | 02:10 | to a potential customer so that they
can watch it on their own terms, and then
| | 02:15 | that sales person will
engage them after the fact.
| | 02:18 | Many HR departments use Captivate to
be able to build training content and
| | 02:23 | assessments so that they can evaluate
whether their workers are learning the
| | 02:27 | materials they need to learn and using
the skills that they have been taught.
| | 02:31 | Oftentimes they will use programs that
they built with Captivate to determine
| | 02:34 | whether or not a person is
eligible for promotion, for instance.
| | 02:38 | People who are building interactive
applications, whether they are delivered
| | 02:41 | online or on DVD, are also using Captivate.
| | 02:46 | Captivate has a lot of options to
incorporate interactive elements into your projects.
| | 02:51 | Interactivity isn't just clicking a
button and then watching something happen.
| | 02:54 | It can also include video, audio, or
interaction with other web sites and other content.
| | 03:00 | How is Captivate different from Adobe Presenter?
| | 03:03 | Adobe Presenter is a plug-in to PowerPoint.
| | 03:06 | Because it's a plug-in, it needs
PowerPoint in order to operate.
| | 03:10 | Presenter is designed to help you turn a
PowerPoint presentation into e-learning content.
| | 03:16 | Presenter extends the functions of
PowerPoint by enabling you to insert Flash
| | 03:21 | content, quizzes, movies, sound, and
a little bit of branching into your
| | 03:27 | PowerPoint presentations.
| | 03:29 | It can produce stand-alone
presentations or presentations that can be uploaded
| | 03:33 | into your learning management system.
| | 03:35 | Presenter is a linear product.
| | 03:37 | When you think about how you use
PowerPoint, PowerPoint tells a story from
| | 03:41 | one end to the other.
| | 03:42 | There is not a lot of branching
or decision making in between.
| | 03:45 | Captivate can build complex branching
and decision making based not only on
| | 03:49 | someone clicking a button, but also on
logic: looking at what's happened up to
| | 03:54 | that point, examining variables, and
examining how a person is behaving during
| | 03:58 | the course of the presentation.
| | 04:00 | Not only does Captivate allow for
complex branching, it also allows for far more
| | 04:04 | content types to be used in the presentations.
| | 04:08 | While Presenter is limited to what
PowerPoint can present, plus the Flash,
| | 04:12 | video, and audio that you can add using
Presenter, Captivate allows you to do much more.
| | 04:18 | You can incorporate the same content
that you can with Presenter, but in
| | 04:21 | addition, you can also add links to
other web sites, or incorporate other
| | 04:26 | presentations and other programs
directly inside your Captivate files.
| | 04:31 | In addition, Captivate has more
publishing options than we see inside of Presenter.
| | 04:36 | Presenter is limited to a few learning
management systems that it can interact
| | 04:39 | with, plus the ability to
produce a stand-alone PDF.
| | 04:43 | Captivate has far more options,
including self-running presentations that can
| | 04:48 | run on both Mac and Windows.
| | 04:50 | If you have some skills already with
Presenter, you are going to be able to use
| | 04:53 | them most likely here in Captivate.
| | 04:56 | If you are starting from scratch,
Captivate is a great application to help you
| | 05:00 | to build all of those things that we
have discussed earlier, and much more.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding presentation basics| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going
to talk about presentations.
| | 00:03 | Presentations are a way for us to tell a
story, or try to convince an audience to
| | 00:07 | take some action, or to maybe buy some product.
| | 00:11 | Many times presentations are used in
sales and also in providing information
| | 00:16 | about products and services.
| | 00:18 | They're also used in education.
| | 00:20 | Many of us are coming from training
backgrounds, and we're used to using say
| | 00:24 | PowerPoint to create content that we're going
to deliver to an audience, or to a classroom.
| | 00:29 | That same paradigm exists here
inside of Captivate when we're building
| | 00:33 | presentation-type content with Captivate.
| | 00:36 | It can also be used as a
replacement for personal interaction.
| | 00:40 | Many times people are stepping up to an
e-learning system and they're watching
| | 00:44 | content without the
instructor actually being there.
| | 00:47 | This is very common in business where
you might go to a web site, look for more
| | 00:52 | information, and you're going to
watch a presentation at your own pace.
| | 00:56 | These presentations can present
themselves or be driven by the user.
| | 01:01 | Typically, there is some type of
audio or narration that might be either
| | 01:05 | information or guidance.
| | 01:07 | There's often some type of
interactivity, and at a minimum level, that
| | 01:11 | interactivity might be used to
navigate through the presentation.
| | 01:15 | I have an example of a presentation here.
| | 01:18 | It's called Chapter 1 presentation,
and it's located in the Presentation folder,
| | 01:23 | in your Examples folder,
in your Chapter 1 folder.
| | 01:26 | You can open it now to follow along.
| | 01:29 | In this example, we've built a
presentation for the Two Trees Olive Oil Company.
| | 01:34 | It's supposed to be an annual report, or
at least the start of an annual report.
| | 01:39 | This presentation is intended to be
viewed in front of a small audience or
| | 01:43 | intended to be viewed by someone online
who's watching the presentation on their own.
| | 01:48 | Many of these slides come directly from
a PowerPoint presentation that had been
| | 01:52 | given earlier in the season.
| | 01:54 | One of the things that we can do
with Captivate that's very exciting for
| | 01:58 | presentations is to incorporate
PowerPoint content without any translation.
| | 02:03 | It's a direct import and a two-way
communication between Captivate and PowerPoint.
| | 02:09 | If you have PowerPoint skills already,
it's going to be very easy for you to
| | 02:13 | transition to use them inside of Captivate.
| | 02:18 | You can see that there are a number of
slides. Some of them have names others do not.
| | 02:22 | Since our flow of a presentation is
typically linear, it's not so important to
| | 02:27 | have names for all of the content.
| | 02:29 | Later on when we're talking about
branching and interactive content, then it
| | 02:33 | will be important to name all of your
slides and all of your content to be able
| | 02:37 | to address them programmatically.
| | 02:39 | Later on in this course, you'll see how
to build this presentation from scratch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| E-learning in a nutshell| 00:00 | More and more companies and schools are
moving towards an electronic learning model.
| | 00:05 | This is moving some or all of that
student-instructor interaction from the
| | 00:10 | classroom to an online experience.
| | 00:13 | Some classes are mixing instructors in
a webinar room with self-guided lessons.
| | 00:19 | In addition, they're also
incorporating classroom time.
| | 00:22 | We've seen a tremendous growth of
what's called "blended learning" over the last
| | 00:26 | few years, and this involves all
three of those types of interactions.
| | 00:31 | There might be a webinar component, a
classroom component, and a self-guided
| | 00:36 | learning component, or perhaps
some combination of those three.
| | 00:39 | Many times e-learning is going to
feature an online assessment, and this might
| | 00:44 | include quizzing or perhaps
click-through assessments.
| | 00:47 | A click-through assessment is a way
for a student to do some action in a
| | 00:52 | simulation on a computer screen,
and then the e-learning system will gather
| | 00:57 | information about that interaction.
| | 00:59 | If the student follows the steps in the
appropriate order, then the student succeeds.
| | 01:03 | If the student doesn't follow the
steps in the appropriate order, then they
| | 01:07 | either fail the assessment, or
they're given an opportunity to try again.
| | 01:11 | When we talk about online courses,
then we're talking about multiple
| | 01:15 | interactions that get aggregated into one place.
| | 01:18 | When we're thinking about parts of
online courses, you might think about
| | 01:22 | a single class or a single quiz or a
single presentation that a student
| | 01:29 | might interact with.
| | 01:30 | All of those collected together
would become a curriculum, or a course.
| | 01:35 | In order for an online course to
function well, there usually needs to be some
| | 01:40 | type of e-learning management system to
either deliver that content or to track
| | 01:45 | the student progress and achievement.
| | 01:48 | There are many learning management
systems out there, and depending on your
| | 01:51 | company, or your school, you may
have one or more of those in place.
| | 01:56 | Later on in this course, we'll be
looking at how we can take the results of our
| | 01:59 | assessments and push
them into e-learning systems.
| | 02:03 | For now, feel free to explore this
file which has been set up as a quiz
| | 02:08 | inside of Captivate.
| | 02:09 | First, it consists of some instructions
as video. Then there are some questions
| | 02:15 | that get asked of the learner.
| | 02:17 | These questions produce a pass or fail
result, based on how well the learner
| | 02:22 | does on the quizzes.
| | 02:23 | Later on in the course, you're going
to build this type of e-learning project
| | 02:27 | with Captivate.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Understanding the BasicsExploring Captivate's interface| 00:00 | We're going to begin by exploring
Captivate's interface, and to do so I would
| | 00:04 | like to open an existing file that is
provided in your Project Files folder.
| | 00:09 | You can open a file by using the File menu,
or by clicking Open on the splash screen.
| | 00:14 | I'll choose Open right now.
| | 00:15 | I've already browsed to the Chapter
2 Project Files folder, and in it you'll
| | 00:21 | see a folder called Example.
| | 00:23 | Open please the file
called e-mail_assessment.cptx.
| | 00:33 | When Captivate first opens a file,
it's going to view it at 100% size.
| | 00:38 | One of the first things we'll show
you about the interface is how to reduce
| | 00:41 | the size of what's on the stage, so that we
can view the entire page, or the entire stage.
| | 00:46 | When we talk about pages in Captivate,
I'll use page and stage interchangeably.
| | 00:52 | Captivate comes from the Flash world,
and there they talk about the stage,
| | 00:56 | objects moving onto or off of
or around on the stage, so you'll hear me
| | 01:01 | use the words "page" and "stage" interchangeably.
| | 01:04 | Let's reduce the size of our view now.
| | 01:06 | On the very top of the interface,
you should see a number of controls.
| | 01:10 | In the upper left-hand corner, you'll
see your page controls, and you can type
| | 01:13 | in a page number that you wanted to be viewing.
| | 01:16 | Currently we're viewing page number one,
and you can see that where it says 1/9.
| | 01:20 | Next to that is our Preview button,
and we will go back to this later.
| | 01:23 | This is where we preview our projects,
either during development or when we
| | 01:27 | have them completed.
| | 01:28 | The next button is our Publish button.
| | 01:30 | We use the Publish button when we're
finished with our project and we want to
| | 01:33 | publish it to one of the many different methods.
| | 01:36 | We'll talk about that much later in this course.
| | 01:38 | The next control allows us to adjust the view.
| | 01:41 | I would like to use fit in the window.
| | 01:44 | Click on the dropdown menu and choose Best Fit.
| | 01:47 | There. Now we can see the entire stage.
| | 01:52 | Captivate uses many interface elements
known as panels, and right now on the
| | 01:56 | left, you can see we have our
Filmstrip panel next to our Tool panel. At the
| | 02:00 | bottom, you'll see Timeline and
Master Slide, and over on the right,
| | 02:05 | Properties and Library.
| | 02:07 | You can arrange these panels any way you like.
| | 02:09 | We can also have different
organizations of panels called workspaces.
| | 02:14 | In the upper right-hand corner,
you can see the word CLASSIC.
| | 02:19 | This is our Workspace
dropdown menu. Click on it now.
| | 02:24 | You can see that there are a number of
workspaces that are available to us here.
| | 02:28 | Let's make some adjustments to our panel,
and then we'll save the workspace for our own.
| | 02:33 | Under the Window menu, choose Library.
| | 02:39 | You'll see that the Library panel has
appeared next to the Properties panel.
| | 02:43 | I like to have the Library panel
available in my custom workspace.
| | 02:47 | So now that I've made that change,
I can save my custom workspace.
| | 02:51 | Let's go back to the Workspace menu,
click on the dropdown, and near the bottom,
| | 02:56 | you'll see New Workspace.
| | 03:00 | Let's call this "My Workspace."
| | 03:01 | Of course, you can call it anything you like.
| | 03:07 | When you're done, click OK.
| | 03:09 | You will notice in the upper right-
hand corner, now it says My Workspace.
| | 03:15 | You can switch between workspaces very
easily, simply by choosing it from the list.
| | 03:20 | Let's go back to our original workspace.
Click on the dropdown and choose CLASSIC.
| | 03:26 | You will notice that it looks almost
just like My Workspace, so let's reset
| | 03:32 | CLASSIC back to its starting point.
| | 03:34 | We do that again under the Workspace
dropdown menu. Click it and choose Reset CLASSIC.
| | 03:42 | There. By choosing different workspaces, we
can go back and forth between different
| | 03:46 | arrangements of our workspace to
help us to focus on specific activities
| | 03:50 | inside of Captivate.
| | 03:53 | In the following lessons, we will be
using specific workspaces, and I'll tell you
| | 03:56 | which ones to use when we need them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Classic workspace| 00:00 | In this lesson, we'll be looking at
features of the Classic workspace that we
| | 00:03 | will be using frequently for
the duration of this course.
| | 00:07 | We'll be using the e-mail_assessment
file that we opened in Chapter 1, and we'll
| | 00:10 | be using it for the rest of the chapter.
| | 00:12 | We'll begin by looking at the
Filmstrip panel over on the left.
| | 00:15 | We use the Filmstrip panel to
navigate to pages within our projects.
| | 00:20 | You can tell which page you're looking
at because it will be highlighted in
| | 00:23 | the Filmstrip panel.
| | 00:25 | You can see that we're on page number 1,
because page number 1 has the dark outline.
| | 00:29 | Let's go to page number 3 by
choosing it in the Filmstrip panel.
| | 00:33 | You can see now that page 3 is highlighted.
| | 00:36 | Also at the top of the screen, you can see
that our page number has changed to 3 of 9.
| | 00:41 | Let's go to page 5 by
changing the number 3 to 5.
| | 00:46 | Simply click in the text area,
delete the 3, and type a 5.
| | 00:51 | You can see it that automatically Captivate
will go right to that page if it's available.
| | 00:56 | Let's go back to page number 1. Scroll up in
the filmstrip and then click on page number 1.
| | 01:03 | You'll use the filmstrip all the
time when you're using Captivate.
| | 01:06 | Let's go take a look at the Timeline.
| | 01:09 | The Timeline is along the bottom of
the screen, and it shows us all of the
| | 01:12 | elements that are on the stage.
| | 01:14 | It also shows us where they exist in time, in
addition to how they're stacked on the stage.
| | 01:20 | Currently, on page number 1, we
have three elements that we can see.
| | 01:24 | First, there is a click box, and if
you click right here, you can see it's
| | 01:29 | selected on the stage.
| | 01:30 | You'll use the Timeline to select
objects that are hidden behind other objects.
| | 01:35 | The next item down is our slide and
then underneath that is an audio track.
| | 01:39 | You'll notice that the audio
track has a little fuzziness to it.
| | 01:42 | That fuzziness is in fact the audio waveform.
| | 01:45 | Later on when we're adjusting timing,
we'll be using that audio waveform to
| | 01:49 | guide us when replacing objects in time.
| | 01:52 | You'll notice also that the Timeline has
time across the top, which makes sense.
| | 01:57 | It's the Timeline panel.
| | 01:58 | We can adjust the scale of that
Timeline by dragging this slider on the bottom.
| | 02:04 | Click and drag the slider to the left.
| | 02:08 | As you drag it to the left, you'll
notice that the time increments get closer
| | 02:11 | together. Drag it back to the right.
| | 02:13 | Now they're getting further apart.
| | 02:17 | You can also see the total duration of your
slide, indicated to the left of that scale slider.
| | 02:24 | We can scroll our view of the
Timeline to the left and to the right by
| | 02:28 | dragging this thumb here.
| | 02:29 | Let's take a look at the Library panel.
| | 02:32 | In the Classic workspace, it sits
behind the properties panel, so to see it we
| | 02:37 | need to Click on its name,
to the right of Properties.
| | 02:41 | The Library allows us to see all of
the contents inside of our project.
| | 02:45 | For instance, if I open up the Audio
folder, you can see that we have a number of
| | 02:50 | elements that have already been
recorded and are inside of our project now.
| | 02:55 | If I look in my Backgrounds folder,
you can see that there are a number of
| | 03:00 | backgrounds that are also in use.
| | 03:02 | You can access all of the elements of
your project from the Library panel.
| | 03:06 | The Library panel allows you to
do more than just see your content:
| | 03:10 | you can drag content from
the library onto your stage;
| | 03:13 | you can edit these library elements
directly from here; and you can organize
| | 03:18 | them and import contents to the
library without getting it onto the stage.
| | 03:22 | We'll be using these panels
extensively during the rest of the course, and
| | 03:26 | if they happen to disappear, you can
always get them back by going to the
| | 03:29 | Classic workspace.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Navigation workspace| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to
be using some features of the
| | 00:02 | Navigation workspace.
| | 00:04 | Up to now, we've been changing workspace
by using the dropdown menu in the upper
| | 00:07 | right-hand corner of our screen.
| | 00:09 | I am going to use a different method
though, and that's to use the Window menu.
| | 00:14 | Choose the Window menu, and at
the bottom, you'll see Workspace.
| | 00:18 | Choose Navigation and there we
have the Navigation workspace.
| | 00:24 | If this is the first time that you've
viewed the Navigation workspace, then
| | 00:27 | you're probably seeing the Branching
panel stuck off to the left-hand side.
| | 00:31 | I'd like to fix its view because it's really
not helpful to me when it's off to the side.
| | 00:36 | Click on the black bar and drag it up so
that you can see the entire width of the panel.
| | 00:42 | Then collapse the panel by clicking on
the Collapse to Icons button in the upper
| | 00:46 | right-hand corner of the panel.
| | 00:49 | Now, click on Branching. This will
allow us to see the entirety of the panel.
| | 00:55 | The Branching panel shows us how the
different pages in our project relate to
| | 00:59 | each other with respect to
navigation through the project.
| | 01:03 | Many times when we're building
projects with Captivate, there might be
| | 01:06 | choices that users will make so that
they'll go from one slide to a different
| | 01:10 | slide that doesn't happen to be next to it.
| | 01:13 | You probably all used e-learning content
that's branched, whether you realize it or not.
| | 01:18 | You can change your view of the
slides by using the slider along the top.
| | 01:24 | Click and drag it to the right to zoom in on
the slides, and then to the left to zoom out.
| | 01:30 | There is also a Best Fit option that
will put all of the slides in view at once.
| | 01:39 | This project doesn't have any complex
branching, and so this view is kind of boring.
| | 01:44 | It simply goes from left to right.
| | 01:45 | As your projects get to be more and
more complex, then this view will look more
| | 01:50 | like a decision tree.
| | 01:52 | Let's collapse the Branching panel now.
| | 01:54 | Simply click the button, and it
will collapse back to its icon.
| | 01:57 | Let's turn our attention
to the Properties panel.
| | 02:00 | The Properties panel is the panel that
you'll use the most inside of Captivate.
| | 02:04 | It allows you access to all of the
different aspects of the objects or the pages
| | 02:09 | or any element that you might
choose in Captivate and need to adjust.
| | 02:13 | The Properties panel is contextual.
| | 02:15 | When we begin to make selections, then
the relevant areas that we can control
| | 02:20 | will be exposed in the
Properties panel for us automatically.
| | 02:24 | If you don't have page 1 chosen,
then choose page 1 in the Filmstrip now.
| | 02:29 | You can see on the right that there are a
number of properties that are exposed for us.
| | 02:33 | There is General, Action, and Audio.
| | 02:35 | We'll be using each one of
those later on in the course.
| | 02:39 | Down in the Timeline, choose the Click Box.
| | 02:43 | Notice that the properties panel
changes it's exposing Action and Options.
| | 02:48 | The Properties panel is extremely powerful.
| | 02:51 | You're going to be using it to access
the attributes of just about everything
| | 02:55 | that you'll use, that you'll display,
that you'll place, that you'll play;
| | 02:59 | everything that you'll do in Captivate is
going to come back to this Properties panel.
| | 03:02 | It's present in most of the workspaces
that you'll ever use inside of Captivate.
| | 03:06 | Know that if you lose it, you can
always get it back by choosing the Classic or
| | 03:10 | the Navigation workspace.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting application preferences| 00:00 | There are many preferences inside
of Captivate that control how the
| | 00:03 | application behaves.
| | 00:04 | They also help us to control how
default objects and default pages will be
| | 00:08 | created when we make them in Captivate.
| | 00:11 | Let's see how we can
adjust those preferences now.
| | 00:13 | On a Macintosh, the Preferences menu is
located under the Adobe Captivate menu.
| | 00:18 | On a Windows computer, it's
located under the Edit menu.
| | 00:24 | Like the Properties panel the
Preferences panel is contextual. This means that
| | 00:28 | some of these categories will refer to
the application as a whole, and others
| | 00:32 | are going to refer to the
project that we have open at this time.
| | 00:36 | We're going to focus now on the
Global category, which contains general
| | 00:40 | application settings and the
defaults for new objects inside of Captivate.
| | 00:44 | When you open the Preferences panel, it
will show you the general settings for
| | 00:48 | the application, which is
the top of the Global group.
| | 00:51 | By default, Show Welcome Screen is on.
| | 00:54 | The Welcome screen is a handy thing; it
provides you quick access to recently
| | 00:58 | opened documents, it also helps you to
make new projects based on different
| | 01:02 | starting conditions.
| | 01:03 | We'll see that there is an option
called Rescale Imported/Pasted Slide.
| | 01:08 | This is handy if you're bringing
slides from one project to another and they
| | 01:12 | don't happen to have the
same physical dimensions.
| | 01:15 | If you do have this enabled, when you
copy and paste slides from one project to
| | 01:18 | another, Captivate will automatically
make them fit so that you don't have
| | 01:22 | content that's falling off the
stage or not fitting on the stage.
| | 01:25 | Your default file and cache Locations
are indicated here, and you can browse to
| | 01:30 | new locations if you like.
| | 01:32 | If you have a scratch drive for
instance, then you might want to change
| | 01:35 | the location of your project cache by
clicking Browse and then choosing a new location.
| | 01:40 | You can also clear that cache to
free up memory on your hard drive by
| | 01:43 | clicking Clear Cache.
| | 01:45 | You can adjust your spelling preferences
by clicking on Spelling Preferences here.
| | 01:49 | At the top of the list, you can
choose your main dictionary language.
| | 01:54 | There are many languages
available inside of Captivate.
| | 01:56 | Now, when you install Captivate, it's
localized, so it will automatically choose
| | 02:00 | the dictionary for the location
where you've installed Captivate.
| | 02:04 | If you want to change your language while
you're working on a project, then you'd do that here.
| | 02:09 | There are also a number of options here
that help you to fine-tune how Captivate
| | 02:13 | will catch spelling errors.
| | 02:15 | All of them are enabled by default,
and you of course can adjust them at will.
| | 02:20 | Click OK to close the Spelling Options.
| | 02:23 | Captivate will show you a number of
alerts that are going to be based on
| | 02:26 | different activities in the application.
| | 02:29 | We can enable or disable them by
choosing Confirmation Messages here.
| | 02:34 | By default, all of the confirmation
messages are going to be turned on.
| | 02:38 | You can see that for me this one
happens to be grayed out, and that's
| | 02:41 | because I'm on a Macintosh.
| | 02:43 | If I was on a system that was a Vista or
Window 7 machine, then that would be enabled for me.
| | 02:49 | As you become familiar with the
application and comfortable with the
| | 02:52 | workflow, many of these alerts will
become an annoyance to you, and you'll
| | 02:55 | want to turn them off.
| | 02:56 | For instance, you may not want to be
warned every time you delete a slide, and so
| | 03:00 | you'd simply turn that off.
| | 03:03 | I'm going to re-enable this warning
because I want to see all of the warnings
| | 03:07 | as we go through our training.
| | 03:09 | Once again, as you become more
proficient, you'll want to turn some of these off.
| | 03:14 | We can also control how new slides look
and how new objects look inside of Captivate.
| | 03:20 | We do that from the Defaults
section in the Global group.
| | 03:24 | At the top, we have the
default slide duration of 3 seconds.
| | 03:28 | If you want your slides to be longer when
you create them, then you can change that time.
| | 03:32 | You can change the Background
color by clicking on this patch here.
| | 03:35 | Right now, it happens to be white.
| | 03:37 | When you click it, a web color
chooser will pop up, which make some sense
| | 03:41 | because most of the time that we're
looking at projects that we build in
| | 03:44 | Captivate, we're going to be
looking at them through a web browser.
| | 03:47 | You can choose any color you like.
| | 03:49 | You can also adjust the
transparency by using the Alpha slider here.
| | 03:53 | I'm going to leave it solid white.
| | 03:56 | I can also change the number of slides
that will be available in my preview menu.
| | 04:00 | By default, it's 5, but I could
choose anywhere between 5 and 20.
| | 04:03 | I can change how specific objects
look inside of Captivate as well.
| | 04:07 | Click on the menu next to the word
Select. Here is a list of all of the object
| | 04:11 | types that we can create inside of Captivate.
| | 04:14 | Let's change what happens
when we create a new button.
| | 04:17 | Choose Button from the list.
| | 04:18 | You'll see in the lower left-hand corner
that our Styles preview has changed to
| | 04:22 | show what a default button looks like.
| | 04:24 | This default allows us to change the amount
of time that that button persists on the stage.
| | 04:29 | We'll change its appearance
using skins later on in the course.
| | 04:32 | Here we can change how long it lives on
the stage--in this case it's defaulting
| | 04:36 | to 3 seconds--but I could also have it
appear for the rest of the slide after I
| | 04:42 | put it onto the stage.
| | 04:45 | When I choose Rest of Slide, you'll
notice that the duration disappears.
| | 04:49 | If you've made some changes to the
object defaults and you wanted to restore
| | 04:52 | them, then you can restore all of
those changes by clicking Restore All.
| | 04:57 | If you want to restore the defaults
for a specific object type, then you can
| | 05:00 | choose it from the list here
and then choose Restore Selected.
| | 05:06 | Now my button is back to its default behavior.
| | 05:08 | Lastly, we see that Autosize
Buttons and Autosize Captions is enabled.
| | 05:13 | This means that when we create new
buttons and new captions, Captivate will
| | 05:17 | automatically grow or shrink them based on
the content of the button or that caption.
| | 05:22 | The rest of the categories in the
Preferences panel are related to our specific project.
| | 05:26 | We'll be looking at those settings
later on in the course when we're dealing
| | 05:30 | with those specific areas of our projects.
| | 05:33 | Know that you can change any of these
settings at any time simply by returning to
| | 05:37 | the Preferences menu and
then making adjustments.
| | 05:40 | Click OK to close the Preferences panel.
| | 05:44 | We're now finished with our
tour of Captivate's interface.
| | 05:47 | You can close e-mail_
assessment without saving if you wish.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Building a Basic PresentationStarting from scratch| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to
create a new project from scratch.
| | 00:03 | I'm going to use the Create New Blank
Project button that's on my Welcome screen.
| | 00:07 | If your Welcome screen isn't visible
or if you have another project already
| | 00:10 | open, you can do this under the File menu.
| | 00:14 | Choose File > New Project and then Blank Project.
| | 00:19 | Go ahead and create the new project
now, either from the Welcome screen or
| | 00:23 | from the File menu.
| | 00:25 | We need to set the pixel
dimensions of our project.
| | 00:28 | The Size menu has a number of common sizes.
| | 00:31 | If this is the first time you've
created a new project, yours probably says
| | 00:35 | 640 x 480. Please choose 800 x 600 now.
| | 00:41 | You can also enter in custom
dimensions here under Width and Height.
| | 00:45 | You may find that you're creating
projects that have sizes that aren't in that
| | 00:48 | list, but you're going to be
creating projects of that size frequently.
| | 00:52 | If you have a particular mobile device
that you're working with, or other type
| | 00:56 | of screen that's in odd dimension, then
you might want to create a custom menu item.
| | 01:00 | Let's do that now.
| | 01:02 | Click Customize and we're going to
create a new custom project size entry that
| | 01:07 | will appear in our menu.
| | 01:09 | Click on Name and type "My Custom Project."
| | 01:12 | We'll leave the Dimensions at 800 x 600.
| | 01:18 | Once you've typed that,
click Save. Now click OK.
| | 01:23 | Look in your menu now.
| | 01:24 | You'll see that your custom
project is at the top of the list.
| | 01:28 | As you add custom project sizes,
they will appear at the top of the list
| | 01:32 | in alphabetical order.
| | 01:35 | To remove a custom project size from
the list, simply click Customize again.
| | 01:39 | There you can select your custom
project you want to remove and click Delete.
| | 01:45 | When you're finished, click OK.
| | 01:47 | Now that we've set the
dimensions for our project, click OK.
| | 01:50 | I'd like to be able to view the entire
stage and so I need to choose my Best Fit view.
| | 01:57 | I can do that by using Ctrl+0 on a
Windows computer, or Command+0 on a Macintosh.
| | 02:03 | Now, I can see my entire stage.
| | 02:05 | Now that we've created our new
project, it's time to save it.
| | 02:08 | From the File menu, choose Save.
| | 02:11 | I'm going to save this in the Project
folder, in the Chapter 03 folder, in your
| | 02:15 | Exercise Files folder.
| | 02:17 | For me, it happens to be on my Desktop,
| | 02:19 | but it will be wherever you've chosen to put it.
| | 02:21 | We'll call it "Chapter 03."
| | 02:26 | If you're on a Macintosh, you have
the choice to hide the extension.
| | 02:30 | It's a best practice not to hide the
extension because if you choose to share
| | 02:34 | this file with a Windows user, they
won't be able to use it if you don't have
| | 02:38 | the extension on the file.
| | 02:40 | Therefore, I always make sure to
show the extension when I'm creating
| | 02:43 | new Captivate files.
| | 02:45 | Now that I've typed my file name,
and I've got my extension showing, I'll
| | 02:48 | click Save.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a master page| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to create
some master slides for this project.
| | 00:04 | A master slide is a way for you to
create a background for your slides that you
| | 00:08 | can then apply to one or
more slides within your project.
| | 00:11 | You can have more than one master slide.
| | 00:14 | This makes it possible for you to have
different looks and feels for your slides
| | 00:18 | during the course of the presentation.
| | 00:20 | If you're a PowerPoint user, then this
is going to sound very familiar to you,
| | 00:24 | and it's also going to feel very
familiar to you as we go along.
| | 00:28 | To design the master slide, we
need to enter Master Slide view.
| | 00:32 | We can do that by clicking on the
Master Slide tab that's next to the Timeline.
| | 00:36 | You can see it here. And now
we're in the Master Slide view.
| | 00:40 | You see that we got a notice that
said now you're in the Master Slide view.
| | 00:43 | The master slide itself is blank,
because we haven't put any content onto it.
| | 00:47 | I'd like to insert an
image onto this master slide.
| | 00:51 | From the Insert menu, choose Image.
| | 00:54 | We've provided a number of
images in an Images folder.
| | 00:58 | This Images folder is in your
Project folder, in Chapter 03, in your
| | 01:01 | Exercise Files folder.
| | 01:04 | Choose Background 1.png and then click Open.
| | 01:09 | This image has now been
deposited onto the master slide.
| | 01:13 | Take a look up in the Filmstrip.
| | 01:15 | You can see that page 1 also has
this view because page 1 is using the
| | 01:20 | first master slide.
| | 01:22 | We can create another master slide by
right-clicking or Ctrl+Clicking on master
| | 01:27 | slide number 1, and then
choosing Insert and Master Slide.
| | 01:33 | Let's insert a different
image on top of this one.
| | 01:36 | Choose Insert > Image and then
choose Background 2. Now, choose Open.
| | 01:46 | Look up in the Filmstrip.
| | 01:47 | You can see that page 1 didn't change
this time, and that's because page 1 is
| | 01:52 | using the first master slide, not the second.
| | 01:55 | Let's go back to master slide number 1.
| | 01:58 | Click it in the Master Slide panel.
| | 02:00 | Up in the Properties panel,
you'll see that Label is blank.
| | 02:03 | Let's call this master slide "Corporate
Background," and then hit Return or Enter.
| | 02:13 | You can see in the Master
Slide panel it now shows the name
| | 02:15 | Corporate Background.
| | 02:17 | We can name the second one as well.
| | 02:19 | We'll call this one "Details
Background" and then hit Return. Great!
| | 02:29 | Now, we've got two master
slides that we've built.
| | 02:32 | Let's go back to Filmstrip view by
clicking on page 1 in the Filmstrip.
| | 02:36 | You can see that we've now
switched to Filmstrip view again.
| | 02:39 | I'd like to insert
another slide into the project.
| | 02:42 | I can right-click or Ctrl+Click on
page 1 and then choose Insert > New Slide.
| | 02:48 | You'll see that Captivate has added
a new slide, and that it's using the
| | 02:53 | Corporate Background master.
| | 02:55 | We can change which master by looking over
in the General area of the Properties panel.
| | 03:00 | Select page2, and then over in the
General area, choose Master Slide >
| | 03:06 | 2 (Details Background).
| | 03:08 | Now, you can see that that has changed.
| | 03:12 | Look again between slide 1 and slide 2.
| | 03:16 | This is using the Corporate Background;
| | 03:19 | this is using the Details Background.
| | 03:21 | Now, let's save our file,
but we're going to give it a new name.
| | 03:25 | So to do that, we need to
choose File > Save As.
| | 03:29 | Under the File menu choose Save As,
and then after Chapter 03, insert _A.
| | 03:38 | As we go along, we'll be
incrementing the names with A, B, C, and so on,
| | 03:42 | throughout the chapters.
| | 03:44 | Once you've made the change, click Save.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding slide text| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to see
how we can add text to our slides.
| | 00:03 | We'll be using the chapter 3_a file
that we created in the previous lesson.
| | 00:08 | I'm going to begin by working on the
master slide called Corporate Background.
| | 00:12 | Click on the Master Slide panel
and then choose Corporate Background.
| | 00:15 | I'd like to add a copyright notice to
the lower right-hand corner of the slide.
| | 00:20 | To do that, I need to add some text.
| | 00:22 | In my Tool panel, at the top of the list,
you'll see Insert Text Caption. Choose it now.
| | 00:29 | In the middle of the slide,
a text caption will appear.
| | 00:32 | The first thing you'll notice is that
it happens to be blue, and it kind of
| | 00:35 | looks like a button.
| | 00:36 | I don't want this to be the case,
| | 00:39 | so let's take a look at how we can
stylize these text captions to be able to use
| | 00:43 | them for many different purposes.
| | 00:45 | What I really want is just a plain blank
text box into which I can put any text I like.
| | 00:51 | Captivate treats all text boxes as captions.
| | 00:55 | So we need to pick a caption type that
doesn't include any type of a background.
| | 01:00 | Over in the Properties panel under
General, you'll see that we have several
| | 01:03 | caption types available.
| | 01:05 | What you're seeing now is the list
of caption types that are included in
| | 01:10 | Captivate right out of the box.
| | 01:12 | There are many of them, and you can
pick and choose them to match your layout.
| | 01:16 | We want the one called
Transparent, which is at the top of the list.
| | 01:21 | You'll notice a couple of
things have happened here:
| | 01:23 | First, the caption has gotten a lot smaller.
| | 01:26 | Secondly, it now appears as just
plain old normal type. This is great.
| | 01:31 | I'd like to change the copy
that's inside of that box.
| | 01:35 | Select the caption and double-click to
change to the Selection tool. Drag+Select
| | 01:41 | across all of the type and type
"Copyright 2010 Two Trees Olive Oil".
| | 01:54 | Captivate will automatically grow your
text box to fit all of the copy that you want.
| | 01:58 | Now, this text is quite large.
| | 02:01 | Let's use the Character Attributes
over in the Properties panel to make
| | 02:04 | it smaller and white.
| | 02:06 | Once again, select all of
the text in the text box.
| | 02:09 | Now under the Character panel,
change the Size to 8 points.
| | 02:14 | Click on Size and type 8, and then hit Return.
| | 02:18 | Next, we'll change its color to white.
Click on the color picker and pick white.
| | 02:25 | We can also choose our font.
| | 02:27 | The text is difficult to see,
| | 02:29 | so let's zoom in on it right now.
| | 02:36 | Once again, double-click, and then
select. From the Font Family, you'll see all
| | 02:41 | of the fonts that are
installed on your computer.
| | 02:44 | When choosing fonts for your projects,
you're going to want to choose fonts that
| | 02:47 | are going to be legible at many different sizes.
| | 02:50 | Myriad Pro is a great looking font at
many different sizes, and it's included
| | 02:54 | with your Creative Suite, or
your Captivate installation.
| | 02:58 | We'll continue to use it right now.
| | 03:00 | I can also choose Style.
| | 03:02 | Those of you who are coming from
word processors or from other layout
| | 03:05 | applications are familiar with, for
instance, the Ctrl+B for bold, or Command+B for
| | 03:10 | bold, or Ctrl+I or Command+I for italic.
| | 03:13 | Adobe applications don't allow you to do that.
| | 03:16 | They only present you with the
different styles of fonts that are in fact
| | 03:20 | installed on your computer.
| | 03:21 | This is a measure that prevents you
from using a font that can't be printed or
| | 03:25 | rendered on another machine.
| | 03:27 | Let's choose the bold variant of Myriad
Pro for this copyright notice. Great!
| | 03:34 | Let's go back to Best Fit
with Command+0 or Ctrl+0.
| | 03:38 | Next, let's move that text box to the
lower right-hand corner of the screen.
| | 03:44 | Click and drag it to the
lower right-hand corner.
| | 03:47 | You can resize the text box by
grabbing any of the drag handles and pulling
| | 03:52 | left-right, up-down or on the corners.
| | 03:55 | Grab the drag handle on the left-hand
middle, click, and drag it to the right.
| | 04:02 | Make it to be about that big.
| | 04:03 | When you're done, click in the Pasteboard.
| | 04:07 | Let's get off the master
slide and go to slide number 1.
| | 04:10 | Now, I'm in the Filmstrip view,
and you can see our copy is down in the
| | 04:15 | lower right-hand corner. Try to select it;
| | 04:18 | you can't because it's on the master slide.
| | 04:21 | Let's add some text to this slide.
| | 04:24 | Once again, we add text
by adding a text caption.
| | 04:28 | We'll insert a text caption
and please type the following:
| | 04:42 | "Welcome to the Two Trees
Olive Oil Company Annual Report".
| | 04:46 | Select all the type with Ctrl+A or Command
+A and then change it to Myriad Pro Bold.
| | 04:52 | Myriad Pro should already be chosen,
and we'll change the Style to Bold.
| | 04:58 | We'll also change the Caption
Type to Transparent, just like before.
| | 05:04 | You'll notice that it reflows.
| | 05:06 | Let's force the flow of the
text by inserting hard returns.
| | 05:10 | Double-click before Two Trees Olive
Oil, hold down your Shift key, and type
| | 05:15 | return on your Return key.
| | 05:17 | Now, you can release the Shift key.
| | 05:19 | I'd like to make this larger.
| | 05:21 | Select all of the copy
and change the Size to 36 points.
| | 05:26 | We want to increase the size of the box,
but if we try to click in the box, then
| | 05:32 | we end up getting just our text selection.
| | 05:35 | So we need to leave the text
editing by hitting your Escape key.
| | 05:38 | This will get you out of text editing,
and allow you to select the text caption itself.
| | 05:43 | Grab the right-hand drag
handle and make it wider.
| | 05:48 | Lastly, we'll move it up towards the middle of
the page, right in the trees, and there we go.
| | 05:54 | Let's return to the
Corporate Background master slide.
| | 05:57 | I'd like to replace the word
"copyright" with the copyright symbol.
| | 06:03 | Select the text caption and then double-
click and double-click on the word copyright.
| | 06:10 | In the Properties panel scroll down
under Format, and you'll see Insert Symbol,
| | 06:15 | which is this icon right here.
| | 06:17 | Click on Insert Symbol.
| | 06:20 | Choose the Copyright symbol from the list.
| | 06:24 | If we zoom in to 150%, you can see
the Copyright symbol is now in place of
| | 06:30 | the word copyright.
| | 06:32 | Let's put a space between
Copyright and 2010. There we go.
| | 06:38 | Command+0 or Ctrl+0 to Best Fit.
| | 06:42 | I have some text that's in a text file that
I'd like to copy and paste into Captivate.
| | 06:49 | It's in the Exercise Files folder.
| | 06:51 | In Chapter 03, you'll see a
folder called Text, and Statement.txt.
| | 06:59 | Open it, select all of the copy that's
in there, choose Edit > Copy--or Ctrl+C or
| | 07:06 | Command+C--and then return to Captivate.
| | 07:10 | Create a new text caption and then paste
with Command+V, or Ctrl+V. When you copy
| | 07:17 | and paste, sometimes you're going to
pick up some special formatting characters
| | 07:21 | that may come from your text editor.
| | 07:24 | You'll see them here, because they we'll be
rendered strangely, and you can delete them.
| | 07:29 | Holding down my Shift key, I'll
click just after the word available.
| | 07:32 | This will select all of the control
characters, and I can now delete them.
| | 07:37 | Once again, we need to change the caption style.
| | 07:42 | We'll choose Transparent and make this wider.
| | 07:49 | Now, I've made this new text caption on my
master slide, and that's not where I want it to be.
| | 07:53 | In fact, I want it to be on slide number 2.
| | 07:56 | So we'll cut it with
Command+X, Ctrl+X, or Edit > Cut.
| | 08:01 | We'll go to slide number 2, and we'll
paste, with Command+V, Ctrl+V, or Edit > Paste.
| | 08:09 | Move this to the middle of the
slide, and we are looking good.
| | 08:13 | At this point, let's save
this file as Chapter 3_b.
| | 08:17 | We'll do that from File > Save As,
and change the name to Chapter 3_b, and
| | 08:26 | click Save.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Checking spelling| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to see how
we can check our spelling using the spell
| | 00:03 | checking functions of Captivate.
| | 00:05 | We're going to be starting with the
Chapter 3_b file that we created in the last lesson.
| | 00:10 | If you don't have it opened, please open it now.
| | 00:13 | Let's go to slide number two in the Filmstrip.
| | 00:15 | I'd like to purposely
misspell the word environmental.
| | 00:19 | Double-click, and in word environmental,
invert the m and the n. Then hit the
| | 00:27 | Escape key to exit text editing.
| | 00:30 | Now that you've made that
change, let's check the spelling.
| | 00:33 | Under the Project menu, choose Check Spelling.
| | 00:38 | Captivate has figured out that the word
enviromnental is not a proper word, and
| | 00:44 | has suggested the word environmental for us.
| | 00:47 | Captivate will provide one or more
Suggestions if it can figure it out.
| | 00:52 | To use the word environmental,
select it, and then click Change.
| | 00:57 | Captivates alerts us that in fact the
spelling check was complete, and that one
| | 01:02 | correction was made.
| | 01:04 | Let's undo that correction, so that we
can go back to the Spell Checking menu.
| | 01:08 | You can undo with Command+Z,
or Ctrl+Z, or Edit > Undo.
| | 01:12 | Now you can see the change again.
| | 01:15 | Then go back to Project > Check Spelling.
| | 01:19 | If Captivate discovers a word that you
know to be a good word, then you can add
| | 01:23 | it to your dictionary.
| | 01:24 | This often happens with technical words,
or perhaps names of places, or names of
| | 01:29 | people that Captivate won't know.
| | 01:32 | To add a word to the
dictionary, click Add to Dictionary.
| | 01:35 | Of course, we're not going to add the
word enviromnental to our dictionary,
| | 01:39 | because that would be silly.
| | 01:41 | You could also change the language that
Captivate is using to do spell checking.
| | 01:46 | Currently, I'm using the English
language with United States usage.
| | 01:50 | You can see that we've got UK, plus
Canada, and then a range of other languages
| | 01:54 | that you can choose for spell checking.
| | 01:56 | This is very handy because if you've
got training that uses multiple languages,
| | 02:00 | you can do the spell checking in those
multiple languages without having to use
| | 02:04 | the localized version of Captivate.
| | 02:07 | I'm going to continue to spell check in English.
| | 02:10 | If I have a word that's spelled
incorrectly throughout the document, I
| | 02:13 | could choose Change All.
| | 02:16 | If I click Change, then it will make
the change, and go and find the next error
| | 02:20 | within the document.
| | 02:22 | I could delete a word by choosing Delete.
| | 02:25 | I'm not going to delete this word; instead I'm
going to accept the change and then continue.
| | 02:30 | If I don't want to make any changes at
all, I could say Ignore Once, which will
| | 02:35 | ignore this one instance of the word.
| | 02:37 | I could also choose Ignore All.
| | 02:40 | This will not add my word
to my dictionary, however.
| | 02:44 | In order to get a word into the
dictionary so that I won't be questioned the
| | 02:47 | next time I spell check, I've
got to use Add to Dictionary.
| | 02:51 | Let's Accept this change.
| | 02:54 | Now we know that a change has
been made. We can click OK.
| | 02:59 | We'll now save the file as Chapter 3_c.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding shapes| 00:00 | Let's see how we can add some shapes
to our slides in our Captivate projects.
| | 00:03 | We're going to be using the Chapter 3_c
file that we created in the previous lesson.
| | 00:08 | Open it now if you don't have it opened already.
| | 00:11 | Let's return to slide number two.
| | 00:12 | I'd like to draw a box behind
this text frame that we drew earlier.
| | 00:17 | There are a number of objects that
we can draw in Captivate directly.
| | 00:22 | About two-thirds of the way down the
toolbar, you'll see that there are four
| | 00:25 | drawing types of objects that
you can add to your projects.
| | 00:28 | Chances are you're looking at the Line.
| | 00:30 | Click on the Line, and you'll see
that there is Line, Rectangle, Oval,
| | 00:35 | and Polygon available.
| | 00:37 | Let's begin by drawing a rectangle.
| | 00:39 | Choose Rectangle from the pop-up.
| | 00:43 | Draw a rectangle that
encloses this text caption.
| | 00:46 | Click and drag, and when you've
you're your rectangle looking like this,
| | 00:50 | release your mouse.
| | 00:51 | Over in the Properties panel, it's
showing us the options for a rectangle.
| | 00:56 | First, we can see its name,
and automatically Captivate selects Rectangle_1.
| | 01:00 | To identify the rectangle in the Timeline
later, you may want to give it a different name.
| | 01:05 | Select the entirety of the word
Rectangle_1, and type "Statement Frame".
| | 01:14 | Now a space is not allowed in
the Item Name, but type it anyway.
| | 01:19 | When you hit Enter to commit that change,
Captivate will automatically replace
| | 01:23 | spaces with underlines.
| | 01:25 | It's important that names of things
never have spaces, because often, we'll
| | 01:29 | refer to them later programmatically using
ActionScript that we might write in Flash.
| | 01:34 | These objects can also be used
for quizzing and other purposes.
| | 01:38 | In order for us to be able to
understand those interactions later, it's
| | 01:42 | important that the names make some sense.
| | 01:45 | Let's change the fill & stroke
of our Statement_Frame rectangle.
| | 01:48 | I'd like to choose a fill color now.
| | 01:51 | Currently, it's slightly blue.
| | 01:54 | Click on the Fill color selector,
and then choose the eyedropper in the
| | 01:57 | upper right-hand corner.
| | 01:59 | Move your cursor over onto the
Filmstrip area, and then look at the
| | 02:02 | selector right here.
| | 02:05 | The tip of the eyedropper represents the
color that we're going to be picking up.
| | 02:09 | I want to pick up the dark color of the olive,
| | 02:11 | so I'll move my cursor until I get the
dark olive in the lower left-hand corner
| | 02:15 | of the olive, and then click.
| | 02:17 | That's now chosen that color.
| | 02:20 | Let's go back there for a moment, so
we can understand why we didn't get the
| | 02:23 | color that we had selected.
| | 02:24 | Right here, we can see the
alpha, or transparency, for the fill.
| | 02:29 | Currently, it's set to 20%.
| | 02:31 | Click and drag as far as you can to the right.
| | 02:36 | You may have to click
again to commit the change.
| | 02:38 | Now you can see that we've made it darker.
| | 02:40 | Of course, we didn't pick a new color.
| | 02:42 | All we did was change the transparency.
| | 02:45 | Click on the color selector one more
time, click on the number, and type in
| | 02:49 | 100, and then Enter.
| | 02:53 | Now you can see that by making it 100%
opaque, we've completely covered up the words.
| | 02:58 | Let's set it back to 20% transparent.
| | 03:01 | Click one more time on the Fill selector,
click on the Alpha, and type 20, and then Enter.
| | 03:08 | Let's change the stroke the same way.
| | 03:11 | Click on Stroke color selector, choose
the eyedropper, and again, we'll pick
| | 03:16 | that lower left-hand area of the olive.
| | 03:19 | Let's make the Width to be four points wide.
| | 03:22 | You can drag this slider
or type in the number 4.
| | 03:26 | If you want, you can change the
Style from a Solid line to a Dashed line.
| | 03:30 | Let's leave it solid for now.
| | 03:31 | Well, lastly, we'll adjust the Corner Radius.
| | 03:34 | So, click and drag to the
right to add a corner radius.
| | 03:38 | Let's set it to be about 15%. There we go.
| | 03:42 | I'd like to close the box up just slightly,
and now I've got it the way that I want it.
| | 03:48 | Let's add another element,
which would be a line.
| | 03:52 | Click and hold, and then choose Line.
| | 03:54 | We're going to draw a line,
but we're not going to keep it.
| | 03:58 | So in the end, we're
going to delete this object.
| | 04:00 | But I do want you to see
what we can do with the lines.
| | 04:04 | Click and drag to draw a line.
| | 04:06 | Now I haven't let go of my
mouse yet, so don't let go.
| | 04:09 | If you move your mouse up and down,
you can see that you end up with a line.
| | 04:13 | Now, if you hold down your Shift key,
then the line will snap to horizontal and
| | 04:17 | vertical orientations, or to 45 degrees.
| | 04:21 | So as you go on the compass, you'll see
that you'll be at 45-degree increments,
| | 04:25 | and at 90-degree increments.
| | 04:27 | Let's pull it straight across
to about here, and release.
| | 04:31 | You'll notice that Captivate
preserves the settings from the previous
| | 04:34 | object that we drew.
| | 04:36 | So while we had drawn a rectangle,
and set a four-point green stroke, we end up
| | 04:41 | with a four-point green
stroke when we drew our line.
| | 04:44 | This is actually quite handy, because
it allows you to continue drawing objects
| | 04:48 | with similar characteristics without
having to keep going back and changing
| | 04:51 | those characteristics when you draw.
| | 04:53 | Another aspect of a line is that you
can have starting and ending arrows
| | 04:57 | or other treatments.
| | 04:59 | Many times we would like
to draw arrows for emphasis.
| | 05:02 | We can do that directly
here using the Line tool.
| | 05:05 | Having drawn the line,
let's put an arrow at the end.
| | 05:08 | From End, click and choose Arrow.
| | 05:11 | Now you can see that
there is an arrow on the end.
| | 05:15 | We can put another shape
at the start of the line.
| | 05:18 | We have squares, circles,
and diamonds to choose from.
| | 05:21 | So there is a square, kind of hard
to see the round one, and a diamond.
| | 05:29 | Let's set it back to None.
| | 05:31 | Click on the pasteboard to deselect,
and then we can see the arrow without the
| | 05:34 | drag handles on either end.
| | 05:36 | Another shape that we can draw is an oval.
| | 05:39 | Click and hold, and pull out Oval.
| | 05:43 | Click and drag to draw the oval.
| | 05:45 | If you hold down the Shift key,
it will limit it to a circle.
| | 05:51 | Now, we have a circle, and you can move it.
| | 05:53 | It obeys the same fill and stroke
constraints that we have for the rectangle.
| | 05:58 | The last shape is a polygon.
| | 06:04 | Click once to start drawing the polygon.
| | 06:06 | You'll notice that I end up with a dashed line.
| | 06:09 | Now I haven't clicked anywhere yet.
But in order to draw the rest of the
| | 06:12 | polygon, I've got to click.
| | 06:13 | Then I'll click again, and again, and again--
| | 06:17 | I'll go all the way around
here--until I get to the end.
| | 06:21 | You'll notice as I approach the end of
my figure, I'll get a nice indicator that
| | 06:24 | says click here to close the figure.
| | 06:27 | We don't have the ability to draw a
regular polygon here in Captivate.
| | 06:32 | It is something that you'll have
to draw and then reshape it later.
| | 06:36 | You can reshape the polygon by
selecting it, and then right-click on the edge,
| | 06:40 | and you'll see Edit Points.
| | 06:43 | From here, you can click and drag any
of the points to reshape the polygon.
| | 06:48 | You can also redraw the shape.
| | 06:53 | Click and click and click
and click and click to redraw the shape.
| | 06:58 | What makes redrawing a shape special
is that it maintains the properties of
| | 07:02 | the previous shape.
| | 07:04 | Also, it maintains the original
name of that shape when we redraw it.
| | 07:09 | Otherwise, the polygon would be given a new name.
| | 07:12 | Before we save this file, I want to
remove the polygon, the circle, and the line.
| | 07:18 | To remove a shape, I can select it,
and then delete it. And I'll get this warning:
| | 07:24 | "Are you sure you want to delete?" Yes.
| | 07:27 | I can select multiple items by
clicking on one, holding down the Shift key,
| | 07:32 | selecting another, and then
deleting. Yes, of course.
| | 07:37 | Now that those additional objects are
gone, we'll save this as Chapter 3_d.
| | 07:42 | Remember, File > Save As to change the name.
| | 07:50 | It may seem like there is not a lot of
choices when it comes to drawing objects
| | 07:53 | inside of Captivate.
| | 07:55 | It's true that while we can only draw
lines, rectangles, ovals, and regular
| | 07:59 | polygons, there is lot of power there
because we can very quickly build objects
| | 08:03 | to either emphasize content, or
to create all new content directly.
| | 08:07 | Of course, many people will use tools
like Illustrator or Photoshop to be
| | 08:12 | drawing those objects, and then
importing them as images into your
| | 08:16 | Captivate files as well.
| | 08:18 | People who use Captivate a lot will
resort to both methods to get effective
| | 08:22 | layout inside of Captivate.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding images| 00:00 | In most cases, we're going to want to
add images to our Captivate projects.
| | 00:03 | In this lesson, we're going
to see how we can do just that.
| | 00:07 | We're going to begin with the Chapter 3_d
file that we created in the previous lesson.
| | 00:12 | Open that file now, if you don't have it
opened already, and then go to slide number two.
| | 00:16 | I'd like to add some images to
fill the space in the bottom.
| | 00:20 | There are several supported image
types that I can import into Captivate.
| | 00:24 | Those include JPEGs, GIFs, PNGs, BMPs--
Windows Bitmap files--Extended Metafiles,
| | 00:31 | Windows Metafiles, and a few others.
| | 00:34 | What's notably missing from that list
are Photoshop, Illustrator, and PDF files.
| | 00:38 | We can import a Photoshop file through
a different method if you happen to have
| | 00:43 | that E-Learning Suite installed.
| | 00:45 | We'll take a look at that in another chapter.
| | 00:48 | For now, let's import some images in
JPEG, PNG, and Extended Metafile format.
| | 00:54 | From the Insert menu, choose Image.
| | 00:57 | You'll see a keyboard
shortcut over on the right.
| | 01:00 | On the Macintosh, it's Command+
Shift+M. On Windows, it's going to be
| | 01:05 | Ctrl+Shift+M. This is a keyboard shortcut
that you're probably going to want to remember.
| | 01:12 | In your Images list, down near the
bottom, you'll see Olives Freshly picked,
| | 01:18 | Olives On the Tree, Olives Ready for Sale.
| | 01:22 | Let's begin with Olives Freshly picked.
| | 01:25 | Select it and then choose Open.
| | 01:29 | One thing that you'll notice is
that it completely fills the screen.
| | 01:32 | This is because this is a photograph
| | 01:34 | that's coming to us out of a digital
camera, and that photograph is going to have
| | 01:38 | the dimensions that are coming from the camera.
| | 01:41 | In many cases, cameras have very
high-resolution imagery that's set to 72 pixels per inch.
| | 01:47 | This means that many times when you
place an image into Captivate, you're going
| | 01:51 | to end up with it filling the screen.
| | 01:53 | We can adjust the size of the image,
however, over in the Properties panel.
| | 01:57 | You'll see that there is a button here
under Image Edit that says Fit to Stage.
| | 02:02 | This is a very handy button,
so go ahead and click that.
| | 02:05 | Now the image fits the stage,
and we can select the drag handles.
| | 02:09 | This becomes an important part of
your workflow if you're going to be
| | 02:12 | importing images frequently.
| | 02:14 | To resize the image, grab the upper
right-hand corner, click, and hold down the
| | 02:19 | Shift key, and then drag to the lower-left
corner, then make it to be about that big.
| | 02:26 | You can deselect by
clicking out in the pasteboard.
| | 02:30 | Now, let's get the next image: Insert > Image.
| | 02:37 | This time we'll grab Olives On the Tree.
| | 02:42 | Once again, Fit to Stage.
| | 02:47 | Now, grab the upper left-hand corner, click,
hold down your Shift key, and reduce it.
| | 02:53 | Once you're done, release the
mouse and the Shift key.
| | 02:57 | There is another way that we
can add images to our projects, and
| | 03:00 | that is to drag and drop from our file system.
| | 03:03 | On my Desktop, I have my exercise files, here
is Chapter 3, and there is my Images folder.
| | 03:10 | Already, we have Olives Freshly
picked and Olives On the Tree.
| | 03:14 | This time, we'll grab Olives Ready for Sale.
| | 03:17 | Select it, and drag it onto
the stage, and then release it.
| | 03:23 | When we release the image, it will be
located so that the upper left-hand
| | 03:27 | corner of the image is where our mouse
was when we released it onto the stage.
| | 03:32 | This helps you to better position these
images in Captivate if they've already
| | 03:36 | been resized in your image-editing application.
| | 03:39 | Since I know that this is very large, I'm
going to Fit to Stage and then shrink it.
| | 03:45 | Again, hold down my Shift key.
| | 03:48 | This time make it to be about that big,
because I don't want all of the olives.
| | 03:52 | I'm going to use the Image Cropping
feature of Captivate, so that we can have a
| | 03:57 | closer-in view of some of these olives.
| | 04:00 | Over under the Image Edit
area, you'll see a Crop tool.
| | 04:04 | Click on Crop Image, and then we
can adjust the crop for the image.
| | 04:08 | You can see the stage is
highlighted automatically, and the image goes
| | 04:11 | well beyond the stage.
| | 04:13 | You'll see that there is a Fit to
Stage button that you can choose.
| | 04:17 | This will automatically
fit your image to the stage.
| | 04:20 | However, we want to crop.
| | 04:22 | You can now choose a crop area by
clicking and dragging on the handles.
| | 04:29 | You can also move the crop area by
clicking and dragging in the middle.
| | 04:34 | Let's pick this lower left-hand
corner, and take a look at the crop area.
| | 04:38 | I'd like to set that crop
area to about 1000 x 800.
| | 04:45 | That's pretty close right there.
| | 04:47 | Now that I am done, I can click OK.
| | 04:48 | Now, I've got a cropped
image, but it is quite large.
| | 04:54 | So again, we'll have to fit it to the
stage, but it fits the cropped image to
| | 04:58 | the stage, and then we can
grab the corners, and shrink it.
| | 05:05 | We'll put it in the middle.
| | 05:06 | JPEGs and PNGs aren't the only type of
images that you can put in a Captivate slide.
| | 05:11 | Let's add a vector image that happens
to be in the Windows Metafile format.
| | 05:15 | If you remember your keystrokes on the
Macintosh, it's Command+Shift+M. On the
| | 05:19 | Windows computer, it'll be Ctrl+Shift+M.
We'll pick this Windows Metafile, or
| | 05:24 | Enhanced Metafile, down here.
| | 05:27 | Choose the one called Vector
Smart Object, and then click Open.
| | 05:31 | This, we can resize and put in
the upper right-hand corner here.
| | 05:35 | Click on a corner, hold down your
Shift key, and shrink it, and drag it up.
| | 05:42 | Because it's a vector object, you can
resize it without losing resolution.
| | 05:47 | We can import Illustrator content
by saving them as Enhanced Metafiles
| | 05:51 | or Windows Metafiles.
| | 05:52 | If you've got Illustrator vector
content, maybe logos or other types of content
| | 05:57 | that you've been using in other projects,
| | 05:59 | that's the way that you're going to be able
to use that content here inside of Captivate.
| | 06:03 | I am going to mention another method of
importing graphics into Captivate, and
| | 06:08 | that's to use Adobe Bridge.
| | 06:10 | If you happen to have the E-Learning
Suite installed, then you may see the
| | 06:14 | Bridge icon up here in your toolbar.
| | 06:16 | If you click the Bridge icon, it will
launch the Bridge, and then allow you to
| | 06:19 | drag and drop files from there.
| | 06:21 | You can also browse for content
inside of the Bridge from the File menu,
| | 06:25 | choosing Browse in Bridge.
| | 06:27 | This will launch the Bridge and allow
you to send content back to Captivate.
| | 06:32 | Once again, that's a feature that's only
available to users of the E-Learning Suite.
| | 06:36 | So, we're not going to take a
look at that in detail today,
| | 06:39 | but I did want you to be aware of it
if you're an E-Learning Suite customer.
| | 06:43 | We'll save our file now as Chapter 3_e.
| | 06:45 | An important thing to take away
from this lesson is that there are many
| | 06:55 | different types of images that we
can bring into our Captivate projects.
| | 06:59 | Sharp ears will have noticed that the
types of graphics that we can use here are
| | 07:04 | very similar to the types of
graphics that we might be using on the web.
| | 07:07 | While we can't import Illustrator files directly,
| | 07:10 | we can save them as an Enhanced
Metafile or Windows Metafile format and then
| | 07:14 | import them that way.
| | 07:15 | So we do have a workflow that
allows us to use that content.
| | 07:19 | We'll take a look at how we can import
Photoshop files directly in the next chapter.
| | 07:23 | Regardless, you still have many
different options that you can use to get your
| | 07:27 | images into your Captivate projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Aligning and distributing objects| 00:00 | Once we get images and other objects
onto our stage, oftentimes we want to be
| | 00:04 | able to arrange them or distribute
them with some type of precision.
| | 00:09 | This can be difficult to do by eyeball,
and so Captivate provides us with some
| | 00:13 | tools to automatically distribute
and align and resize our images, so that
| | 00:17 | they can maintain pleasing proportions and
pleasing spaces with respect to each other.
| | 00:21 | We're going to be using the Chapter 3_e
file that we built in the previous lesson.
| | 00:27 | If you don't have that
opened, please open it now.
| | 00:29 | I'd like to make some adjustments to
the size and position of the three images
| | 00:33 | on the bottom of Page 2.
| | 00:35 | Choose Page 2 in the Filmstrip
if you're not already on Page 2.
| | 00:38 | I'd like to begin with the images on
the left and on the right at the bottom.
| | 00:45 | Let's give them some names,
so that they make some sense.
| | 00:48 | This one, we're going to call Freshly Picked.
| | 00:50 | So under Item Name, call it "Freshly Picked."
| | 00:57 | Remember, any spaces are going to
automatically get converted to underscores.
| | 01:01 | Let's call the middle one Ready_to_
sell, and the right one On_the_Tree.
| | 01:18 | This will make it possible for us to
address these later when we're looking at
| | 01:21 | interactive content.
| | 01:23 | Now, let's take a look at the size and
position of the left- and the right-hand images.
| | 01:28 | I'd like to make them to be the same size,
| | 01:30 | but if you look closely, you can see
that they're not quite the same size.
| | 01:34 | Captivate has a method for us to
make the two objects to be the same size.
| | 01:39 | Select both objects by holding down
the Shift key and then clicking on
| | 01:43 | the left-hand picture.
| | 01:44 | We've already got the
right-hand picture selected.
| | 01:48 | We're going to use the Align command right
now, and that can be found in one of two ways.
| | 01:52 | You could right-click and this would
expose the menu that includes Align, or
| | 01:58 | you could get at it from the
Modify menu at the top of the screen.
| | 02:02 | So here is Modify > Align.
| | 02:05 | I'm interested in the option
at the very bottom of the list.
| | 02:08 | It's called Resize to the same size.
| | 02:11 | This is very handy when you've got
two objects that are almost the same
| | 02:14 | size, but not quite.
| | 02:15 | This will allow you to make
them to be, in fact, the same size.
| | 02:19 | The object on the left has shrunk a
little bit, and now the object on the left
| | 02:24 | and the right are indeed the same size.
| | 02:26 | Captivate uses the object you select
first as the basis for all of the image
| | 02:31 | distribution and adjustment
commands that we're going to use right now.
| | 02:35 | Let's grab the third image right now, by
holding down the Shift key, and clicking
| | 02:39 | on the middle image.
| | 02:41 | You'll notice that the first image that
we've picked has white drag handles, and
| | 02:45 | the other two have dark drag handles.
| | 02:47 | This is the reminder that the one
with the white handles is going to guide
| | 02:51 | whatever happens next when
we choose our alignment tools.
| | 02:55 | Let's align all of these objects
vertically, so that their centers are all in a
| | 02:59 | nice horizontal line.
| | 03:02 | I'll right-click or Ctrl+Click,
and choose Align > Align Middle.
| | 03:09 | You can see that the images on the
left have moved down to accommodate.
| | 03:13 | The next thing that I'd like to do is
to distribute them so that they are
| | 03:16 | evenly distributed across this dimension.
| | 03:19 | Now to make this work even better, I'm
going to deselect and grab this middle
| | 03:24 | one and slide it quite a bit
over to the right. Release it,
| | 03:28 | but make sure that there is a little bit of
space between it and the right-hand image.
| | 03:32 | Once again, I want to use the right
-hand image as my starting point,
| | 03:35 | so I'm going to select it first, then
hold down my Shift key and grab the
| | 03:39 | middle image and the left-hand image.
| | 03:42 | Now we'll distribute these images so
that the space between them is the same.
| | 03:48 | Right-click, pull down Align,
and I'd like to distribute horizontally.
| | 03:56 | What's happened now is that Captive has
evenly distributed these images between
| | 04:00 | the left-hand and the right-hand
image, leaving exactly the same amount of
| | 04:04 | space on the right-hand and left
-hand side of the middle image.
| | 04:08 | This is more dramatic when you
have many images that you're trying to
| | 04:11 | distribute across a line.
| | 04:13 | That line could be horizontal,
or it could be vertical.
| | 04:17 | We have other options for alignment.
| | 04:18 | I'll show them to you now,
but we're not going to use them.
| | 04:21 | Right-click and go to Align.
| | 04:24 | You can align the left-, center, or right-
hand edges of all of these selected images.
| | 04:29 | This has to do with horizontal alignment.
| | 04:32 | For vertical alignment, we use
aligning Top, Middle, and Bottom.
| | 04:37 | So don't confuse the Middle and the Center.
| | 04:40 | They're not the same thing.
| | 04:42 | Center has to do with horizontal motion,
and Middle has to do with vertical motion.
| | 04:48 | We've already seen horizontal distribution.
| | 04:51 | You can also achieve that
vertically by choosing Distribute Vertically.
| | 04:55 | Let's take advantage of these options now,
but I don't want to do it with the images;
| | 04:59 | instead, I want to reposition the
text that's in the middle of the page.
| | 05:03 | Go ahead and attempt to select
the text by clicking on the text.
| | 05:07 | You'll notice that you don't get the text;
| | 05:09 | instead, you get the rectangle
that we drew on top of the text.
| | 05:13 | I'd like to send this rectangle behind the text.
| | 05:16 | We can do this with our Arrange functions.
| | 05:20 | Right-click or Ctrl+Click, and then
choose Arrange > Send Backward.
| | 05:28 | Now click and you'll see
that we've selected the text.
| | 05:31 | The text is not centered in the rectangle,
so let's center the text in the rectangle now.
| | 05:37 | We can do that by choosing the
rectangle first, holding down our Shift key,
| | 05:41 | and selecting the text.
| | 05:43 | This makes it quite obvious that the
text and the rectangle are not aligned
| | 05:47 | horizontally or vertically.
| | 05:51 | Right-click and choose Align > Align Center.
| | 05:57 | Then once more, right-click or Ctrl+
Click, choose Align > Align Middle.
| | 06:05 | Now these two objects are
centered with respect to each other.
| | 06:09 | The last thing we want to do here
is to get them centered on the slide.
| | 06:14 | It can often be difficult to locate
the center of the slide, but we have an
| | 06:18 | automatic way of positioning our
objects directly in the center of the slide.
| | 06:23 | Right-click or Ctrl+Click, choose Align,
and you'll see Center horizontally and
| | 06:29 | Center vertically on the slide.
| | 06:32 | Let's choose each in turn.
| | 06:33 | So we'll begin with centering horizontally on
the slide, and then we'll center vertically.
| | 06:42 | The last thing I want to do for our
layout is to increase the size of the tree
| | 06:46 | in the upper right-hand corner.
| | 06:48 | So select the tree, grab the lower
left-hand corner, click, hold down your
| | 06:53 | Shift key, and drag out.
| | 06:57 | When you're done, click in the pasteboard.
| | 06:58 | We'll save our project as Chapter 3_f.
| | 07:09 | Using Captivate's built-in alignment and
distribution functions is a very speedy
| | 07:13 | way to arrange your images
quickly and easily inside of Captivate.
| | 07:18 | You've got vertical and horizontal
options to make it possible to align and
| | 07:22 | distribute large numbers of
images very quickly and easily.
| | 07:26 | Also, you can arrange the stacking
order so that if you want objects to be
| | 07:30 | behind other objects, you can do
that using the layering functions.
| | 07:34 | You'll be taking advantage of both the
distribution and layering functions with
| | 07:38 | just about every project
that you build in Captivate.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using object styles| 00:00 | Captivate uses what are called Styles
to control the appearance of many of the
| | 00:03 | objects that we create inside of Captivate.
| | 00:06 | I'd like to see how we can
manage and use those styles now.
| | 00:10 | We're going to be using the Chapter 3_f
file that we saved in the previous lesson.
| | 00:15 | If you don't have it opened,
please open it now, and go to Page 2.
| | 00:18 | I'd like to choose the text
in the middle of the page.
| | 00:22 | Go ahead and select it.
| | 00:24 | You'll see on the right, we have
an item called Style at the top of
| | 00:27 | our Properties panel.
| | 00:28 | Next to it, you'll see a Plus
sign with Default Caption Style.
| | 00:32 | This means that the caption was made
using the Default Caption Style, but then
| | 00:37 | its appearance was modified.
| | 00:39 | I'd like to save this appearance as
an appearance that we can use for new
| | 00:43 | items in the future.
| | 00:45 | We can do that by creating a new
style here, by choosing Create New Style.
| | 00:50 | If I wanted to save changes to my
Default Caption Style, then I could choose
| | 00:55 | this button, which is Save
changes to the Default Caption Style.
| | 00:59 | Instead, however, I'd
like to create a new style.
| | 01:02 | So, click on the Create New Style button now.
| | 01:07 | We'll call this "Two Trees
Text," and then click OK.
| | 01:17 | You'll see now that in the Style menu, Two
Trees Text has appeared, and there is no Plus sign.
| | 01:22 | That means that this object is using the
style Two Trees Text, and there is no overrides.
| | 01:28 | To see how we can use styles, let's
choose a different Style from the menu.
| | 01:33 | Because this is a caption, we're only
shown styles that relate to captions.
| | 01:38 | We have the Default Captions at the top
of the list, plus the style that we just
| | 01:43 | built at the bottom.
| | 01:45 | Let's see what the Default
Failure Caption looks like.
| | 01:50 | Our text caption now has a red outline.
| | 01:53 | We'll go back to Two Trees Text.
| | 01:56 | Using styles makes it possible for you
to create a look and feel for objects
| | 02:01 | and then apply it rapidly to
other objects within the document.
| | 02:05 | I'd like to be able to do
the same with the rectangle;
| | 02:08 | however, the rectangle isn't one
of the objects that we can style.
| | 02:13 | Let's take a look at the
objects that we can style.
| | 02:16 | In the Edit menu, you'll see the
Object Style Manager. Select it now.
| | 02:22 | The left-hand column shows us all of
the types of objects that we can style
| | 02:26 | inside of Captivate.
| | 02:28 | We have Standard Objects.
| | 02:30 | You can see that we can style
captions, buttons, text entry boxes and
| | 02:35 | buttons, highlight boxes, rollover
areas, rollover slidelets, slidelets
| | 02:40 | themselves, and then zoom areas.
| | 02:43 | We'll close that up.
| | 02:46 | Under Quizzing options, we can style
captions, buttons, our Progress Indicator,
| | 02:51 | our Review area, and HotSpots.
| | 02:54 | Using styles allows us to brand
how our projects are going to look.
| | 02:59 | If you're in an HR department, for
instance, you often want to make all of your
| | 03:02 | training materials look
like your company's brand.
| | 03:06 | This is the way that you can
do that quickly and easily.
| | 03:09 | There are a number of built-in styles
that come with Captivate, and we'll take a
| | 03:12 | look at some of those right now.
| | 03:14 | Close up Quizzing options, go back to
Standard options, and we're looking at Captions.
| | 03:18 | You can see our captions list is there.
| | 03:21 | Two Trees Text is in this list,
because we built it directly using
| | 03:24 | the Properties panel.
| | 03:25 | If you select it, you can see its name,
Two Trees Text, and all of its attributes.
| | 03:31 | You can change them here, or go back
to the object itself that has the style,
| | 03:36 | apply some changes, and then update
the style by clicking on the Disk icon
| | 03:41 | underneath the name of the
style in the Properties panel.
| | 03:44 | To create a new style here, I can
select an existing style, and then clone it,
| | 03:49 | and then make some changes.
| | 03:51 | Select Two Trees Text and clone it.
| | 03:54 | Now call it "Two Trees Text Bold."
| | 03:59 | Put a space between "Text" and "Bold."
| | 04:01 | Then under the Character,
change the Style to Bold.
| | 04:07 | You can see the change in the lower left.
| | 04:10 | You can also adjust the
alignment and indentation.
| | 04:13 | If this is going to be a numbered list, you
have bullet and numbering control as well.
| | 04:18 | If you need to increase the
line spacing, you'd do that here.
| | 04:21 | Select and type in a new number, such as
1.5 to get a one and a-half line spacing.
| | 04:28 | These controls look very familiar
to those of you who are Office users.
| | 04:31 | You can also control a transition.
| | 04:34 | These are animation effects that will
automatically be applied as part of the style.
| | 04:39 | The default transitions
include Fade In and Fade Out.
| | 04:43 | We also have just Fade In,
just Fade Out, or No Transition.
| | 04:48 | If you're familiar with PowerPoint, these
transitions are going to be second nature.
| | 04:52 | We'll keep Fade In and Out for now.
| | 04:56 | Let's change one of the default captions now.
| | 05:00 | Pick the Default Caption Style,
and you'll see that I can't change its name.
| | 05:04 | That's because this is one of the defaults.
| | 05:06 | Under Caption Type, I have a
number of choices that I can pick.
| | 05:10 | There are a number of groups that
are included with Captivate, and they
| | 05:14 | are grouped by name.
| | 05:15 | The Halo group goes together for instance.
| | 05:17 | There is also an Adobe group, a
Glass group, and a Pastel group.
| | 05:21 | You can see them in this list.
| | 05:22 | There are also appearances that look like
Windows for instance, or like a Macintosh.
| | 05:28 | Our default caption right
now is chosen to be HaloBlue.
| | 05:31 | I'd like to change our
default caption to be transparent.
| | 05:36 | That way, when we create a new text
caption in this particular project, it's
| | 05:41 | going to look like we see here.
| | 05:43 | It's important to note that when you
make changes to these defaults, it will
| | 05:47 | only apply to this project.
| | 05:49 | It will not apply across the board
to everything you do with Captivate.
| | 05:53 | As a reminder, you can see across the
top of the panel it says Object Style
| | 05:57 | Manager, and then the name of the file.
| | 06:00 | Let's take a look at the Button objects.
| | 06:03 | You can see that there are four
default button styles, and you can see them
| | 06:07 | indicated here as you click through.
| | 06:09 | Choose the Default Image Button.
| | 06:12 | Right now, the Default
Image Button is indicated there.
| | 06:15 | You can see that there are a
number of images that are included.
| | 06:18 | This one is called blank_silver.
| | 06:21 | You can also include other
image buttons by browsing here.
| | 06:25 | If you click Browse, you'll be taken to
Captivate's Button folder, where you can
| | 06:28 | see all of the preinstalled buttons.
| | 06:32 | Scroll down until you
see the folder called More.
| | 06:36 | Select it--maybe change your
view, so you can see it better--
| | 06:39 | and there are a number of other options here.
| | 06:42 | Let's pick the back_bluebullet_embossed_up
file, and then choose Open. There it is.
| | 06:50 | The naming convention for each
of these images is important.
| | 06:53 | To learn more about that, you can
visit the Help System that's included with
| | 06:57 | Captivate for instructions on how
to build your own button images.
| | 07:01 | Once you've chosen that default, that
will become the new Default Image button.
| | 07:07 | I'm not sure I want the Default Image
button to actually have that Back button look,
| | 07:12 | so let's pick blank_silver,
and set it to where it was before.
| | 07:16 | You could also build new styles here.
| | 07:18 | But frankly, the easier way to build
new styles is to stylize an object in
| | 07:23 | Captivate directly and then save
the Style from the Properties panel.
| | 07:28 | Lastly, you can export styles to
transport them to someone else's computer.
| | 07:33 | You can click the Export button.
| | 07:35 | The style you have selected will be
saved wherever you'd like to save it.
| | 07:40 | You can select more than one style
and then import them back into another computer.
| | 07:46 | If you've got multiple users, this is a
way for you to build the corporate style
| | 07:50 | within the HR department, for instance,
and then hand that around to establish
| | 07:54 | your look and feel for all of
the trainers in the company.
| | 07:58 | We don't need to save it,
so I'll click Cancel for now.
| | 08:02 | Having made my changes to the
styles, I'm going to click OK.
| | 08:06 | Any new objects that I create
will now follow those new defaults.
| | 08:10 | When I save this file now, the new
defaults are going to be incorporated
| | 08:14 | directly into the files, so that I'll
have them available from this point forward.
| | 08:18 | We'll save this as Chapter 3_g.
| | 08:27 | Once again, styles represent a way
for you to control the branding of
| | 08:30 | your Captivate projects.
| | 08:32 | It's a good idea to establish your
styles before you begin a large project,
| | 08:36 | so that you'll have the appropriate look and
feel for all of the new objects that you create.
| | 08:42 | If you're working in an HR
department or in a group, you can create those
| | 08:45 | default styles once and then
distribute them to everyone within the group by
| | 08:49 | exporting the styles.
| | 08:51 | Take advantage of styles to ensure
that your projects maintain a consistent
| | 08:55 | look and feel across not only the
slides, but also across all of the elements
| | 09:00 | of your projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finishing and previewing the project| 00:00 | As we're working with our Captivate
projects, we often wonder, well, what's this
| | 00:03 | going to look like when we get it on-screen?
| | 00:05 | Captivate provides a method for you to preview
your projects before you go and publish them.
| | 00:10 | You can do this either directly within
Captivate or by using your web browser.
| | 00:15 | We're going to look at both
of those methods right now.
| | 00:17 | We'll be using the Chapter 3_g
file that we saved in the last lesson,
| | 00:22 | so if you don't have that
opened, go ahead and open that now.
| | 00:25 | To preview, we'll use the Preview menu.
| | 00:27 | Click in the Preview menu,
and you'll see several options.
| | 00:31 | You'll see Play Slide, and then Play
Project, From this Slide, and Next 5 Slides.
| | 00:39 | If you are a PowerPoint user,
these options will be very familiar.
| | 00:43 | If we choose to preview the slide, it
will show us what happens when we play
| | 00:46 | that individual slide.
| | 00:48 | Before I do that though, let's
take a look down in the Timeline.
| | 00:51 | If you don't have the Timeline panel
open, click on the Timeline panel now.
| | 00:56 | This slide has a duration of 3 seconds.
| | 00:59 | I can read that out right here
by looking at the 3-second mark.
| | 01:03 | I can also see that the slide
has a duration of 3 seconds.
| | 01:06 | I can also see a 3-second slide duration here.
| | 01:10 | Lastly, I can see the Display Time
listed over here in the Properties.
| | 01:14 | I'm pointing this out to show you that
there are many indications along the way
| | 01:18 | to help you to get an idea of how long
your slides are going to last when they
| | 01:22 | play out in our preview,
and when they get published.
| | 01:25 | I'd like to extend the amount
of time that this slide lasts.
| | 01:30 | I can do it lots of different ways,
and we'll explore those when we look more
| | 01:33 | deeply at the Timeline.
| | 01:35 | For now, I'm going to use my Properties panel,
and change the Display Time to 5 seconds.
| | 01:41 | Click on the 3 and type a 5 and then Enter.
| | 01:46 | If you look in the Timeline, you'll see
the "Welcome to the Two Trees Olive Oil
| | 01:50 | Company Annual Report" text caption.
| | 01:52 | I'd like to leave it ending at 3
seconds, because what will happen is that this
| | 01:57 | object will fade away
before we change the slides.
| | 02:02 | Having made that change, let's
preview what this is going to look like.
| | 02:06 | So we'll return to our Preview menu.
| | 02:09 | First, we'll play just this slide.
| | 02:12 | You'll notice that there is
a keyboard shortcut of F3.
| | 02:15 | This is a keyboard shortcut
you're going to want to remember.
| | 02:22 | There it goes, and then it changes.
| | 02:25 | So this allows you to see what
this individual slide will look like.
| | 02:29 | As you're making adjustments to various
objects, this is a great way to be able
| | 02:32 | to test what it's going to look like.
| | 02:34 | Select the Welcome to the Two Trees
Olive Oil text frame, and let's take a
| | 02:39 | look at Transition.
| | 02:42 | Let's change the Fade Out to
be longer than half a second.
| | 02:45 | We'll make it to be 1 second.
| | 02:47 | Click on Half and type 1 and Enter.
| | 02:51 | This will now extend the
Fade Out period for that object.
| | 02:55 | Having made that change,
let's preview the entire project.
| | 02:58 | Now, I know that the project isn't
that long, so it's not going to take very
| | 03:02 | long to preview the entire project.
| | 03:03 | In fact, we've only got two slides.
| | 03:09 | Preview Project uses F4.
| | 03:11 | That's another keyboard shortcut
you're going to want to remember.
| | 03:15 | There goes slide 1. Here is slide 2.
| | 03:19 | Now, slide 2 is shorter than slide 1,
as we saw, and we also saw that extended
| | 03:24 | fade-out that we had just programmed
for that object on the first slide.
| | 03:28 | You can exit the preview by clicking this
X here or the X in the center on the top.
| | 03:34 | You can also return to
editing by clicking the pencil.
| | 03:37 | Now we're back to editing the slides.
| | 03:41 | Let's go back to slide number 1.
| | 03:44 | It's important to note that when you
preview in Captivate, Captivate is going to
| | 03:47 | build a temporary SWF file,
or a Shockwave file, SWF,
| | 03:52 | that's going to display
directly inside of Captivate.
| | 03:55 | If the SWF is too big to show,
Captivate is going to reduce the physical
| | 03:59 | dimensions of the SWF when it displays it.
| | 04:03 | This project is 800 x 600, which is pretty big.
| | 04:07 | Let's see what it's going to look like in
our browser, which will not resize the SWF.
| | 04:13 | Under the Preview menu, at the
bottom, you'll see In Web browser.
| | 04:17 | This is Command+F12.
| | 04:19 | This is another keyboard shortcut
you're going to want to remember.
| | 04:23 | When you preview in web browser, Captivate
is going to launch your default web browser.
| | 04:28 | This means that if you want to see
your Captivate project in another web
| | 04:31 | browser, you're going to have to
change your default browser and then
| | 04:35 | preview in that browser.
| | 04:37 | Alternatively, you can open a browser,
and Captivate will use the open browser.
| | 04:43 | So if you want to look at the project
in say Safari, and you happen to have
| | 04:47 | Firefox opened, then you can close
Firefox and open Safari, come back to
| | 04:52 | Captivate, and then preview in web browser.
| | 04:55 | It will then preview in Safari, even
though Firefox is your default browser.
| | 05:00 | I happen to have Firefox running right now,
so I'm going to preview in web browser.
| | 05:06 | You can choose Preview in Web browser as well.
| | 05:08 | Just know that when you preview, it's
going to go to whatever browser you have
| | 05:11 | opened, or to your default browser.
| | 05:23 | There is our project in the browser.
| | 05:26 | Something that I noticed right away is
that the project doesn't quite fit in my
| | 05:30 | window when I view it this way.
| | 05:33 | When we learn about publishing our projects,
we'll see how we can change that limitation.
| | 05:37 | For now, let's return to
Captivate and save our project.
| | 05:40 | This time we'll save it as Chapter 3_h.
| | 05:50 | Previewing is something that you're
going to do very, very frequently as you
| | 05:54 | work with Captivate,
| | 05:55 | particularly as you begin to build more and
more complex slides that have many moving parts.
| | 06:01 | Preview your slides early and often
to save yourself a lot of pain and
| | 06:04 | heartache down the line.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Free Rotation in Captivate 5.5| 00:00 | Captivate 5.5 introduced a number of new
design features that you can use in your projects.
| | 00:05 | We're going to talk about Free Rotation now.
| | 00:07 | Free Rotation is something that people
have been asking for for many versions
| | 00:10 | of Captivate and now we have it.
| | 00:12 | Let's see how we can use it.
| | 00:14 | Open up your Captivate5-5eLarning
file and then go to Slide #1, Welcome.
| | 00:19 | Select the hansel & petal
Amaryllis Training title.
| | 00:22 | Once you select that, you'll see a
new indicator just above hansel & petal.
| | 00:26 | This is the rotation handle.
| | 00:28 | I'm going to zoom in so maybe
we can see it a little better.
| | 00:31 | In order to use the rotation handle,
you need to move your cursor up on top of
| | 00:34 | it and then click and then drag to rotate.
| | 00:38 | Once you move your cursor on top
of the handle, it will change to a
| | 00:41 | rotation indicator.
| | 00:43 | You can see that now and then click and drag.
| | 00:45 | There I rotated it to the right.
I'll move it to the left now.
| | 00:49 | You can see the angle of rotation down
in the Properties panel in the Transform area.
| | 00:54 | That's indicated right here.
| | 00:56 | You can change the angle by typing in
a number or you can drag on the blue
| | 01:00 | hyperlink that's indicated next to the angle.
| | 01:03 | Right now, it says 326.9.
| | 01:05 | I'd like to change it to 45.
| | 01:07 | I can click and drag, but that's kind of slow.
| | 01:11 | So what I'd like to do is
to type in the number 45.
| | 01:13 | We'll click and then type in 45 degrees.
| | 01:17 | Now we rotated to 45 degrees.
| | 01:19 | Let's use this in one more place on this slide.
| | 01:22 | Scroll down into the right and
you'll see the Click to Continue button.
| | 01:25 | I would like to rotate
that a little bit as well.
| | 01:28 | Select it, move it up and to the left, and
then rotate it by hand just a little bit.
| | 01:33 | We're going to rotate to the right. Great!
| | 01:36 | Let's zoom out to see the entire slide.
| | 01:38 | Ctrl+0 or Command+0 will zoom out.
| | 01:40 | Now you can see that we have the
ability to rotate objects on our slides.
| | 01:44 | It isn't limited to text frames or to buttons.
| | 01:46 | It could be any object that's on
your slide that could be rotated using
| | 01:50 | this Rotation tool.
| | 01:51 | Take advantage of rotation to make
your designs a little bit more interesting in the future.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building with gradients| 00:00 | In this movie, we're going to take a
look at gradients in Captivate 5.5.
| | 00:04 | Let's move down to the
quiz portion of the project.
| | 00:07 | You can see the two master slides are in use.
| | 00:09 | There is one that begins the quiz.
| | 00:11 | Here it has the hansel & petal logo
and you can also see it on Slide #1, but
| | 00:16 | also from Slide 6 on
there is no hansel & petal logo.
| | 00:19 | I want to build that background using the
new gradient feature inside of Captivate 5.5.
| | 00:25 | The first thing we need to do
is to look at the master slides.
| | 00:28 | Under Window choose Master Slide.
| | 00:30 | Now go to Master Slide #2. Select
it and then we'll be able to edit it.
| | 00:35 | We need to draw a box on top
of this existing background.
| | 00:39 | Now this background is a Photoshop file, so
it takes up a lot of memory in your project.
| | 00:44 | We can reduce the amount of memory in
our project by getting rid of some of
| | 00:47 | these large graphics and we'll
use the Gradient tool to do that.
| | 00:50 | We need to draw a box. So move
your cursor over to the toolbox and under
| | 00:55 | Line select Rectangle.
| | 00:57 | Now draw a rectangle that goes from side-
to-side, but don't cover the entire box.
| | 01:02 | The easiest thing to do is to select
the upper left-hand corner and then drag
| | 01:06 | down to about midway all
the way over on the right.
| | 01:09 | I don't want you to cover up the
entire slide because I need the original
| | 01:13 | graphic there for reference.
| | 01:15 | Now I need to change the fill and
we're going to take advantage of the
| | 01:18 | new gradient features.
| | 01:19 | Over in the Properties panel, open up
Fill & Stroke if you don't have it open
| | 01:23 | already and then click on the fill indicator.
| | 01:26 | You'll see now that in addition to the
paint bucket, there is also a gradient fill.
| | 01:32 | Select that to begin the process.
| | 01:35 | We have a number of
gradients that are pre-built.
| | 01:37 | You can see them here.
| | 01:39 | Let's take a look at what
this blue one looks like now.
| | 01:42 | That's a very slight gradient from a
light blue to a dark blue, but we need
| | 01:46 | something that goes from the
blue that's on the screen to white.
| | 01:50 | We can change the orientation of the gradient
by looking at the Custom Gradients panel here.
| | 01:56 | I want it to go from left to right.
| | 01:57 | So I'll select this to go from left to right.
| | 02:00 | Then I can change my colors.
| | 02:02 | I need the left-hand stop to be the same
as the blue that's already on the screen.
| | 02:07 | Select the left-hand stop and you'll see that
you'll get a color picker that will show up.
| | 02:12 | Conveniently, there is an Eyedropper tool.
| | 02:14 | Select the Eyedropper tool and then
click way over on the left-hand side over on
| | 02:19 | this existing blue gradient.
| | 02:22 | Now we've matched that color.
| | 02:23 | We need to set the right-hand stop to be white.
| | 02:27 | Select it and then pick white.
| | 02:29 | Now you can move the stops simply by
dragging them to the left or the right.
| | 02:33 | Click on the white stop and move it to the left.
| | 02:37 | Now you can see what I've got is just
about matching the existing graphic.
| | 02:41 | You also can see the different
variations that show up here.
| | 02:45 | If you want your gradient to go from
corner to corner, you could choose this one,
| | 02:49 | for instance, but let's pick the
original choice which was left to right.
| | 02:53 | If you want to add additional color
stops, you can do that as well by simply
| | 02:57 | clicking anywhere underneath
the gradient. Let's do that now.
| | 03:02 | Click over here in the empty area in
the right and then we'll pick another
| | 03:05 | color to go in that spot.
| | 03:07 | Click on the color and then pick
saya red, which would be very obvious.
| | 03:11 | I don't really want to keep this.
| | 03:13 | So we need to remove this stop.
| | 03:15 | I can click and drag it off to remove it.
| | 03:18 | We can create custom gradients by
adding them to the Custom Gradients panel.
| | 03:21 | I'd like to save this gradient for use later.
| | 03:24 | You can see right here there's a little
icon that says Add to Custom Gradients.
| | 03:28 | If you click it, it will add it to our
Custom Gradients panel and then this will
| | 03:32 | be available for us later.
| | 03:34 | I have other options that include
radial fill and swapping the end points.
| | 03:38 | This will reverse the colors in the gradient.
| | 03:41 | Let's shut off the
Reverse and go back to Linear.
| | 03:43 | We're almost done with our gradient.
| | 03:45 | We need to set it back to the original
position and what I'll do is to use my
| | 03:48 | existing custom gradient selection there.
| | 03:53 | Now we need to be rid of the
background image that's on the slide.
| | 03:56 | Simply select it by clicking outside
of the gradient and then delete it.
| | 04:00 | Yes, I would like to delete the selected item.
| | 04:02 | Now we can extend the gradient
all the way down to fill the page.
| | 04:06 | Select it and then drag the
drag handle here in the center.
| | 04:09 | Gradients can also be applied
to strokes of objects as well.
| | 04:13 | Go ahead and explore how you can apply
gradients to strokes and fills on your own.
| | 04:18 | Now that we've made the change to the master
slide, let's go take a look at the results.
| | 04:22 | Select Slide #6 and there it is.
| | 04:25 | Gradients in Captivate aren't
just for filling in large areas.
| | 04:29 | You can see on this screen where
you might take advantage of the new
| | 04:32 | gradients in Captivate.
| | 04:33 | These buttons, for instance, on this
screen are natural candidates for gradients.
| | 04:38 | Go ahead and take advantage of
gradients to make your designs more exciting
| | 04:41 | on your own.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding shadows| 00:00 | Captivate 5.5 also includes the ability to
create shadows for objects in your projects.
| | 00:05 | Let's take advantage of that now.
| | 00:07 | Let's go to Slide #2.
| | 00:09 | You'll see the" Please watch
the video and then take the quiz."
| | 00:11 | I'd like to make a shadow on that.
| | 00:14 | Select it and then scroll down in
your Properties panel to Shadows.
| | 00:19 | If Shadows isn't open right now, you can
open it by clicking the little triangle
| | 00:23 | to the left of the word, Shadow.
| | 00:25 | We can turn on the shadow by clicking Enable.
| | 00:28 | Once we've done that, we see that
there're some built-in presets for shadows.
| | 00:32 | There are nine presets and
you can test them out now.
| | 00:35 | If you'd like to adjust the shadow, we
can change the color, we can change how
| | 00:39 | blurry it is, we can change how far
away it is from our object, and we can
| | 00:42 | change where it shows up in
terms of my original object.
| | 00:46 | Let's make some customizations to the
shadow now, because it's kind of hard to see.
| | 00:50 | First, let's just change the color.
| | 00:52 | Use the Eyedropper to select the color
from the background by dragging over to
| | 00:56 | the left-hand side here and then clicking.
| | 00:59 | That will pick up that blue
color that's in the background.
| | 01:02 | You can pick any color
that exists on your slide.
| | 01:04 | So feel free to explore the
different colors that are here or in your own layout
| | 01:08 | pick the colors that are there.
| | 01:10 | Now let's adjust some of the
other features of the shadow.
| | 01:13 | You can change how far away the
shadow is from the original object.
| | 01:17 | You can do that by adjusting the distance here.
| | 01:20 | You can click and drag, and you can see that
it's very far away or you can type in a number.
| | 01:26 | Let's type in the number 8. Now it's closer.
| | 01:29 | You can also change the
transparency and how blurry the shadow is.
| | 01:33 | The shadow is a little bit hard to see.
| | 01:35 | So let's zoom in on that.
| | 01:37 | I need to deselect first and then I
can zoom in and then we'll slide it down
| | 01:42 | so it's in the center.
| | 01:45 | Now we can see the shadow more clearly.
| | 01:47 | Select the caption and then we'll
go and make our further adjustments.
| | 01:51 | Adjust the blur by making it larger.
| | 01:53 | Again, click and drag to adjust and
you can see how it gets more blurry.
| | 01:58 | Let's type in the number 6 there.
| | 02:00 | Then we can change the Angle.
| | 02:03 | Drag to change and you can see
that the shadow is moving around.
| | 02:06 | We'll set it back to 45. Great!
| | 02:11 | You could also set an inner shadow.
| | 02:13 | Some objects will respond better
than others to an inner shadow.
| | 02:18 | In this case, it's hard to see it
because it's a text object, but if you look
| | 02:22 | really closely you can see that there
is some type of shadowing going on there.
| | 02:27 | It'll work better with a larger object.
| | 02:29 | So if you draw a rectangle or if you
draw other types of shapes, then that shadow
| | 02:34 | would be more clearly applied.
| | 02:36 | Let's go back to the outer shadow.
| | 02:38 | Now that you know how to apply the
shadow, you can apply that to other objects
| | 02:41 | inside of your projects.
| | 02:42 | It's not limited to text frames.
| | 02:44 | It could be any type of object.
| | 02:46 | If you've got placed graphics, it will
work on those. If you have placed video,
| | 02:50 | you can put that around the outside.
| | 02:52 | The shadow is enabled for all
objects inside of Captivate.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Using External AssetsImporting Photoshop files| 00:00 | In this chapter, we are going to be
seeing how we can use external assets in
| | 00:03 | our Captivate projects.
| | 00:05 | We are going to begin with the
feature that's part of the E-Learning Suite
| | 00:08 | version of Captivate.
| | 00:09 | When you install the E-Learning Suite,
it also installs some connectors between
| | 00:13 | Captivate and some other applications
that are part of the E-Learning Suite.
| | 00:17 | In this case, we are going to be taking
advantage of that connection to Photoshop.
| | 00:20 | If you are using Captivate as a
stand-alone, you will be able to see what
| | 00:24 | happens, but you won't be able to
follow along with this exercise.
| | 00:27 | I'd like you to open the Chapter 4
Captivate file that I have included in the
| | 00:31 | Chapter 4 folder in your Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:33 | You'll see that the file has two pages.
| | 00:36 | We need to add a page onto which
we will insert a Photoshop file.
| | 00:40 | Right-click or Ctrl+Click on
page 2 and choose Insert > New Slide.
| | 00:47 | Because slide 2 used the master slide
number 2, which is our Details Background,
| | 00:52 | we also will maintain the Details Background.
| | 00:55 | I would like to change the
Master Slide to None for this slide.
| | 00:59 | Over in your Properties panel under
General, choose Master Slide and then None.
| | 01:06 | Now let's import our Photoshop file.
| | 01:08 | When you import a Photoshop file,
this is not done through the Insert menu,
| | 01:13 | it's done through the File menu.
| | 01:15 | Under the File menu, you'll see
Import, and at the very top, Photoshop File.
| | 01:20 | Many of us use Photoshop files not only
to build the background images for our
| | 01:25 | slides, or to build specific elements
that we might use in our slides, but also
| | 01:30 | the combination. So we could have a
Photoshop file with multiple layers and
| | 01:34 | perhaps we would want to turn those layers
on and off to take advantage of various
| | 01:38 | features of that file more than one
time inside of our Captivate project.
| | 01:42 | We are going to take a look
at our file just like that now.
| | 01:45 | The file that I want to import now
is the Olive Oil_photoframe.psd file,
| | 01:50 | and this is located in the Images folder,
in the Project folder, in the Chapter 4 files.
| | 01:56 | Select it and choose Open.
| | 02:00 | Importing a Photoshop file isn't
the same as importing an image.
| | 02:03 | If a file has multiple layers, then you
have the ability to turn those layers on
| | 02:07 | and off as you desire.
| | 02:09 | By default, Captivate is going to
import a single Photoshop layer comp.
| | 02:13 | Now a Photoshop layer comp is a way in
Photoshop for you to take a number of
| | 02:18 | layers and turn them on and off and
then remember that specific state.
| | 02:22 | This particular file has three
Photoshop comps built into it.
| | 02:26 | Captivate will automatically select the
last document state, which is the state
| | 02:30 | it was in when you saved it.
| | 02:32 | You can see additional
layer comps under the menu here.
| | 02:36 | You can see that I have one called
Blurry Olives, another called Olives, and the
| | 02:40 | third called Vibrant Olives.
| | 02:42 | Let's take a look at the layers that
are turned on and off with Blurry Olives.
| | 02:47 | You'll notice that the Olives layer turned
off and the Olives Blurry layer was turned on.
| | 02:53 | Looking at the Olives layer comp
puts it back to where we started.
| | 02:56 | Of course, this is the state I left it
in when I closed and saved the document.
| | 03:01 | Lastly there is the Vibrant Olives.
| | 03:04 | This includes an adjustment layer that
makes the olives a little bit more vibrant.
| | 03:09 | You can choose to import a single
layer comp or multiple layer comps.
| | 03:13 | So if you choose Multiple layer comps,
then you can turn on and off the layer
| | 03:17 | comps you want to import.
| | 03:19 | The result inside of Captivate will be
more than one image that gets imported.
| | 03:24 | This could be very useful if you're
trying to build say a slideshow or to
| | 03:28 | show different variations on images that
you've built inside of Photoshop as layer comps.
| | 03:34 | Let's go back to the Single layer comp,
and I want to pick the Vibrant Olives right now.
| | 03:40 | I can choose to import as Photoshop
layers or as a Photoshop flattened image.
| | 03:45 | If I choose Flattened Image, then
Captivate will flatten all of those layers
| | 03:49 | into a single layer image.
| | 03:50 | I am going to leave it as layers
because I think it's important to maintain
| | 03:53 | flexibility in those images
after we've imported them.
| | 03:56 | Now that I have made my choice, I am
going to click OK to import the image.
| | 04:01 | Since I have chosen to import this
Photoshop file with layers, you can see that
| | 04:06 | I now have Image_8 and Image_7 here.
| | 04:09 | This means that I have the flexibility
to turn off and on individual elements.
| | 04:13 | So let's hide the Olives by using the
Show/Hide button that's on the Timeline.
| | 04:19 | It's located under the eyeball,
and there is a little dot that's to the right
| | 04:22 | of the name Image_8.
| | 04:24 | If you click that dot, the image will disappear.
| | 04:28 | Now, it's still on the stage;
| | 04:30 | it's just not visible.
| | 04:32 | Let's make it visible again.
| | 04:34 | We'll do the same with Image
_7, which is the background.
| | 04:38 | Now these have names that don't quite
correspond to the names of the images.
| | 04:42 | If you look here, you can see the names
of layers, which was Olives and Background.
| | 04:46 | Let's select the Background and then
up on the stage, right-click and choose
| | 04:52 | Find in the Library.
| | 04:55 | In the Library, the image has been
imported with the original name as part of
| | 04:59 | that Photoshop File.
| | 05:01 | However, the name that's been assigned
to this particular usage of that image
| | 05:05 | from the Library is Image_7.
| | 05:08 | Let's go back to the
Properties and change the name.
| | 05:11 | Instead of Image_7, let's call it
Background. Now, you can see the name has
| | 05:19 | changed in the Timeline.
| | 05:20 | Remember, it's always a good idea to
give names to your images so that you
| | 05:23 | can address them later when you're
building buttons and other types of interactivity.
| | 05:28 | Let's insert one more slide, and we'll
re-import that file a different way.
| | 05:32 | Right click and choose Insert > New Slide.
| | 05:36 | In this case, we get a blank slide
because slide 3 had no background, and now
| | 05:41 | we'll choose a File > Import one more time.
| | 05:45 | And we'll choose Photoshop File.
| | 05:47 | Once again, select Olive Oil_
photoframe and Open. And this time, I'd like to
| | 05:52 | choose the Blurry Olives document state.
| | 05:56 | I prepared these images so that
they are the same size as my stage;
| | 06:01 | however, if there was a discrepancy
between the size of the image and the stage,
| | 06:05 | I could choose Scale according to stage size.
| | 06:08 | This would then attempt to resize the
image to fit onto the stage. Of course,
| | 06:13 | this happens proportionally, so that
if it doesn't quite fit there may be a
| | 06:16 | visible bar, either above and below
or to the left and right of the image.
| | 06:20 | I've made the choice. We'll click OK to import.
| | 06:23 | Now take a look over in the Library.
| | 06:26 | If the library isn't visible, please
make it visible by clicking on the tab on
| | 06:30 | the Library here, and look down here.
| | 06:32 | We just imported the same Photoshop file again.
| | 06:36 | The first time we got the
Background and the Olives.
| | 06:40 | This time we got the Background and
Olives Blurry, but the Background has only
| | 06:45 | appeared once in the Library.
| | 06:47 | You can see that it's been used twice, however.
| | 06:50 | What we're seeing is one of the ways that
Captivate optimizes the use of your assets by
| | 06:54 | putting them into the Library.
| | 06:56 | We'll be doing a longer exploration
of the library in another chapter.
| | 07:00 | But I wanted to point out that when
you bring in those Photoshop files, the
| | 07:04 | various components of that
Photoshop file are going to be added to the
| | 07:07 | Library independently.
| | 07:09 | The last thing we are going to do with
Photoshop is to do some Photoshop
| | 07:12 | round-trip editing.
| | 07:14 | Right-click on this blurry image right
here and choose Edit PSD Source File.
| | 07:20 | Now remember this is only going to
work if you have Captivate as part of
| | 07:23 | the E-Learning Suite.
| | 07:25 | This opens my image directly in
Photoshop, and in Photoshop you can see that I
| | 07:29 | have my layers turned on and off.
| | 07:33 | Go to my layer comps, and you can see
my layer comps are laid out right there.
| | 07:37 | Here is the Vibrant Olives state.
| | 07:40 | Let's look at the Blurry Olives
layer comp, and we'll make the Blurry
| | 07:43 | Olives even blurrier.
| | 07:46 | Select the Blurry Olives layer, and under
Filter, choose Blur and a little Gaussian blur.
| | 07:53 | Let's crank that all the way up to 10.
| | 07:59 | There we go and OK.
| | 08:00 | Now there is a real difference between
the original that we can still see here
| | 08:06 | and the one that we've
just made, which is right there.
| | 08:09 | Let's close this Photoshop file and
save it, and you can see the change
| | 08:16 | immediately in Captivate.
| | 08:18 | What we've seen is an example of the
round-trip between Captivate and Photoshop
| | 08:23 | that's enabled by the E-Learning Suite.
| | 08:24 | We'll switch back to Captivate.
| | 08:27 | That image has been updated in the
original Photoshop file. Captivate has looked
| | 08:32 | into that original Photoshop file and
has drawn out the pieces that it needs to
| | 08:36 | be able to display properly
in your Captivate project.
| | 08:39 | This is a great way for you to be more
productive with your Captivate workflow,
| | 08:43 | because it allows you to use your
Photoshop files as Photoshop files and not
| | 08:48 | have to be saving for Web & Devices or
exporting them to other formats in order
| | 08:52 | to get them into your Captivate project.
| | 08:54 | Let's save this file now as Chapter 4_a.
| | 08:59 | The first time you try to save your
file from Captivate, you will be taken
| | 09:02 | automatically to the My
Adobe Captivate Projects folder.
| | 09:05 | Its location will vary
depending on your operating system.
| | 09:07 | I'm going to go right to my Desktop and
choose my Exercise Files and Chapter 4,
| | 09:14 | and I'll store this in my Project
folder, and I'll call it "Chapter 4_a."
| | 09:23 | Using Photoshop and Captivate together
has been made much easier with Captivate 5.
| | 09:28 | I hope you'll take advantage of some
of that round-trip power that we've just
| | 09:31 | seen and experienced.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing animations| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see how we
can import animations from external sources.
| | 00:04 | We are going to be using the Chapter 4_a
file that we built in the previous lesson.
| | 00:09 | If you don't have that open, please open
it now, and then go down to page number 4.
| | 00:13 | I'd like to insert an additional slide,
so please do that now. Right-click or
| | 00:19 | Ctrl + Click and choose Insert > New Slide.
| | 00:24 | In this case, I'd like to set the Master
Slide to the second master slide, which
| | 00:28 | is called Details Background.
| | 00:31 | There are several ways to import
animations into your Captivate projects.
| | 00:36 | One of them is to insert them onto a slide.
| | 00:39 | The other is to import the
animation as a slide itself.
| | 00:43 | Right now, we are going to take a
look at using animations on the slides as
| | 00:47 | objects that we can address in the Timeline.
| | 00:49 | From the Insert menu, choose Animation.
| | 00:51 | We are going to begin with an animated GIF
that we've included in the Images folder.
| | 00:59 | This is located in the Images folder,
in your Project folder, in Chapter 4 of
| | 01:03 | your exercise files.
| | 01:06 | Select LogoAnimation.gif and then click Open.
| | 01:11 | Several things have happened now that
we've placed this animation on our stage.
| | 01:15 | First, you can see that it says
animation as a reminder that this is
| | 01:18 | something that isn't a static image; in fact
it's something that's going to move with time.
| | 01:23 | Secondly, if you look down on the
Timeline, you can see that this is called
| | 01:28 | LogoAnimation, and then
it also has the icon there.
| | 01:32 | That is the Animation icon.
| | 01:35 | This is yet another reminder that
this object is going to have some
| | 01:38 | motion attached to it.
| | 01:40 | Now, this animated GIF came out of
Photoshop, and we're not going to talk about
| | 01:44 | how to build animated GIFs in this
series; however, you can take a look at the
| | 01:48 | "Photoshop CS5 for the Web" series
that's offered by lynda.com, and that does
| | 01:52 | include a lesson on how to build animated GIFs.
| | 01:56 | I have included the raw Photoshop
file along with this animated GIF,
| | 01:59 | so if you'd like to explore how
it was built, feel free to do so.
| | 02:02 | You'll notice that the animated GIF
comes in at a time of 2.4 seconds, and we
| | 02:07 | can read this directly over here in the
Properties panel. So that 2.4 seconds is
| | 02:12 | coming from the duration of the GIF itself.
| | 02:15 | We can change the length of time that
the animation occurs by simply changing
| | 02:19 | the time over in the Properties
panel or by dragging in the Timeline.
| | 02:24 | Let's extend it to the full
three seconds of the slide.
| | 02:28 | We can do this by grabbing the right-
hand edge of the Timeline Indicator here,
| | 02:31 | click and then drag it to the right,
and you can see the time is expanding.
| | 02:36 | We'll slowly drag it over
there next to three seconds.
| | 02:39 | This red triangle has shown up, telling
us that this animation is now bound to
| | 02:43 | the end of the slide.
| | 02:45 | Release your mouse, and now the
animation is going to take place over the full
| | 02:48 | three seconds of the slide.
| | 02:50 | If I hadn't made this change, then the
object would actually disappear before
| | 02:54 | the slide was done playing.
| | 02:55 | Let's preview what this does now.
| | 02:58 | From our Preview menu, choose Play Slide.
| | 03:00 | There is our animation, and I want
to point out something that's happened
| | 03:07 | because we stretched it out.
| | 03:09 | We can see the animation in the
Timeline by dragging in the Timeline.
| | 03:13 | So if I click and drag, you can
see the animation beginning to form.
| | 03:18 | Now remember this thing used
to be about 2.6 seconds long.
| | 03:22 | So I'll click and drag, and then
out here by the end, there it is.
| | 03:27 | So this is where it should end up. Perfect!
| | 03:30 | So there is how we can import an animated GIF.
| | 03:33 | Let's take a look at how we could
import SWF content that would be coming from
| | 03:36 | Flash or other sources that can create SWFs.
| | 03:39 | We are going to insert that the
same way, using Insert > Animation.
| | 03:44 | I'd like you to browse to
your Captivate folder now.
| | 03:49 | On the Macintosh, this is in the
Applications folder, and Adobe Captivate 5.
| | 03:55 | As you scroll down, you'll
see a folder called Gallery.
| | 03:59 | On the Windows computer, this is going
to be located in your Program files, and
| | 04:03 | then in your Captivate folder,
and you should see the Gallery there.
| | 04:06 | We are looking right now for
the folder called SWF Animation.
| | 04:12 | Double-click that, and you can see four folders.
| | 04:15 | This folder consists of some pre-built
animations that you can use in your projects.
| | 04:20 | Let's take a look at the
Arrows folder right now.
| | 04:23 | There's a lot of arrows available here,
and we use arrows because arrows help to
| | 04:27 | point out specific content in our projects.
| | 04:31 | I'd like to pick the Human Hand arrow,
open that up, and we have four of them
| | 04:37 | because they're going to be
animating from different sides.
| | 04:40 | Let's pick the hand_right. And you
can see that it's pointing to the
| | 04:45 | right. Click and drag this to the left so
that it will be pointing at the other animation.
| | 04:52 | Now we're talking about animation now,
which means that things happen over time.
| | 04:58 | If you look down in the Timeline,
you'll see that this animation was inserted
| | 05:02 | directly at the end of
where our slide used to be.
| | 05:06 | This is because we had our
playhead out at the end of the slide.
| | 05:09 | When you import animations, your
animation is going to appear on the Timeline at
| | 05:14 | the time where your playhead happens to be.
| | 05:17 | If after you've inserted that animation
you want to put it in a different place,
| | 05:21 | all you've got to do is to drag it to
the left or the right on the Timeline.
| | 05:26 | So let's slide this hand back a little bit.
| | 05:29 | Select it, click and hold, and then drag
it to the left, until it snaps against
| | 05:33 | where the playhead is now.
| | 05:35 | If you had moved your playhead, that's okay.
| | 05:38 | I just like it to end at three seconds.
| | 05:40 | Then we're going to take
the ending point of our slide--
| | 05:44 | you'll notice our slide
now has a four-second duration--
| | 05:46 | and I'm going to drag it back to
three seconds. There we go.
| | 05:51 | Let's preview this and see what happens.
| | 05:58 | At the end of the slide, you can see
the hand pointing at the logo, and that's
| | 06:02 | great, but it doesn't happen
for long enough period of time.
| | 06:05 | In another chapter, we'll be looking
at the Timeline in detail, and we'll see
| | 06:09 | how we can readjust the
timing of some of these objects.
| | 06:12 | For now, we're going to leave it as it is.
| | 06:14 | I'd like to talk a little bit about SWF
and GIF animation here inside of Captivate.
| | 06:19 | SWFs come from many different sources.
| | 06:22 | They can come from Flash.
| | 06:24 | They can come from Captivate.
| | 06:25 | They can come from Flex.
| | 06:27 | They can come from all kinds of
different places that can build SWFs.
| | 06:30 | Even tools like Illustrator and
InDesign can create animated SWFs today.
| | 06:34 | They can be placed into your Captivate file
and then used as animation in your projects.
| | 06:40 | The SWFs and GIFs that you place into
Captivate don't maintain links to their
| | 06:45 | sources. In the case of a SWF, it's
probably a Flash files, say an FLA. Or if it's
| | 06:51 | a GIF, it might be a Photoshop file.
| | 06:53 | If you're using these types of graphics
and you think that you want to be able
| | 06:56 | to make changes to them, it's
important that you maintain connections to the
| | 07:00 | sources for these graphics.
| | 07:02 | Those connections are not going to
be maintained inside of Captivate.
| | 07:07 | If you do happen to know an
animation source, then you can connect it in
| | 07:11 | the Properties panel.
| | 07:13 | Select the Hand animation and then
take a look at the Properties panel.
| | 07:17 | At the top, you'll see the
Linkage, which is to the SWF, but also an
| | 07:20 | opportunity to choose a source.
| | 07:22 | In this case, it's unavailable.
| | 07:24 | We don't have the source FLA, or
whatever the sources that builds up this
| | 07:28 | SWF file. But if I do have it, then I can
choose it by clicking the Edit button here.
| | 07:33 | I want to go back and call your
attention to that Library and show you some of
| | 07:37 | the other items that are inside of that Library.
| | 07:40 | Under Insert, choose Animation.
We will go up from here to SWF animation,
| | 07:49 | and look at others.
| | 07:51 | You can see that in addition to arrows,
bullets and highlights, there are a few
| | 07:54 | other elements that are included there.
| | 07:57 | One that I use frequently is this
Wrong Mark. Select it and then Open. We can
| | 08:03 | make it bigger, and then let's preview.
| | 08:12 | You can see that it builds a big
x, right? Later on, as we are building say
| | 08:16 | quizzing content, you may use that as an
indicator that something has gone wrong.
| | 08:20 | Or if you're building training content,
you may use it to indicate this was
| | 08:23 | something you shouldn't do.
| | 08:25 | All of this is available
directly inside of Captivate.
| | 08:28 | It doesn't require any
additional coding to build.
| | 08:31 | Please explore that Library to see
some of the other animations that you can
| | 08:33 | take advantage of in your
Captivate presentations.
| | 08:37 | At this time, let's save
this file as Chapter 4_b.
| | 08:45 | Imported animations are a great way for
you to emphasize certain content inside
| | 08:49 | of your Captivate projects.
| | 08:50 | We will be using other animations in
this course, and I'm certain that you'll
| | 08:54 | be using animations immediately as
you begin to develop content inside of
| | 08:58 | Captivate.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating slideshows| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see how
we can use Captivate to build an image
| | 00:03 | slideshow from images that
we've got collected in a folder.
| | 00:07 | You don't need to have any documents
open, and in fact if you want to see this
| | 00:10 | Welcome screen, then you need to have
all of your documents closed anyway.
| | 00:13 | You can create a new image slideshow
right here from the Welcome screen, or you
| | 00:18 | can do it from the File menu.
| | 00:20 | Under File, choose New
Project > Image Slideshow.
| | 00:26 | We want to create a project with
slides, and we need to tell it how big we
| | 00:31 | want the slides to be.
| | 00:32 | Captivate will take the images that we
are going to import and make them fit
| | 00:36 | onto the stage that we define right now.
| | 00:39 | We can leave this at
640 x 480 for these purposes;
| | 00:43 | however, if you like to choose a
different size, you can do that as well based
| | 00:47 | on the needs of your project.
| | 00:48 | If the size you need isn't in this
list, of course you can customize the
| | 00:52 | list and create a new size that you
can save, or you can simply type in
| | 00:58 | pixel dimensions here.
| | 00:59 | Well let's stick with 640 x 480 for
this project. Click OK to continue.
| | 01:05 | Now, we need to load in all of
the images for the slideshow.
| | 01:09 | I have a folder called Slideshow
that's in your Images folder, in the Project
| | 01:12 | folder, in the Chapter 04 exercise files.
| | 01:16 | Open that and select all of these images.
| | 01:21 | You can do this by holding down your
Shift key, clicking on the top, and then
| | 01:24 | clicking on the bottom.
| | 01:25 | Once you have them all selected, click Open.
| | 01:28 | You will get no indication
that Captivate is working.
| | 01:31 | But rest assured, it is working.
| | 01:33 | Now, we're taking a look at the Import
functionality that we see inside of Captivate.
| | 01:38 | Captivate is telling us about the image here.
| | 01:41 | This is the first image in the list.
| | 01:42 | It's 1800 x 1200,
but remember our stage is 640 x 480.
| | 01:47 | Right now, this doesn't fit at all.
| | 01:49 | So what we'd like to do is
to adjust it to fit the stage.
| | 01:52 | Thankfully, Captivate provides
us with a tool to help us to do
| | 01:56 | that automatically.
| | 01:57 | If you leave Fit to Stage selected,
then your images will automatically be
| | 02:02 | adjusted to fit onto that 640 x 480 stage.
| | 02:06 | Alternatively, you could crop the image.
| | 02:08 | So if you select Crop, then you'll see
your 640 x 480 crop area right there, and
| | 02:13 | you can move it around to pick a
particular portion of your image.
| | 02:17 | I'm going to go back to Fit to Stage, however.
| | 02:19 | What we can do is to scroll through the
images and apply different settings to each one.
| | 02:25 | Let's go to the next image now.
| | 02:27 | You can make adjustments at this
point to the images using these
| | 02:30 | adjustment tools here.
| | 02:31 | I would like this image to
be partially transparent.
| | 02:35 | Select the Alpha slider
and slide it back to 70%.
| | 02:40 | You don't get immediate feedback with Captivate,
| | 02:42 | so sometimes it's best
to simply type the number.
| | 02:44 | We'll go to the next one.
| | 02:48 | This one I'd like to
desaturate and make it look grayscale.
| | 02:52 | I could do that by clicking the
Gray Scale button here, or I could pull
| | 02:55 | the Saturation down.
| | 02:56 | Let's use the Gray Scale button. Go to the next.
| | 03:03 | This one I will crop and then slide
this in the lower left-hand corner to get a
| | 03:08 | closer view of those olives.
| | 03:12 | That one we'll leave alone,
and that one we'll leave alone.
| | 03:17 | This is our last image in
the stack, and it's very tall.
| | 03:21 | When it gets placed onto the stage, it's
going to end up being shrunk, and there
| | 03:24 | will be quite a bit of
area to either side of it.
| | 03:26 | I am using this image to illustrate
that not all images are appropriate for our
| | 03:31 | slideshows, and so you've got to
think about your original source.
| | 03:34 | In this case, because it's so tall and
thin, if I've got a background that I
| | 03:38 | put in later, that background is going to be
visible on the left and right of the slide.
| | 03:42 | We're going to leave it in the
project, however, and we'll just continue.
| | 03:46 | So now I have set up all of
my images, and I can click OK.
| | 03:48 | Of course, if you want to make an
adjustment or no adjustments and then apply to
| | 03:53 | all, you could click here as well.
| | 03:57 | Captivate will now import all
of the images as separate slides.
| | 04:01 | If I scroll down through the Filmstrip,
you can see all of my slides there, and
| | 04:06 | there is that last one that's very tall.
| | 04:08 | Something you'll notice here first is
that we have a 3-second duration for all
| | 04:13 | of the slides in the slideshow.
| | 04:15 | If you look over on the right under
the General settings, you're going to see
| | 04:18 | that what we are looking at is the
default behavior for our Captivate projects.
| | 04:23 | You can adjust this default behavior by
using the Preferences, or you can adjust
| | 04:28 | the specific behavior for these slides here.
| | 04:32 | Let's select all of the slides.
| | 04:36 | Select the first one, hold down
your Shift key, select the last one.
| | 04:42 | We now have all of the slides selected,
and I'd like to change the duration to 5 seconds.
| | 04:48 | I can drag, or I can type in a
number there. And I'd also like to change
| | 04:52 | our Transition to Fade.
| | 04:54 | What will happen is that the images
will fade from one to the other like we
| | 04:58 | expect when we see a slideshow.
| | 05:00 | By default, Captivate puts in No
Transition, and it can be quite abrupt.
| | 05:06 | You have other transitions that you
can choose as well, and you can make them
| | 05:09 | different on each slide.
| | 05:11 | Let's preview what our slideshow looks like now.
| | 05:14 | Under Preview, choose Project.
| | 05:19 | You can see it going
through the different slides.
| | 05:22 | If I were to publish this as a SWF, I
could post it on a web site, and it would
| | 05:25 | become a rolling slideshow.
| | 05:28 | Additionally, you could go back and
edit the slides and add captions or any
| | 05:32 | other types of content that
you'd want to put in after the fact.
| | 05:35 | That's enough for this. We'll go back to
our editing, and we will save this file.
| | 05:39 | We'll save it as "Chapter 4 slideshow"
and put it in your Project folder, in
| | 05:51 | the Chapter 04 folder.
| | 05:52 | Creating slideshows with Captivate is easy.
| | 05:56 | All you need is a folder full
of images, and you're good to go.
| | 05:59 | Many of us use slideshows to
help sell our products and services.
| | 06:02 | So if you're using slideshows today from
other sources, try a Captivate slideshow.
| | 06:07 | It's easy and effective.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking advantage of libraries| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to talk
about libraries in Captivate. Your library
| | 00:04 | in Captivate is the place where all of the
assets are stored for your Captivate project.
| | 00:08 | Those assets could include sounds and
video and images--all kinds of things that
| | 00:12 | can be part of that.
| | 00:14 | One of the efficiencies of Captivate is
the fact that we can use assets over and
| | 00:19 | over again in our projects
but only list them once in the library.
| | 00:23 | This comes from Captivate Flash heritage,
which makes extensive use of library elements.
| | 00:28 | We are going to begin by making an
adjustment to a Photoshop file that's in our library.
| | 00:33 | All I am going to do to this file is
simply turn on all of the visible layers.
| | 00:38 | If you don't have Photoshop, that's
okay; just pay attention to what I'm doing
| | 00:41 | and see how we solve the resulting problem.
| | 00:44 | Once again, all I am going to do is
enable all of the layers in the document.
| | 00:48 | So from my Layers panel, I have made
them all visible, and now I'll save the
| | 00:52 | Photoshop file, and close it.
| | 00:55 | Now we will go back to Captivate.
| | 00:57 | In Captivate, I've opened the Chapter
4 B file that we built in the previous
| | 01:01 | lesson in this chapter.
| | 01:03 | If you don't have it open, please open it now.
| | 01:05 | The Library panel should be
visible next to your Properties panel.
| | 01:10 | If you have hidden the Library panel of
it somehow disappeared, you can restore
| | 01:14 | it by simply choosing the Classic workspace.
| | 01:17 | Switch to the Library
panel now by clicking its name.
| | 01:20 | The library organizes
your content by content type.
| | 01:24 | You can see that currently I have no audio.
| | 01:26 | I also have a bunch of images here, I
have some animations, and I have this
| | 01:31 | Photoshop file down here.
| | 01:33 | Let's scroll down to see it.
| | 01:35 | I have no placed presentations.
| | 01:36 | You will notice that we get some
visual indications when we are dealing
| | 01:40 | with external content.
| | 01:42 | We can see that this Photoshop file is
in fact out of sync with our Captivate
| | 01:46 | project, and that's why we get that red ball.
| | 01:48 | These SWF animations happen to be in
sync, and so they have a green ball.
| | 01:53 | Let's update the Photoshop file
now by simply clicking the red ball.
| | 01:58 | This will automatically re-import the
relevant parts of that Photoshop file and
| | 02:03 | then put them into the
library as updated content.
| | 02:06 | Remember, we didn't make any pixel
changes to the Photoshop file, so we won't
| | 02:10 | see the changes inside of our
Captivate project right now.
| | 02:13 | However, Captivate now knows that
all of the parts of that Photoshop file
| | 02:17 | that we're using today are in sync with the
Photoshop file that's stored on our drive.
| | 02:23 | Everything that you insert into a
Captivate project becomes a library element,
| | 02:28 | and up to now we have been
inserting content directly onto the stage.
| | 02:32 | Let's see how we can add content to our
library without importing it onto the stage.
| | 02:37 | This will make the content available in
advance of our using it in our Captivate project.
| | 02:43 | Let's add some additional animations
that we will use in this project later.
| | 02:48 | Up above the list of items,
you'll see a few icons.
| | 02:51 | This one allows us to import
files directly into the library.
| | 02:55 | Select it now, and let's go back to
that SWF gallery that we used earlier.
| | 03:01 | This is located in your Captivate 5
folder, in your Applications folder on a
| | 03:05 | Macintosh, or in your Program
Files folder on a Windows computer.
| | 03:09 | Let's go down to Sound Effects, and we'll
import the KeyClick. Select it and open.
| | 03:18 | The sound has now been added to the library,
and it's right here under Audio. It's KeyClick.
| | 03:23 | If you would like to hear what it
sounds like, you can select it, and you can
| | 03:26 | preview it up here in the Library Preview panel.
| | 03:30 | Once you have selected it, click the
Play button in the upper-right corner.
| | 03:33 | (Key click sound)
That's a single key click.
| | 03:37 | This key click sound is now going to be
available to us when we want to use it later on.
| | 03:43 | Let's go back there and
insert some more content.
| | 03:48 | Let's go back to SWF Animation, which is
right here. We will pick Highlights, and
| | 03:55 | we will select the Green
Line Left to Right. Choose Open.
| | 04:01 | This has also been successfully imported.
| | 04:05 | Choose it in the Media area, and our Preview
area shows the line going across the screen.
| | 04:11 | You can also manage content inside the library.
| | 04:15 | In the Images, here are
our two background images.
| | 04:19 | You can see them in the Preview area at the top.
| | 04:22 | If you have imported an image and you
would like to make changes to the image,
| | 04:25 | you can edit the image
directly from the library.
| | 04:28 | You don't have to find it in the
project to be able to make changes.
| | 04:33 | You can edit by clicking the Edit
button here; however, know that this will
| | 04:37 | launch your default image editor
as defined by your operating system.
| | 04:42 | If you right-click on the image, you'll
see what the default editor is--in this
| | 04:47 | case on his Macintosh its
Preview for this type of content.
| | 04:51 | If I want to Edit with something else
other than Preview, then I could choose
| | 04:54 | Edit with, and then browse
to the appropriate Editor.
| | 04:57 | There is other information in the
Library panel that I would like to look at now.
| | 05:02 | Let's make the Library panel bigger.
| | 05:05 | Click on the left edge of the Library panel
and drag it to the left, so click and drag.
| | 05:13 | This will make the Library panel
larger and make it easier to read.
| | 05:16 | If you would like to change the width
of the columns--for instance, the names
| | 05:19 | are truncated--we can make it wider.
Click on the bar in between Name and Type
| | 05:24 | and drag to the right.
| | 05:27 | Now we can see the whole
name listed in the column.
| | 05:30 | You can also sort them by name. You can
see this triangle right here. That will
| | 05:34 | allow you to sort by ascending or
descending name. And we can begin to get other
| | 05:38 | information about them.
| | 05:40 | One of the things that can happen in
your library is that it can get cluttered
| | 05:43 | with content that you're not using.
| | 05:45 | As you add images and sounds and movies etc.
| | 05:49 | to the library, the library is going to grow,
even if the content isn't used in the project.
| | 05:55 | One of the ways that we can manage
our libraries is to use this button here,
| | 05:59 | which is the Select Unused items in the library.
| | 06:02 | We know that we have at least two
items that aren't used in our project:
| | 06:06 | there is that Green Line Left
to Right and that KeyClick sound.
| | 06:10 | Click on the select unused items,
and you'll see that we have a selection now:
| | 06:15 | our KeyClick, of course, is selected,
and our Green Line Left to Right.
| | 06:20 | But we can see that we have another
image that's not used in the document. How
| | 06:26 | much space is that taking up. Well, let's
expand our Size column, and we can see
| | 06:31 | that this image is consuming 1 1/2
megabytes of space in our project.
| | 06:37 | If we would like to free that memory,
then we can select the image by itself, and
| | 06:42 | we can remove it from the
library by clicking the trashcan.
| | 06:45 | Unless you have turned off your
warnings and your preferences, you will get a
| | 06:49 | warning about deleting this library item.
| | 06:52 | Yes, I would like to delete it.
| | 06:54 | I've now freed up 1 1/2
megabytes of space in my project.
| | 06:59 | When I save it, it will be
correspondingly smaller. Sometimes when I have got
| | 07:03 | items in my library, I'd like
to use them in other projects.
| | 07:07 | I can do that by selecting an item and then
using this button here, which is the Export button.
| | 07:15 | Let's put this file in the Exercise
Files folder, in Chapter 4, and leave it loose
| | 07:20 | above Project. Click Save to extract
that file from the Captivate project and
| | 07:26 | make it available for use in other applications.
| | 07:30 | You'll notice that the act of exporting a
graphic doesn't remove it from the library;
| | 07:35 | it simply makes a copy outside of the project.
| | 07:38 | This is very handy because if you get
a project from somebody and you don't
| | 07:42 | have the source files, this is a way to
get the source files out of the library
| | 07:46 | and then use them elsewhere.
| | 07:47 | Now that we have elements in the library,
we can use them by simply dragging and
| | 07:51 | dropping them onto the stage.
| | 07:54 | Let's go down to the page number 4,
and I would like to use the image of
| | 07:58 | Olives Freshly Picked on this slide,
and I would like to put it right on top
| | 08:02 | of this blurry part.
| | 08:05 | Select Olives Freshly Picked and
then simply drag it onto the stage.
| | 08:10 | You can see that I get a visual
indicator with that Plus sign that's telling me that
| | 08:14 | I'm inserting this graphic onto the stage here.
| | 08:19 | When I release it, the upper left-
hand corner of the picture is right where
| | 08:22 | I released my mouse.
| | 08:24 | This can help you to position content that
you're dragging onto the stage from the library.
| | 08:30 | In this case, however, the picture is
much too large, so we're going to have
| | 08:33 | to reduce it in size. Click in the upper-
left corner, hold on your Shift key, and shrink.
| | 08:38 | You may have to do this several
times, and we are almost there.
| | 08:47 | Great. I will put it there, again click
and hold down my Shift key and drag it
| | 08:54 | out, so that it just about fits in the
space, and maybe we will move it there.
| | 08:58 | Perfect. So now I have got it where I want it.
| | 09:00 | Now that I've made these changes to my
library and to my project, it's time to
| | 09:05 | save it as Chapter 4 C. I haven't
decided whether the Properties panel or the
| | 09:16 | Library panel is going to be
your best friend in Captivate.
| | 09:20 | You will have to make that decision
for yourself based on what you use more.
| | 09:25 | I'm guessing that as your projects
become more and more complex, you are going to
| | 09:28 | be spending a lot of time in the Library panel.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using widgets| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to make use
of what are called widgets in Captivate.
| | 00:04 | Widgets are SWF files that allow you to
configure what they do when they're used in Captivate.
| | 00:10 | Because of that configuration aspect,
they are treated differently than typical
| | 00:14 | SWFs that you might use in Captivate.
| | 00:16 | We are going to be using the
Chapter 4_c file that we have built in an earlier
| | 00:21 | lesson in this chapter.
| | 00:23 | If you don't have it open, go ahead and
open it now, and then go to slide number 1.
| | 00:26 | I am going to use a widget to
number the slides in this presentation.
| | 00:31 | In order to see the Widget panel,
let's switch to the Widget Workspace.
| | 00:36 | Click on your Workspace
selector and pull down to Widget.
| | 00:41 | The Widget panel has a large preview
area at the top and then a list of all of
| | 00:46 | the available widgets at the bottom.
| | 00:48 | Because of this configuration, we don't get
to see very many of the widgets by themselves.
| | 00:53 | I would like to move the Widget
panel up next to the Library panel.
| | 00:57 | Click and hold on the name Widget
and then drag it up to the right of
| | 01:01 | the Library panel here.
| | 01:03 | When you see the blue outline around this
entire panel, then you can release the Widget panel.
| | 01:10 | Now, you can see much more of the
list at the bottom of the panel.
| | 01:13 | The Preview panel shows you what some of
the widgets will look like when they're
| | 01:16 | used in your project.
| | 01:18 | At the bottom, we have the
ability to filter the list to highlight
| | 01:21 | specific types of widgets.
| | 01:24 | You can see that we can show all of
the widgets, widgets that are self-
| | 01:27 | identified as being interactive, and those
that are self-identified as being questions.
| | 01:32 | This is included in the description
of the widgets that have been provided
| | 01:35 | by the widget authors.
| | 01:36 | Let's show all the widgets, if
you're not showing all the widgets now.
| | 01:42 | At the very top, you will see an ArrowWidget,
so select it, and you can see the preview here.
| | 01:47 | You can see from the preview that we can
enter a caption for the widget in the controls.
| | 01:52 | I am not going to use this ArrowWidget
right now, but it is one of many that you
| | 01:56 | can take advantage of as
you're building your projects.
| | 01:58 | Let's go down to find a specific widget.
| | 02:02 | The widget that I'm looking for
is called a SlideNumbering.swf.
| | 02:05 | You will notice that the widget is a SWF;
| | 02:08 | in fact, all of the widgets are SWFs.
| | 02:10 | So why don't I insert them
by inserting an animation.
| | 02:13 | It turns out that the widget has some
special coding that allows Captivate to
| | 02:18 | present a menu to control
certain aspects of the widget.
| | 02:21 | This means that I can configure how the
widget is going to behave in my application.
| | 02:26 | Let's use the SlideNumbering widget now.
| | 02:28 | You can select it, and there
is a little bit of a preview.
| | 02:31 | Now the preview just says X and Y,
so it's not giving us a whole lot of
| | 02:35 | feedback. But it turns out
that there's more that we can do.
| | 02:38 | I'm going to use the SlideNumbering
widget to put a number on my slide that
| | 02:43 | looks like slide X of Y, or slide 3 of 11.
| | 02:47 | And I am sure that you have seen this
type of numbering in printed and online
| | 02:51 | documentation before.
| | 02:53 | Click the Insert button to insert this widget.
| | 02:57 | When you insert a widget, you'll
see the properties for the widget.
| | 03:01 | This widget has several different
formats, including Page X of Y, X of Y, Page
| | 03:08 | X and just plain old X, where X is the number
of the slide that the widget happens to be on
| | 03:13 | and Y is the total number of
slides in the presentation.
| | 03:17 | Let's stick with Page X of Y format
because this gives us two areas where we can
| | 03:21 | type in custom text.
| | 03:24 | This is the first of the custom text
areas, and this is the phrase that appears
| | 03:27 | before the current slide number.
| | 03:30 | Type the word "Slide" here. To the
right of that, type the word "of".
| | 03:37 | This will now display the phrase "Slide
X of Y," where X is the slide we are on,
| | 03:41 | and Y is the total number of slides
wherever we happen to place the widget.
| | 03:46 | We can also configure the font.
| | 03:48 | On the Family menu, click and
choose Myriad Pro Bold. There it is.
| | 03:56 | Let's change the size to 9 points.
| | 03:59 | We will change the color to white.
| | 04:04 | We also need to change the highlight color.
| | 04:07 | In the case of this widget, it
automatically creates a box that sits behind the
| | 04:11 | type to help highlight it in places
where you happen to have other copy.
| | 04:15 | What I would like to do then is to
choose a color that's close to this green in
| | 04:19 | this portion of the slide.
| | 04:22 | Click on the highlight color
picker and switch to the Rainbow mode.
| | 04:25 | I am just going to click down in this
area, and I end up with some colors that
| | 04:31 | look pretty close to the green I am
looking for. Of course it's hard to be
| | 04:34 | precise; this widget doesn't
happen to have an eyedropper.
| | 04:38 | That's hard enough for these purposes.
| | 04:41 | Click OK to create the widget.
| | 04:43 | It can take a little bit of time
for the widgets to get completed.
| | 04:47 | Now that it's done, you can see that I
have a widget object that has appeared on
| | 04:51 | my Timeline, and it's
centered right here on the slide.
| | 04:55 | Let's move it down to the lower left-
hand corner of the slide, and we can zoom
| | 05:01 | in on it to see a little better. Great!
| | 05:06 | Looking at the Timeline, we can see
that this widget exists for only 3 seconds.
| | 05:10 | I would like it to be
present for the entire slide.
| | 05:12 | In fact, I would like it to be
present on every slide in my project.
| | 05:17 | Switch to the Properties panel.
| | 05:19 | At the very top in Animation, you
see a button called Widget Properties.
| | 05:23 | If you click Widget Properties, you will be
able to adjust the properties of the widget.
| | 05:28 | This is great.
| | 05:29 | You can't do this with regular
SWFs that you place as animations.
| | 05:33 | Once they are there, they are there.
| | 05:35 | With a widget, you can go
back and make adjustments.
| | 05:38 | Right now, I am interested in
changing the timing for this object.
| | 05:41 | By default, it displays for a specific
amount of time, which turns out to be 3 seconds.
| | 05:47 | Let's change that.
| | 05:48 | From the dropdown, choose rest of project.
| | 05:53 | If you look at the Timeline, you'll see
it says widget and then display for the
| | 05:56 | rest of the project.
| | 05:58 | This means that this widget will appear
on every page when we publish the project.
| | 06:02 | Let's test that theory, shall we?
| | 06:05 | Let's preview our entire project.
| | 06:08 | Pay attention to the lower left-hand corner.
| | 06:12 | There is slide 1, there
is slide 2, and so it goes.
| | 06:21 | Even though we've placed this widget
on slide number 1, it persists for the
| | 06:25 | entire project because we've made
an adjustment to the Timing panel.
| | 06:29 | Let's save our project now as Chapter 4_d.
| | 06:40 | There are many more widgets in the
Widget panel that you can explore.
| | 06:43 | We will be returning to the Widget panel to
use other widgets later on in this course.
| | 06:48 | In the meantime, go ahead and
explore in the Widget panel.
| | 06:51 | There is a lot of power in there, and
because they are configurable, they are a
| | 06:54 | lot more flexible than simple SWFs
that we might place as animations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing PowerPoint presentations on a Mac| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see
how we can incorporate slides from a
| | 00:02 | PowerPoint presentation
directly in our Captivate project.
| | 00:07 | It turns out that Captivate can
import slides in their entirety from a
| | 00:11 | PowerPoint presentation.
| | 00:13 | We can then use them as slides in
our Captivate projects, complete with
| | 00:17 | animations and all of the other features
that you would expect inside of PowerPoint.
| | 00:21 | It's a very elegant workflow,
and we're going to show you this workflow
| | 00:24 | from both the Macintosh perspective and
from the Windows perspective, in another lesson.
| | 00:29 | We are going to be using the Chapter 4_d
Captivate file that we built in an earlier lesson.
| | 00:34 | If you don't have it open, please open it
now, and then go to slide 1 in the Filmstrip.
| | 00:39 | What I would like to do is to insert two
slides from an existing PowerPoint file
| | 00:44 | just after slide 2 here.
| | 00:46 | Keep your selection on slide
number 1 because I want to show you a
| | 00:49 | particular feature.
| | 00:51 | With slide 1 selected, choose
Insert and then PowerPoint Slide.
| | 00:56 | There is a key command for this action.
| | 00:59 | It's Command+Shift+P on a Macintosh
and Ctrl+Shift+P on a Windows computer.
| | 01:04 | This is one of those key commands
that you're going to want to remember.
| | 01:09 | We want to insert the PowerPoint slides
after slide 2 of our Captivate project.
| | 01:14 | So choose Slide 2 in the list here.
| | 01:16 | Once you have got that chosen, click OK.
| | 01:20 | Browse to the PowerPoint folder that's
located in your Project folder, in your CH
| | 01:24 | 04 folder, in the exercise
files that we have provided.
| | 01:27 | In it, you'll see a PowerPoint file.
| | 01:31 | Choose it and click Open.
| | 01:34 | Captivate will now read the PowerPoint file
and make copies for itself in its library.
| | 01:40 | The next thing we have got to do is to
choose which of the slides we want to
| | 01:43 | import and how we want to advance those slides.
| | 01:47 | By default, all of the slides in the
presentation will be chosen, but I don't
| | 01:50 | want all of the slides.
| | 01:52 | There is only two that I want.
| | 01:53 | So first thing I'm going to do is to
say Clear All and then slide this to the
| | 01:58 | right so that we can see slides number 4 and 5.
| | 02:02 | These are the slides that I want in my project.
| | 02:04 | Click the check boxes under slides 4
and 5, and you will see that we have
| | 02:08 | two slides selected.
| | 02:10 | I want these slides to advance on a
mouse-click rather than advancing on their own.
| | 02:15 | So I'm going to leave this setting right here.
| | 02:18 | You can see that we could allow the
slides to advance automatically based on
| | 02:22 | timings that may be present in the slide itself.
| | 02:25 | Regardless of whether we choose advance
On mouse click or advance Automatically,
| | 02:29 | animations will still be
maintained inside of that slide.
| | 02:34 | We can choose to link the PowerPoint
slides to the Captivate presentation.
| | 02:39 | If we do this then we will be able to
see in the library whether that PowerPoint
| | 02:43 | presentation has changed.
| | 02:45 | If it has changed, then we will be
able to update the presentation simply by
| | 02:49 | clicking the red ball in the library.
| | 02:52 | I'm going to leave it Linked.
| | 02:54 | Now that I've got my slides chosen
and my options selected, I will click OK.
| | 03:00 | I'm getting a warning about the width
and height of the PowerPoint presentation
| | 03:03 | as compared to the Captivate project.
| | 03:05 | I still want to import these files,
so I'm going to say Yes and continue.
| | 03:12 | You may be wondering, well,
where are those slides?
| | 03:14 | I thought that I imported them.
| | 03:16 | If you look on the left in the Filmstrip,
what we're seeing is the master slide
| | 03:19 | content on top of the slides
that we have just imported.
| | 03:23 | This happens because when the slides
get imported into Captivate, they become
| | 03:28 | the backgrounds for the
slides where they're imported.
| | 03:32 | Master page items sit on top of the background,
| | 03:34 | so we have got to turn off the
master page items for these two slides.
| | 03:39 | Select the two slides in a
Filmstrip, and on the Master Slide,
| | 03:43 | choose None, and there
are our PowerPoint slides.
| | 03:48 | Let's preview to see these slides in action.
| | 03:50 | We will start on slide number 1,
and we will preview the next 5.
| | 03:59 | The first 2 slides will auto advance.
| | 04:05 | Here comes the second one, and there is
the third one, which will stop because we
| | 04:11 | told that we want to click to advance the slide.
| | 04:14 | To advance the slide, you can
click anywhere on the screen.
| | 04:21 | This one will also stop, and there
is the last of our preview. Great!
| | 04:27 | Now let's take advantage of that
workflow that I talked about that allows us to
| | 04:31 | go back and forth between
PowerPoint and Captivate.
| | 04:35 | Let's make changes to these two slides here.
| | 04:38 | The first thing I would like to do is
to change the date to 2010, and there is
| | 04:41 | the several ways that we can do this.
| | 04:43 | I can right-click on the
page, and at the very bottom,
| | 04:46 | you'll see Edit with Microsoft PowerPoint.
| | 04:50 | I have three choices on the Macintosh:
I can edit the presentation; I can find
| | 04:54 | the presentation in the LIBRARY; or I
can export the slide as a Flash animation.
| | 04:59 | I would like to edit the presentation.
| | 05:04 | On the Macintosh and in Windows, you
need to have PowerPoint present in order to
| | 05:09 | be able to edit these
PowerPoint files from Captivate.
| | 05:12 | I happen to be using Office 2007,
but this also works with Office 2011.
| | 05:18 | We want it to make changes to slides 4 and 5.
| | 05:22 | In slide 4, I want to animate these two trees.
| | 05:26 | Select the two trees,
| | 05:28 | go to my Custom Animation panel,
and I'll have them fly in from the bottom.
| | 05:32 | I would like them to start after
previous, so they will come in one after the
| | 05:40 | other but without interaction.
| | 05:43 | Secondly, on slide 5, I need to change the date.
| | 05:49 | Select the 09 and type a 10. Now we are done.
| | 05:53 | We will save and close.
| | 05:56 | Let's return to Captivate, and we
will be asked, Do you want to import the
| | 06:06 | updated presentation?
| | 06:07 | Well, my answer is Yes.
| | 06:10 | Captivate knows that it's receiving new
information from that PowerPoint file.
| | 06:14 | Now, we've only used two of the
slides in the PowerPoint file.
| | 06:17 | There are still six other
slides that we haven't used.
| | 06:21 | Right now, we will be asked, Do we
want to import the remaining six slides?
| | 06:25 | I don't want to do that, so
I'll clear them all and say OK.
| | 06:29 | Interestingly, all of the
slides are still in my library.
| | 06:33 | There is one change: 2010.
| | 06:37 | The second change is going to be
more difficult to see unless we preview.
| | 06:41 | So let's go back to slide number 1,
and we will preview the first 5.
| | 06:44 | There is our first slide. It will disappear.
| | 06:54 | Here comes our second one, and here is our
third one with our animations, and it will stop.
| | 07:00 | Wasn't that easy to be able to edit
that slide in PowerPoint and then bring it
| | 07:03 | right back into Captivate?
| | 07:05 | Many of you have PowerPoint skills
already, and this means that you can take
| | 07:09 | advantage of those skills today to
get really exciting Captivate projects
| | 07:13 | without a whole lot of effort.
| | 07:14 | I would like to save this file now,
and we'll call it Chapter 4_e.
| | 07:19 | We have seen how we can edit the
PowerPoint directly from the slide.
| | 07:31 | Let's spend a moment to look in library.
| | 07:32 | Down at the bottom of the list, we
have our PowerPoint presentation, and it's
| | 07:37 | been used in our project twice.
| | 07:40 | Note that it has 0 as its size.
| | 07:43 | The reason that it has 0 size is
because it's linked to the Captivate project
| | 07:48 | rather than embedded in the Captivate project.
| | 07:51 | I hope you can see that the connection
between Captivate and PowerPoint is not
| | 07:56 | only powerful but exciting, and makes
it possible for you to be very, very
| | 08:01 | productive with Captivate very, very quickly.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing PowerPoint presentations on a Windows computer| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see what
happens when we edit a PowerPoint file
| | 00:03 | that's been placed in our
Captivate project in Windows.
| | 00:08 | Open the chapter 4_f file that's
provided in your Exercise folder, in the chapter
| | 00:13 | 4 folder, in the Project folder.
| | 00:14 | Once you have that opened, navigate to
slide 3 in the filmstrip, right-click in
| | 00:21 | the middle of the slide, and at the very
bottom you'll see Edit with PowerPoint.
| | 00:25 | You'll see that in Windows, we can
edit either the slide by itself or the
| | 00:29 | entire presentation.
| | 00:30 | I would like to edit just this slide.
| | 00:33 | So I am going to choose Edit Slide.
| | 00:36 | Captivate will now take the slide and
then send it to PowerPoint, which it shows
| | 00:40 | inside of its own window.
| | 00:43 | If you look down in your taskbar, you
will see that PowerPoint isn't running.
| | 00:48 | This is happening all inside of Captivate.
| | 00:51 | What I would like to do is to
change the animations on these two trees.
| | 00:56 | Switch to the Animations panel, select
the two trees, hold down the Shift key to
| | 01:02 | select them both, and I would like to
change the options for the effect. I'd like
| | 01:07 | to fly in from the left
rather than from the bottom.
| | 01:10 | So now they are going to fly in from the left.
| | 01:14 | When you're done making changes to
your slide, click the Save button in the
| | 01:19 | upper left-hand corner.
| | 01:22 | When we do that, two things happen.
| | 01:24 | First, the slide gets injected back
into Captivate, and secondly, the new slide
| | 01:29 | will get put back into the
presentation that's part of Captivate.
| | 01:33 | Having made this adjustment, we can
preview the change. And there you can see
| | 01:40 | the two trees flying in from the side.
| | 01:42 | We'll save the file as chapter 4_g.
| | 01:53 | While Captivate on any platform will
allow you to both insert and edit your
| | 01:58 | PowerPoint slides, on the Windows
machine it's a little bit different from the
| | 02:02 | Mac because we're not having to launch
PowerPoint in order to make those edits.
| | 02:07 | You have got a little more flexibility
because you can edit an individual slide
| | 02:10 | and then import that single slide
back into your project without having to
| | 02:14 | import the entire presentation again.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding the Captivate exchange| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to take a
quick look at the Captivate Exchange.
| | 00:03 | The Captivate Exchange is a place
where you can find additional content to
| | 00:08 | extend the things that Captivate can do.
| | 00:11 | That additional content might
be widgets or Flash animations.
| | 00:14 | Some of them are free,
some of them are for purchase.
| | 00:17 | Regardless, there is lot of stuff over there,
and it's worth it to go and take a look at it now.
| | 00:21 | To get to the Captivate Exchange,
all you got to do is to click on
| | 00:24 | Extend > Captivate
Exchange in your Welcome screen.
| | 00:28 | To see the Welcome screen, you need
to close any Captivate files that you
| | 00:31 | have opened right now.
| | 00:34 | Your view of the Captivate Exchange
will be different from mine, and that's
| | 00:38 | because it changes all the time as
developers add more and more content to the Exchange.
| | 00:45 | The folks at Adobe make some
suggestions here, and you can see them in the
| | 00:48 | Staff Picks. Scroll down.
| | 00:50 | You can see a whole bunch of things there,
including a Jeopardy game and some Bookmark widgets.
| | 00:58 | You can also see what's popular.
| | 01:00 | These are components that
people are downloading frequently.
| | 01:03 | You can see that there are
actually 86 listed today.
| | 01:06 | You can also browse by category.
| | 01:08 | Whether you're looking for widgets or
design templates or games or other items,
| | 01:14 | they are all available in the Exchange.
| | 01:16 | I'll point out something right
now that's important to know.
| | 01:19 | When we chose to show our widgets, the
first widget that popped up is in fact a
| | 01:24 | Captivate 4 AS2 widget.
| | 01:27 | What this means is that the developer
used ActionScript 2 to develop the widget.
| | 01:32 | This widget won't run correctly in Captivate 5.
| | 01:36 | For Captivate 5, you need ActionScript 3 widgets.
| | 01:40 | So just be aware as you're
browsing through the Captivate Exchange,
| | 01:43 | some of the content that you can download may
not work as you expect inside of Captivate 5.
| | 01:50 | Go and explore the Exchange.
| | 01:51 | There is a lot of stuff there.
| | 01:53 | If you're looking for additional content,
there's a strong chance that someone
| | 01:56 | has developed that content, and you
will be able to fetch it from the Exchange.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Animating with the TimelineTouring the Timeline| 00:00 | In the chapter, we're going
to investigate the Timeline.
| | 00:03 | We will see how we can use the
Timeline to control how objects appear and
| | 00:07 | disappear, how long they persist on the
stage, and whether or not they exist for
| | 00:11 | the entire presentation or
whether they exist for a single slide.
| | 00:14 | We'll begin down in the Timeline itself.
| | 00:17 | Now if you don't see the Timeline, that's okay.
| | 00:20 | We can recover it by
switching to the Classic workspace.
| | 00:23 | Switch to the Classic workspace now by
choosing the Classic workspace from the
| | 00:27 | Workspace menu up here.
| | 00:30 | The Timeline is along the bottom.
| | 00:32 | When you start to add more and more content to
the Timeline, however, it can get quite crowded.
| | 00:37 | For this reason, we can expand the
Timeline by grabbing on the top of the
| | 00:41 | Timeline and dragging up.
| | 00:43 | Position your mouse right here between
the Timeline and your slide, click and
| | 00:48 | hold and drag it up, and you can
see that the Timeline will get bigger.
| | 00:53 | This will allow us to see more of
the content in the Timeline at once.
| | 00:57 | We can control the width
of the Timeline as well.
| | 01:00 | You may not be able to read the names
of the objects in the Timeline, and so you
| | 01:04 | can expand that area.
| | 01:06 | Put your cursor in between the names
and the Timeline itself, click and hold,
| | 01:11 | and drag to the right.
| | 01:14 | Now we can better read the names
of the objects on our Timeline.
| | 01:18 | There are some features here
that I'll point out as well.
| | 01:20 | You can scrub through time in the Timeline.
| | 01:23 | It makes perfect sense.
| | 01:24 | We do that up here along the time ruler.
| | 01:28 | You can click anywhere on the time
ruler to advance your playhead.
| | 01:32 | That's two and a half seconds in my Timeline.
| | 01:34 | There is four seconds in my Timeline.
| | 01:38 | If you click and hold, you can drag in either
direction and see the changes in your project.
| | 01:45 | So note the differences in behavior.
| | 01:48 | If I simply click to position my
playhead, my project area doesn't change.
| | 01:54 | If I want to preview what the project
looks like in time, I've got to actually
| | 01:58 | click and drag the playhead, and that
will show me what the project will look
| | 02:02 | like at that point in the Timeline.
| | 02:05 | All of the objects that are on the
stage are visible on the Timeline, with the
| | 02:09 | exception of the background.
| | 02:12 | The backgrounds will be
accessible from the library.
| | 02:14 | I would like to focus on the objects
that are on the stage right now, and see
| | 02:18 | how we can take advantage of
the Timeline to manipulate them.
| | 02:22 | Let's go to slide number 2 in the Filmstrip.
| | 02:25 | There are more objects on this
slide than they were on the first one.
| | 02:29 | Select this Text_Caption here.
| | 02:32 | You'll see it get selected
automatically in the Timeline.
| | 02:35 | I would like to move it to the
very top of the stack of objects.
| | 02:40 | The object stacking order is
something that is important when we start to
| | 02:44 | have content that overlaps other
content, or when we are layering other
| | 02:48 | content in animations.
| | 02:50 | But if I have got one object that's
going to move from one place to another, I
| | 02:53 | want to make sure that doesn't get
obscured by existing objects on the stage.
| | 02:57 | I want to move this text caption
to the top of my stacking order.
| | 03:02 | Afterwards, I'll also move the Statement_
Frame to the top of the stacking order.
| | 03:07 | To change the stacking order, select an object.
| | 03:10 | You can select an object either by
clicking it directly like we've already
| | 03:13 | done, or you can click it in the
Timeline, and that will select it.
| | 03:18 | For instance, I'll select the
Statement_Frame, and let's drag that up.
| | 03:22 | You can see that since I clicked there,
the fist closed, and now I am holding
| | 03:27 | on to the Statement_Frame. Click and drag to
put the Statement_Frame at the top of the stack.
| | 03:34 | So I will drag it all the
way to the top and release it.
| | 03:37 | Now I will do the same thing with Text_Caption.
| | 03:40 | Click and drag it up. Great!
| | 03:44 | Now it's on the top of the stacking order.
| | 03:46 | As we dig more into the Timeline
panel, we will be interacting with these
| | 03:49 | objects pretty extensively.
| | 03:51 | There is another way that we can adjust
timing, and that's to use the Properties.
| | 03:56 | If I have an object that has timing
associated with it, I can see that timing in
| | 04:00 | the Properties panel.
| | 04:02 | Right now, we have our Text_Caption
selected, and if we scroll down in our
| | 04:06 | Properties panel, you can see
that there is a Timing panel.
| | 04:10 | If you open it, you can see that it
displays for the rest of the slide, and it
| | 04:15 | will appear after a slight delay, 0.1 seconds.
| | 04:19 | I can interact directly with these
controls right here in the Timing panel.
| | 04:23 | If I want something to display for
specific amount of time, then I can
| | 04:27 | change how it displays.
| | 04:29 | Click and hold and choose
specific time or rest of project.
| | 04:35 | If I choose rest of project, then the caption
will be present on every slide in my project.
| | 04:41 | If I want to be able to adjust the
timing precisely, then I can change to
| | 04:45 | specific time and then adjust the amount of
time that that object will remain on the stage.
| | 04:51 | Having made our layering changes,
let's save this as Chapter 5_a.
| | 05:00 | We are going to save it in our exercise
files, in the Chapter 05, Project Files folder.
| | 05:09 | The Timeline is an extremely powerful tool.
| | 05:11 | We will be looking at the details of
the Timeline in the remainder of this
| | 05:15 | chapter, but we will be using
it for the rest of the course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting timing| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see how
we can adjust the timing for objects that
| | 00:03 | appear on our stage.
| | 00:05 | We are going to be using the chapter 5_a
file that we created earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:10 | If you don't have it opened, please open it now.
| | 00:13 | Go to slide number 2 where we
will be adjusting some timing.
| | 00:16 | Select it in the Filmstrip to go to that slide.
| | 00:20 | Let's take a look at some of
the features of this slide.
| | 00:23 | The slide has a duration of 3 seconds,
but I would like it to last longer.
| | 00:28 | I can adjust the display time of the slide
either in the General settings over here--
| | 00:33 | you can see Display Time listed--or
I could do it down on the Timeline.
| | 00:38 | Let's adjust the Display
Time and set it to 5 seconds.
| | 00:43 | You can simply click here and
then type 5 and then hit Enter.
| | 00:47 | Take a look at how your Timeline has changed.
| | 00:50 | Along the bottom, we can see the
entire slide duration there, and it's been
| | 00:54 | extended to 5 seconds.
| | 00:56 | The other objects still
remain at the 3-second mark.
| | 00:59 | I would like to adjust when the three
pictures on the bottom appear on the stage.
| | 01:05 | I can do this by sliding them to the
right and the left in the Timeline.
| | 01:10 | Let's begin with the olives on the left.
| | 01:13 | Click on the picture of the olives
on the left, and you can see that
| | 01:16 | Freshly_Picked becomes
highlighted in the Timeline.
| | 01:19 | Let's drag it to the right, so that it starts
after 1 second. Click and drag to the right.
| | 01:25 | Don't let go yet because I want to focus on
the visual indicators that are on the Timeline.
| | 01:30 | As you begin to move an object,
Captivate will draw a grayed-out box that
| | 01:35 | extends all the way up to the
Timeline ruler and all the way down to the
| | 01:39 | bottom of the Timeline.
| | 01:41 | This helps you to align your content
with other objects, or to see when that
| | 01:47 | content is going to appear
and disappear on the Timeline.
| | 01:51 | I'd like to set the starting point to 1 second.
| | 01:55 | So I will drag it to the
right until it snaps to 1 second.
| | 01:59 | Once you have it starting at 1
second, you can release the mouse.
| | 02:03 | You get some feedback down here that
tells you when that content is going to
| | 02:07 | appear on the stage.
| | 02:09 | This number is the start time for that
content to appear on the stage, and this
| | 02:14 | number is the duration for
that content to appear on stage.
| | 02:18 | Right now, it is going to last for three seconds.
| | 02:20 | I would like it not to disappear after three
seconds, which is what it's going to do now.
| | 02:26 | We can preview this by dragging in the Timeline.
| | 02:28 | So click and hold to drag the playhead,
and as you can see, as you drag, that it
| | 02:33 | doesn't exist, and as we move, now it
does exists, and then it will disappear as
| | 02:41 | we go beyond the 3 seconds. There we go.
| | 02:45 | So what I would like to do now is to
have the olives actually appear for the
| | 02:49 | entire duration of the slide.
| | 02:51 | We can do that by selecting the
olives, which are already selected.
| | 02:54 | Then let's go to the
Timing panel and Properties.
| | 02:58 | Open up the Timing panel and instead
of displaying for a specific time, let's
| | 03:03 | have it display for the rest of the slide.
| | 03:06 | Now the picture will stay on the stage
for the rest of the duration of the slide.
| | 03:10 | Let's adjust the starting time of the
Ready_to_Sell olives, select them in the
| | 03:15 | Timeline, and are going to drag
so that they start at 2 seconds.
| | 03:20 | Click and hold and drag to the right.
Now they will appear after 2 seconds.
| | 03:27 | Lastly, I want to set all of the
objects on the stage to persist for the
| | 03:30 | entire slide duration.
| | 03:32 | I can select all of the objects by
clicking on the top one, holding down my
| | 03:37 | Shift key, and then selecting the
bottom, and then right-click, and then choose
| | 03:42 | Show for the rest of the slide.
| | 03:44 | This is another keystroke you're
going to want to remember: Command+E on a
| | 03:48 | Macintosh or Ctrl+E on a Windows computer.
| | 03:52 | Now all of the objects on the stage will
appear for the entire duration of the slide.
| | 03:57 | Let's drag across the Timeline
to show that, and then we'll save.
| | 04:02 | Click and hold the playhead and then drag it.
| | 04:07 | So it's starting here and then
moving forward, and there we go.
| | 04:14 | Let's save this as Chapter 5_b.
| | 04:23 | Using the Timeline to adjust when
objects appear and disappear is very easy.
| | 04:27 | Remember though, you can always
precisely control the timing of an object by
| | 04:31 | using the Properties panel and
then entering numbers there directly.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding transitions to objects| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to be
controlling transitions as they appear in Captivate.
| | 00:04 | We will be using the Chapter 5_b file
that we created earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:09 | If you don't have it open, please open
it now and then go to slide number 2.
| | 00:14 | Let's preview slide number 2 so that
we can see how all of these different
| | 00:18 | objects are appearing and
disappearing on the stage.
| | 00:21 | We will just play this slide.
| | 00:31 | At the end of the slide,
all of the content disappears.
| | 00:35 | I don't want that to happen, and so we
need to adjust the transitions that are
| | 00:39 | automatically applied to these objects.
| | 00:41 | We adjust transitions in the Properties panel.
| | 00:45 | Let's begin with the olives
in the lower left-hand corner.
| | 00:49 | Select those olives, and then
let's go to the Properties panel.
| | 00:53 | In the Properties panel,
open up the Transition area.
| | 00:56 | If you need to, scroll down so
that you can see all of the controls.
| | 01:00 | Let's change our transition to be Fade In only.
| | 01:04 | I don't want them to
disappear at the end of the slide.
| | 01:07 | Under the Effect menu,
you'll see Fade In and Out,
| | 01:11 | Fade In Only, Fade Out Only, or No Transition.
| | 01:16 | Let's choose Fade In Only.
| | 01:19 | I can control the amount of time that
it will take for the object to fade in.
| | 01:23 | Let's let it take a little bit longer.
| | 01:26 | Click and type in .75 seconds and then Enter.
| | 01:32 | Captivate will round up to the nearest 10th.
| | 01:35 | Let's apply the same change to
the other pictures at the bottom.
| | 01:49 | And now we'll preview the slide.
| | 01:50 | Now, you can see when we get to the
end of the slide, those three pictures
| | 02:01 | remain on the stage.
| | 02:02 | I would like to adjust the remaining
items so that they too remain visible for
| | 02:07 | the rest of the slide.
| | 02:12 | The text area, we will fix that, and I
will leave the timing at 1/2 a second.
| | 02:25 | Do the same here and lastly the tree.
| | 02:31 | Let's scrub across the
Timeline to see how this works now.
| | 02:38 | Our background is disappearing,
and this is because on the master page, we have
| | 02:42 | graphics that have been
tagged to disappear as well.
| | 02:44 | We will fix that and we'll be complete.
| | 02:48 | Under Window, choose Master Slide.
| | 02:53 | On the Corporate Background, choose
the background image and change the
| | 02:57 | transition to Fade In Only.
| | 03:00 | I would like to do something
different on the Details Background.
| | 03:04 | I would like that not to fade at all.
| | 03:08 | Select the background and change
the transition to No Transition.
| | 03:14 | Let's save the project as Chapter 5_c.
| | 03:25 | And we will go back to Slide 2.
| | 03:28 | Using the Transitions panel, we can
control how objects appear on the stage.
| | 03:34 | Using the Timing panel, we control
when objects appear on the stage.
| | 03:38 | The combination allows us to create
interesting animated effects for our objects
| | 03:44 | in our Captivate projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Animating using effects| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see
how we can take advantage of effects
| | 00:03 | inside of Captivate.
| | 00:04 | Effects are a way for us to stylize how
our objects appear above and beyond what
| | 00:09 | we might see inside of our Properties panel.
| | 00:12 | We will be using the Chapter 5_c file
that we created earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:18 | If you don't have it open, please open
it now and then go to slide number 2 by
| | 00:22 | clicking on it in the Filmstrip.
| | 00:24 | I would first like to add a drop
shadow to some elements on this page.
| | 00:27 | I would like to add a drop shadow to this
rectangle that goes outside of our caption.
| | 00:33 | We do this using effects.
| | 00:35 | To access the Effects panel, select the
rectangle and then right-click, and at
| | 00:41 | the bottom of the list,
you should see Apply Effect.
| | 00:45 | The Effects panel will
appear next to the Timeline.
| | 00:48 | The two panels are related because
effects often have a time component to them.
| | 00:53 | When you're editing an effect, however,
you are focusing specifically on that one
| | 00:57 | object, and you can apply one or
more effects that happen over time.
| | 01:02 | To add an effect to this rectangle, we
will click on the fx button in the lower
| | 01:07 | left-hand corner of the panel.
| | 01:10 | There are a number of effects that are
available to us, and we'll take a look
| | 01:13 | at some of them now.
| | 01:14 | In the Basic area, you will see
Rotation, Scaling, and Skewing.
| | 01:19 | We have a number of color effects
that we can apply, but these aren't
| | 01:22 | limited just to color.
| | 01:24 | They can affect the transparency, the
brightness, whether or not it's blurred,
| | 01:27 | if it's glowing. We can also tint
objects here inside of the Color effects.
| | 01:33 | There are many Emphasis
effects that can be applied.
| | 01:36 | Many of these involve additional elements
that will appear when we apply the effect.
| | 01:41 | I'll leave it to you to explore the
Emphasis effects that are available here.
| | 01:47 | If you're familiar with PowerPoint,
many of those Emphasis effects, as well as
| | 01:51 | these Entrance and Exit
effects, will be very similar.
| | 01:54 | You can see a long list of Entrance and
Exit effects, and we'll see those momentarily.
| | 01:58 | I would like to stop at Filters
because here is where we'll find DropShadow.
| | 02:04 | I will apply the
drop shadow in the Effects panel.
| | 02:09 | Now take a look at the timing.
| | 02:11 | Currently, the drop shadow
persists for only two seconds.
| | 02:15 | I would like it to last for as
long as the object is on the stage.
| | 02:19 | So I will need to extend the time
over which the drop shadow operates.
| | 02:23 | I do that by hovering over the right-hand
side of the effect, which is called DropShadow.
| | 02:28 | When I see those two arrows up here, I
will click and drag to the right, until
| | 02:33 | it snaps at five seconds.
| | 02:35 | Now the drop shadow will appear
for the entirety of the 5 seconds.
| | 02:39 | I don't have a preview of what the
drop shadow is going to look like, but I do
| | 02:43 | have the ability to create
a live preview on the stage.
| | 02:47 | I can do that by clicking
the Live Preview button here.
| | 02:51 | Captivate builds that same preview
that we see when we use the Preview menu,
| | 02:55 | except that it puts that
preview directly on the stage.
| | 02:58 | I can then see what my elements
are going to look like immediately.
| | 03:02 | We will watch it one more
time, and I'll pause it here.
| | 03:07 | I want you to take a look at
that drop shadow that we've built.
| | 03:10 | The drop shadow is a transparency effect.
| | 03:13 | This means that it interacts
with other transparent content.
| | 03:17 | The interior of that rectangle is in
fact transparent, so if you look here, you
| | 03:24 | can see that the shadow is seen
through the transparent part of that object.
| | 03:30 | When you're using some of these
transparency effects, it's a good idea to check
| | 03:33 | your results to make sure that
you like the way that they look.
| | 03:36 | I think I would like this drop shadow to
blur a little bit more, so I am going to
| | 03:39 | increase the Blur from 5 pixels to 10 pixels.
| | 03:44 | I can use my Tab key to go
through all of the values.
| | 03:49 | I'm happy with my results.
| | 03:50 | So I am going to exit the Effects
view and go back to my normal editing.
| | 03:54 | If I click Sync to Playhead, then what
will happen is that wherever my playhead
| | 03:59 | happens to be in the Effects panel,
will then go back to my Timeline, and I'll
| | 04:04 | be at that moment in the Timeline.
| | 04:07 | Let's add another effect now.
| | 04:09 | I would like to add an
Entrance effect on slide number 1.
| | 04:14 | Select this text caption here.
| | 04:17 | I'm going to change its timing
first, and then I'll add an effect.
| | 04:22 | I would like this to
appear after a one-second delay.
| | 04:26 | If I select the object on the Timeline,
I can slide it out so that it begins to
| | 04:31 | appear at 1 second, and then I would like
it to persist for the remainder of the slide.
| | 04:37 | If I right click and scroll down, I can
choose Show for the rest of the slide.
| | 04:41 | Now, let's add our effect.
| | 04:44 | Right click again and choose Apply Effect.
| | 04:49 | This time, I want to apply an Entrance effect.
| | 04:52 | Under fx, choose
Entrance and Fly In > From Bottom.
| | 05:00 | In this case, I don't want it
to take a long period of time.
| | 05:04 | I can adjust how long it takes for the
effect to occur by adjusting its timing
| | 05:08 | on this self-contained Timeline.
| | 05:10 | I will shorten this to 1.5 seconds by dragging
from here and pulling it back. Now let's preview.
| | 05:22 | And there it is.
| | 05:23 | You can apply multiple effects on this Timeline.
| | 05:27 | If I would like that image to fly in
and then fly out, I can do that as well.
| | 05:32 | Let's make that happen.
| | 05:34 | From the Effects panel,
add Exit > Fly Out > To Top.
| | 05:41 | We will shorten this to 1.5 seconds and
then move it to the end of its appearance.
| | 05:51 | Now click Play to preview.
| | 05:58 | Let's go back to slide
number 2 and add a path animation.
| | 06:02 | In addition to some of the pre-
programmed animations, you also have some
| | 06:06 | control over paths.
| | 06:08 | Select the tree. We will have this
appear from the left, but I want to control
| | 06:12 | exactly how it happens.
| | 06:14 | Choose fx, and this time choose Motion Path.
| | 06:19 | I want it to move from
left to right with an ease.
| | 06:24 | It doesn't look like much has happened
yet, so we need to control the motion.
| | 06:28 | As I move up onto the stage, you'll see
a little number 1 that has appeared in
| | 06:32 | the lower right-hand corner of the tree.
| | 06:34 | Click it and that will show us the motion path.
| | 06:38 | At the moment, the tree is starting here,
and then it's ending up long off the stage.
| | 06:44 | That isn't quite the way we
want it to happen, however.
| | 06:48 | I can grab this end of the path
and drag it to the left off the stage,
| | 06:56 | and then grab this end of the path and
drag it back to where I want the tree to stop.
| | 07:01 | This is going to happen over 2
seconds, so we will shrink that up to 1.5
| | 07:05 | seconds, and the Ease allows us
to control how that motion appears.
| | 07:11 | A positive Ease means that it's going
to be slowing down, and a negative Ease
| | 07:15 | means that it's going to be speeding up.
| | 07:17 | Let's create a positive ease of 50.
| | 07:22 | Now, we will preview. And there it goes.
| | 07:31 | Let's save this as chapter 5_d.
| | 07:42 | There are many effects that can
be applied to objects in Captivate.
| | 07:46 | These effects can be subtle and profound.
| | 07:49 | Take advantage of effects to spice
up the appearance of your objects in
| | 07:53 | your projects today.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Animating text| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see
how we can use text animation on our
| | 00:02 | slides in Captivate.
| | 00:04 | We'll be using the Chapter 5_d file
that we created earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:10 | In the Filmstrip, scroll
down to slide number five.
| | 00:13 | I'd like to add an animated title to this slide.
| | 00:17 | I can do it using the Text
Animation tool that's over in my toolbar.
| | 00:21 | I could also use the Insert menu,
but I am going to use the tool right now.
| | 00:25 | This is the Insert Text Animation tool.
Click it to insert a new text animation.
| | 00:31 | You can see in the Properties panel that
we have some fish swimming around there.
| | 00:35 | Don't worry about the fish right now.
| | 00:38 | I'd first like to focus on what the
text will say, and then we'll focus on how
| | 00:41 | it's going to animate.
| | 00:43 | I want the text to say "Our Orchards."
| | 00:48 | Select the sample text and
then just type "Our Orchards."
| | 00:55 | We can change the font
from the dropdown menu here.
| | 00:59 | We'll choose Myriad Pro from the list.
| | 01:05 | Let's set the size to 30 points and make
it bold by clicking the Bold button here.
| | 01:13 | I'd like text color to be yellow.
| | 01:18 | Click on the Color Picker here,
and we'll pick a yellow color.
| | 01:24 | Now that we've made that choice, click OK.
| | 01:30 | Captivate has now built
this text animation for us.
| | 01:33 | It's using the Aquarium effect,
but there are a lot of other effects.
| | 01:38 | I want the one that's called Fall_In.
| | 01:41 | We can access that effect by
clicking on this menu here and then choosing
| | 01:45 | Fall_In from the menu.
| | 01:50 | Our preview will change, and you
can see how Our Orchards appears now.
| | 01:56 | You can explore the
different effects on your own.
| | 01:59 | Let's put that animation
in the center of our page.
| | 02:02 | Select it and then right-click. Choose
Align > Center horizontally on the slide.
| | 02:11 | Do the same for the vertical
alignment: right-click > Align > Center
| | 02:16 | vertically on the slide.
| | 02:19 | Let's preview to see our results,
and we will preview just this slide.
| | 02:30 | You've noticed that the Text Animation
appears for a very long period of time.
| | 02:34 | In fact, it's appearing for seven seconds or more.
| | 02:37 | Let's reduce it back to our three
seconds that we had set initially.
| | 02:42 | Click and drag on the right-hand edge of the
text animation and reduce it back to three seconds.
| | 02:50 | Let's replay to see the results.
| | 02:59 | Now it happens in three seconds.
| | 03:02 | We have a transition issue that we'll
resolve right now simply by changing the
| | 03:05 | transitions on these two objects, the
image of the olives and the background.
| | 03:11 | Select the image of the olives and set
the transition to No Transition and do
| | 03:16 | the same with the background. Great!
| | 03:21 | Now we can save this as Chapter 5_e.
| | 03:32 | We've just scratched the surface of what's
available in text animations in Captivate.
| | 03:37 | As you saw, that menu was quite large and had
a lot of different effects that you can use.
| | 03:42 | Explore in there on your own.
| | 03:44 | I bet you'll find something that you
can use to make your text a little more
| | 03:47 | exciting in your Captivate projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Zooming for emphasis| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see how we can
create what's called a zoom area in Captivate.
| | 00:04 | This is an area that allows us to
emphasize certain areas of our slides by
| | 00:08 | making them larger and providing some animation.
| | 00:11 | We will be using the Chapter 5_e file that
we created in an earlier part of this chapter.
| | 00:16 | If you don't have it open, please open
it now and then go to slide number 4.
| | 00:21 | I would like to emphasize the
first quarter of this slide.
| | 00:25 | I'm going to do it by using
what's called a zoom area.
| | 00:29 | I can insert a zoom area from my toolbar,
right here, looks like a magnifying glass.
| | 00:35 | Select it and you'll see that we
get two objects that will automatically
| | 00:38 | appear on the Timeline.
| | 00:40 | One of them is my zoom source, and the other
is the amount of time that will be displaying.
| | 00:46 | Now this is an animated feature,
| | 00:48 | so the zoom is going to start in the
original location and then it's going to
| | 00:52 | grow to the destination location.
| | 00:54 | That's why there is two squares here.
| | 00:56 | The blue one is the area
that's going to be magnified.
| | 01:00 | Let's adjust that first.
| | 01:02 | Select the zoom source and then
move it over to this side of the graph.
| | 01:08 | You can see that the zoom
destination has already updated.
| | 01:13 | Drag down so that you can
see all of the Q1 results.
| | 01:17 | This will include some of the
Q2 results, and that's okay.
| | 01:20 | We will need to change the zoom
destination to make it larger.
| | 01:25 | You can see right now that it's actually
reducing the content to fit into the smaller area.
| | 01:30 | If we hover over, we can see that
we have 197 x 275 as our dimensions.
| | 01:36 | We will want to try and
preserve these proportions if we can.
| | 01:40 | Select the zoom destination and drag it
into the upper right-hand corner of this page.
| | 01:46 | Grab the lower left-hand corner
and drag it towards the middle.
| | 01:52 | Look at your Position and Size.
| | 01:55 | You can enter in precise values for the
width and height of the zoom destination.
| | 01:59 | You can also do this with a zoom source.
| | 02:02 | If we select the zoom source and then
open up Position and Size, we can see
| | 02:07 | that it's 197 x 275.
| | 02:10 | Let's make this easy to
calculate by making it to be 200 wide.
| | 02:14 | We will change the height to 280.
| | 02:17 | Before we type our change, however,
we've got to uncheck Constrain proportions.
| | 02:22 | Otherwise, when we change this to 280,
this is likely to increase to 201.
| | 02:28 | Select and type "280" and then Return.
| | 02:34 | Select the zoom destination, and what
we're going to do is to magnify by 50%.
| | 02:38 | That means that the width is going to
have to be 200 times 1.5, which would be 300.
| | 02:46 | And the height is going to
have to be 1.5 times 280.
| | 02:48 | We will need to shut off Constrain
proportions to be able to get at that number.
| | 02:53 | 1.5 times 280 is 420,
| | 02:57 | so we can enter that number right here.
| | 03:02 | Now we have the same proportions between
the zoom source and the zoom destination.
| | 03:08 | Let's turn our Constrain proportions on
again, and we will move this over here
| | 03:13 | so it fits in this space.
| | 03:16 | We can control the width of the outside stroke.
| | 03:19 | By default, it's kind of
pink and has a 1-point width.
| | 03:23 | Let's set it to be 3 points
wide and change it to blue.
| | 03:27 | We will do the same with the zoom source:
| | 03:35 | change its outline to be blue and set
its stroke to be 3 points wide. Great!
| | 03:42 | Let's preview the results.
| | 03:44 | We will use preview from this slide.
| | 03:52 | You can see that zooming animation
takes place, but it goes away very quickly.
| | 03:56 | I would like the slide to
last a little bit longer.
| | 04:01 | We can adjust the amount of time it
takes to zoom by dragging this bar that's in
| | 04:05 | the middle of the zoom area on the Timeline.
| | 04:07 | Click and drag it to the left to shorten
the amount of time it takes to zoom and
| | 04:12 | extend the amount of
time that it lasts on stage.
| | 04:15 | Let's make the entire
duration of the slide five seconds.
| | 04:19 | We can do that by dragging the slide
duration here to the right to five seconds.
| | 04:24 | Click and drag and pull it out to five seconds.
| | 04:28 | Let's move this Click Box to the end as well.
| | 04:31 | Select the Click Box and drag it
all the way to the end of the slide.
| | 04:36 | That red arrow tells us that the Click
Box has been pinned to the end of the slide.
| | 04:41 | Let's preview one last time,
and then we'll save our project.
| | 04:44 | We will preview from this slide again.
| | 04:47 | Now you can see that the zoom is
hanging on for a longer period of time.
| | 04:55 | I've noticed that the zoom area is
disappearing at the end of the slide.
| | 04:59 | Let's fix that by changing the transition.
| | 05:01 | Select the zoom source and
change our Effect to No Transition.
| | 05:09 | Now that we've made that change,
let's save it as Chapter5_f.
| | 05:22 | Zoom areas can be an effective way
for you to emphasize specific content in
| | 05:25 | your Captivate projects.
| | 05:27 | An important thing to remember
though is that you want to maintain the
| | 05:31 | proportions between the zoom
source and the zoom destination.
| | 05:35 | Your content in your zoom destination
will distort if you don't maintain the
| | 05:40 | proportions between the
source and the destination.
| | 05:43 | It's always good to keep a calculator
handy when using the Zoom Area tool.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Using Audio and VideoThe recording environment| 00:00 | Before we get started, I would
like to mention a little about your
| | 00:03 | recording environment.
| | 00:04 | Be sure to get a good
microphone for your voice recording.
| | 00:07 | In my home studio, I am used the Blue Snowball.
| | 00:10 | There are a lot of choices, and
one of them will be right for you.
| | 00:13 | Find a quiet room, and if possible,
hang cloths or drapes on the wall to
| | 00:18 | absorb some of the sound.
| | 00:19 | Towels work well, too.
| | 00:21 | Also, remove loose items from your
workspace so that your hands won't hit them
| | 00:25 | and make noise when you're moving your mouse.
| | 00:28 | Take some time setting up
your recording environment;
| | 00:30 | you will be glad you did.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding background audio| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see how we
can add background audio to our presentations.
| | 00:04 | We are going to be using the Chapter
6 file that's located in your Project
| | 00:08 | folder, in the CH 06 folder,
inside of your Exercises folder.
| | 00:12 | Open it and then go to slide number 1.
| | 00:14 | We are going to insert
some audio into the project.
| | 00:18 | In this case, we are going to put some
audio on the background of the slide.
| | 00:22 | We can do this by using the Audio menu,
and you'll see Import to at the top of the list.
| | 00:28 | We are going to import audio to the
Background, rather than to the Slide.
| | 00:33 | Now, I would like to talk briefly about
the difference between importing audio
| | 00:36 | to the background versus to the slide.
| | 00:39 | If I import audio to the background,
it's going to play underneath any sounds
| | 00:43 | that happen to appear on the slide.
| | 00:45 | In this case, we are going to add a long
song that's going to play all the time.
| | 00:50 | As slides change, that
background music will continue to play.
| | 00:55 | In a later lesson, we'll see how we can
mask background audio, so that we can
| | 00:59 | better hear the audio that may be on a slide.
| | 01:02 | When we import audio to a slide, that's
only going to play while that slide is present.
| | 01:07 | For now, we are going to an
import some audio to the background.
| | 01:11 | If you're just starting Captivate,
then you will be taken to the Sound folder
| | 01:15 | that's in the Gallery
folder, inside of Captivate.
| | 01:19 | There are many sounds that are in here,
and they can all be used to help enhance
| | 01:22 | your Captivate projects.
| | 01:24 | We, however, need to be looking in the CH
06 folder that's in your Exercises folder.
| | 01:31 | Go into the Project folder,
and you will see a folder called Sounds.
| | 01:36 | Choose the 90 second
background file and then click Open.
| | 01:41 | You can import either WAV
files or MP3 files onto your slides.
| | 01:48 | If you have audio that's not in one
of those formats, then you will need to
| | 01:51 | convert it to either MP3 or the WAV format.
| | 01:55 | Once the audio finishes importing,
then we will get to see the Audio panel.
| | 01:59 | In this case, we are looking at the
background audio, and we can see the waveform.
| | 02:02 | It has time across the top, and you can
see the entirety of that 90-second song
| | 02:08 | as we move through it.
| | 02:12 | There are a few controls that we can use.
| | 02:15 | We can fade in and fade out the
sound at the beginning and the end.
| | 02:19 | We can also control whether or not the
audio will loop and whether it will stop
| | 02:23 | at the end of the project.
| | 02:26 | In addition, if we have audio on
slides, then Captivate will automatically
| | 02:30 | reduce the volume of the
background by the amount that you set here.
| | 02:34 | By default, it's going to reduce that by 50%.
| | 02:38 | In addition to being able to see
the audio, we can also preview it by
| | 02:42 | clicking the Play button.
| | 02:43 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:50 | I will stop it there, and I can also edit it.
| | 02:54 | Click on the Edit tab now.
| | 02:56 | Scroll way out to the end, and you can
see that there's several seconds of silence.
| | 03:02 | Let's remove the last second of silence.
| | 03:07 | Click and drag just above the waveform,
and then we can play the selected sound.
| | 03:14 | Well, it turns out it's not quite silent,
| | 03:18 | so perhaps I don't want to remove it.
| | 03:21 | In many cases, you'll get sounds that
will have silence in the beginning or the
| | 03:25 | end, or you'd like to insert silence.
| | 03:28 | We will see editing in
more detail in another lesson.
| | 03:31 | For now, I'll accept this and close.
| | 03:36 | Let's preview our project
to see that audio in action.
| | 03:43 | (Music playing.)
| | 03:55 | I don't need to go any further than that.
| | 03:57 | And we can close the preview.
| | 04:00 | Let's save our project as Chapter 6_a.
| | 04:06 | You will want to put it in your CH 06
folder, in the Projects folder, and again
| | 04:12 | call it Chapter 6_a.
| | 04:17 | Using background audio in Captivate is
a great way to provide continuity from
| | 04:22 | slide to slide through the use of sound.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding audio to an object| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to see
how we can add audio to an object in
| | 00:03 | Captivate. We're going to be using
the Chapter 6_a file that we saved
| | 00:07 | previously in this chapter.
| | 00:09 | If you don't have it open, please open it now.
| | 00:12 | You can add audio to just about every
object that you can create inside of Captivate.
| | 00:17 | When you add audio to an object, that
audio will play as soon as that object
| | 00:22 | appears on the stage. This means that
timing can be critical when we're talking
| | 00:27 | about when those songs will play on your stage.
| | 00:30 | I would like the user to click a
Continue button in order to see the slideshow
| | 00:34 | that comes up after this Welcome screen.
At the same time I would like a sound to
| | 00:39 | play after we click Continue.
| | 00:41 | In order to make that happen,
I have to do several things.
| | 00:45 | First, I have to create a button that
says Continue. Secondly, I have to have an
| | 00:49 | object that will play some sound when
it appears on the stage. Third, I've got
| | 00:54 | to adjust my timing, so that the pause
for the button happens before that sound
| | 01:00 | object appears on the stage.
| | 01:02 | Let's take all of those steps in
turn. The first thing we need to do is to
| | 01:06 | construct our button. With the Button
tool, let's create a button and move it to
| | 01:12 | the lower right-hand corner of
the stage. Click and drag to move.
| | 01:19 | Scroll up, and under the General area,
let's make the Caption "Click to Continue,"
| | 01:25 | and we will have to move
that button to the left.
| | 01:33 | I want its action to simply be continue.
Remember, when we create a button, it
| | 01:38 | automatically includes a stop action
that will cause the playback to pause
| | 01:44 | while we wait for the user
to interact with the button.
| | 01:47 | We're going to take advantage of that very soon.
| | 01:50 | The next thing we need to do is to
create an invisible object onto which we're
| | 01:54 | going to attach some sound.
| | 01:55 | Let's move our playhead forward
past the pause point on the button.
| | 02:01 | Looking at our Timeline, you can see
that the pause point for the button
| | 02:05 | happens at 1 1/2 seconds.
| | 02:07 | Let's set our playhead
right here at 1 1/2 seconds.
| | 02:11 | Now let's insert a text caption.
| | 02:16 | Under the General area, let's set the
Caption type to Transparent. Secondly, we'll
| | 02:22 | delete all of the text inside of the
text caption, hit Escape, and then move the
| | 02:29 | text caption into the upper
right-hand corner of the screen.
| | 02:33 | Looking at the Timeline, you can see that
it appears on the stage right here, just
| | 02:38 | after the pause action.
| | 02:40 | Now, comes the fun part.
| | 02:42 | Let's add a sound. With the text caption
selected, choose Audio > Import to > Object.
| | 02:50 | In your Sounds folder, you should have a
dogs file. Select that and choose Open.
| | 03:00 | You can play the dogs file to hear the dogs bark
(Dogs barking.)
| | 03:04 | and then say close.
| | 03:07 | If you look at the Timeline, you can
see now that this text caption has audio
| | 03:12 | attached to it. There's a little
microphone that's on the Timeline.
| | 03:16 | Let's preview our project and see what happens.
| | 03:22 | (Music playing.)
| | 03:27 | Nothing happens until we
click Click to Continue.
| | 03:30 | (Music playing.)
(Dogs barking.)
| | 03:33 | (Music playing.)
| | 03:39 | We'll pause it because we don't
need to hear any more the slideshow.
| | 03:42 | Let's close the preview now.
By adjusting the timing, we were able to ensure that
| | 03:47 | the dog bark didn't happen
until we wanted it to happen.
| | 03:51 | Let's save this file now as Chapter 6_b.
| | 04:00 | I said earlier that you can add audio
to just about any object in Captivate.
| | 04:05 | Just remember that that audio is going
to play when ever the object appears in
| | 04:09 | the Timeline; therefore, you may have to
move the object around in the Timeline in
| | 04:15 | order to control when the sound will take place.
| | 04:18 | Remember also that object don't have to
be invisible in order to play a sound.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Recording and adding voice-overs| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to see
how we can record audio from our
| | 00:03 | computer microphone.
| | 00:04 | We're going to use the Chapter 6_b file
that we created earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:09 | If you don't have it open, please
open it now and go to slide number one.
| | 00:13 | We're going to capture some audio from
our computer microphone, and we're going to
| | 00:16 | put it onto this slide.
| | 00:18 | I want it to play when the slide
appears, and so we'll be recording to the slide
| | 00:23 | itself and not to an object.
| | 00:25 | In the Timeline, let's set our
playhead back to the beginning.
| | 00:30 | Now, we need to set up our audio.
| | 00:33 | Under the Audio panel at the
bottom, you'll see Settings.
| | 00:36 | You use the Audio Settings to
choose your audio input device.
| | 00:41 | You might be using one of several
different audio inputs, and of course your
| | 00:44 | setup is going to be different from mine.
| | 00:47 | You need to determine for yourself
which microphone you're going to use. Once
| | 00:51 | you've decided that, then you
can choose it from this list here.
| | 00:55 | I'm going to use the Built-in
Digital Input, which is the microphone that
| | 00:58 | I'm wearing right now.
| | 00:59 | I'm also going to set my
recording parameters for this microphone.
| | 01:04 | I know that for this microphone I
want to choose the highest quality audio.
| | 01:09 | Depending on your microphone, you
might choose the different audio settings.
| | 01:13 | Know that slower the bit rate, the
worse the audio is going to sound.
| | 01:18 | Conversely, you could say the slower
the bit rate, the more compression is
| | 01:22 | going to be used for the audio, and so it going
to sound more and more like it's in a tunnel.
| | 01:27 | I'm choosing the CD bit rate, which is the
highest quality that Captivate will capture.
| | 01:32 | The next step is to calibrate our input.
| | 01:35 | Click on Calibrate Input to do that.
Captivate will listen to what we say in the
| | 01:40 | microphone, and it will adjust
the amplifier values automatically.
| | 01:45 | I'm going to read a script
that I've already prepared.
| | 01:48 | This is going to be the same sentence that
I'm going to read onto the slide directly.
| | 01:53 | I'm going to do it after
I choose Auto calibrate.
| | 01:58 | Welcome to the Hansel and
Petal virtual flower show.
| | 02:01 | Enjoy the flowers and the music.
| | 02:03 | You can see that Captivate is telling me
that my input level is okay, and it has
| | 02:08 | automatically set the pre-amplifier value.
| | 02:10 | This is the quickest way to get good
quality audio out of your own microphone.
| | 02:15 | Having calibrated our audio, click OK.
| | 02:19 | Now, we can close the audio settings.
| | 02:22 | Let's move on to capturing
this sentence to the slide.
| | 02:26 | Under Audio, choose Record to > Slide.
| | 02:31 | Note that we are reminded what input
method we're using here. It's says Built-in
| | 02:35 | Digital Input. That's the
audio that we've just included.
| | 02:39 | If you have animation on your slides,
and you'd like to be able to see that so
| | 02:43 | that you can speak to it, you
could turn on the SWF Preview here.
| | 02:47 | In this case, there isn't much in the way of
animation, so I don't need the SWF preview.
| | 02:51 | Again, if you want to synchronize your
words to animations that are on the
| | 02:55 | slide then you want to turn on the SWF
Preview, so that you can see what's going
| | 02:59 | to happen and then speak to that timing.
| | 03:03 | For now, I'm just going to record my
audio. To begin recording, I click the red
| | 03:08 | button on the left, which
is the Record Audio button.
| | 03:17 | Welcome to the Hansel and Petal virtual
flower show. Enjoy the flowers and the music.
| | 03:27 | When you're done speaking, click the
Stop button. Let's play it back now.
| | 03:35 | "Welcome to the Hansel and Petal virtual
flower show, enjoy the flowers and the music."
| | 03:41 | I've got a little bit of work to do on
this audio. We'll take care of that in
| | 03:48 | another lesson. For now, let's close.
| | 03:52 | I would like to save the changes to the
audio, yes. Because this audio takes more
| | 03:57 | time than the slide allows,
| | 03:59 | we will be asked to extend
the slide so that it will fit.
| | 04:03 | I'm going to say yes now,
but I will adjust it later.
| | 04:08 | You can see the audio track is
indicated here on the bottom of the Timeline.
| | 04:12 | I can see the waveform, which is very
handy because it helps me to adjust the
| | 04:17 | timing of objects to correspond to sound cues,
and I can see them directly in the waveform.
| | 04:23 | With this change having been made, let's
save the file. We'll save it as Chapter 6_c.
| | 04:35 | Before we go, I would like to remind
you to have a nice quiet environment for
| | 04:39 | your recordings when you're
recording to your slides, or to objects.
| | 04:43 | Make sure that you've got a good
quality microphone, and if you can, hang
| | 04:48 | some type of drape or curtain
around so that you can absorb some of the
| | 04:51 | reflected sound in the room.
| | 04:53 | The more care that you take in your
sound environment, the better that audio is
| | 04:57 | going to sound when you
play it back in Captivate.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing audio in Captivate| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to see how
we can edit audio directly in Captivate.
| | 00:04 | We're going to be using the Chapter 6_
c file that we've developed earlier.
| | 00:08 | If you don't have it open, please
open it now and go to slide number one.
| | 00:12 | There are some audio that I've
recorded onto slide number one.
| | 00:15 | I've intentionally made some errors in it,
so that we'll have something to edit out.
| | 00:20 | I would like to select the audio now
that's on the slide, and then over in the
| | 00:24 | General panel, I can edit that audio.
| | 00:28 | When I choose Edit Audio, I enter not
the Add or Replace Audio function that we
| | 00:33 | saw before, but now it's
the Edit Audio function.
| | 00:36 | I can select parts of the audio that I
want to remove and simply delete them.
| | 00:41 | In this case, I have my throat clearing, and I'd
like to get rid of that. We'll play it now.
| | 00:48 | (Coughing.)
| | 00:50 | I need to remove everything from about
here all the way back to the beginning.
| | 00:55 | I can click and drag to select the
area that I want to remove, and then I can
| | 01:01 | click the Cut button here.
| | 01:04 | Now, I've removed that sound.
| | 01:06 | At the end of the statement,
there is also quite a bit of silence.
| | 01:09 | Let's get rid of that.
| | 01:13 | Again, click and drag to select.
Once you have got it selected, simply remove it.
| | 01:19 | You can see that our
duration is now only six seconds.
| | 01:23 | Let's go back and play the whole thing.
| | 01:27 | Click at the beginning and click Play.
| | 01:30 | "Welcome to the Hansel and Petal virtual
flower show. Enjoy the flowers and the music."
| | 01:37 | Great. I'm going to take off a little
bit more that silence at the beginning.
| | 01:41 | Simply click and drag and cut.
| | 01:44 | Let's move towards the middle between
the welcome and the enjoy statement.
| | 01:49 | "Welcome to the Hansel and
Petal virtual flower show."
| | 01:53 | This silence needs to be a little bit longer.
| | 01:56 | What I would like to do is to insert
some silence now. Setting your cursor
| | 02:01 | in between this area, so somewhere along
here, you can click the Insert Silence button.
| | 02:06 | I would like to insert a
half a second of silence.
| | 02:12 | You may have to move that
down to be able to see it.
| | 02:14 | I'm going to insert one half of a second.
| | 02:16 | I'll type in a half a second.
| | 02:18 | It's going to go at the playhead
position, although I could put it at the start
| | 02:23 | or the end of the audio.
| | 02:24 | Once I have made that choice,
click OK and watch the waveform.
| | 02:29 | You can see that we've now added a
half second of silence right here.
| | 02:32 | The last thing I'd like to show you
is how we can automatically adjust the
| | 02:35 | volume of our audio. Because I
calibrated my audio before I made my recording,
| | 02:40 | my recording is pretty good.
| | 02:42 | Nevertheless, sometimes we want to do
some automatic adjustment to make the
| | 02:46 | audio a little bit louder.
Click on Adjust Volume to see those controls.
| | 02:52 | I can do a global volume adjustment here by
clicking on the slider and moving it up or down.
| | 02:59 | I could also allow
Captivate to do the work for me.
| | 03:02 | I could have it normalize the audio,
at which point Captivate would make
| | 03:05 | decisions for me about the best
adjustments throughout the recording.
| | 03:09 | I could also choose Dynamics that
would reduce loud section but also leave
| | 03:13 | quieter sections alone.
| | 03:15 | You'll want to explore how each of
these settings affects your audio that you
| | 03:19 | record with your own microphone.
| | 03:21 | I'm not going to process any audio
now, but I did want you to see where
| | 03:25 | those controls were.
| | 03:28 | Additionally, I have the option of
saving this audio file out of my project.
| | 03:33 | I can do that by clicking
the Podcast button here.
| | 03:37 | Let's save this recording as an MP3 File
in the Chapter 6 folder, in the Project
| | 03:44 | folder, in the Sounds folder,
| | 03:48 | change its name to welcome.mp3, and save.
| | 03:55 | It's called Podcast because many times
we will make recordings with Captivate
| | 03:59 | that would like to be able to re-purpose
as a podcast without having to send out
| | 04:04 | the entirety of the animation,
and everything else that goes with the project.
| | 04:07 | This allows you to do that.
| | 04:09 | Having made my adjustments to the audio,
I'm going to click Save and then Close.
| | 04:17 | Notice that the audio has
gotten quite a bit shorter.
| | 04:19 | It used to be longer. In fact, it
was way out here, after 12 seconds.
| | 04:24 | We need to reduce the duration of the
slide to accommodate. Grab the right-hand
| | 04:28 | edge of the slide duration
and drag it back to the end of the audio.
| | 04:34 | We also need to make a couple
of other timing adjustments.
| | 04:37 | I need the pause in the button to
be closer to the end of the slide.
| | 04:41 | I also know that the dogs don't
bark for a full three seconds.
| | 04:44 | They bark for quite a bit less.
| | 04:46 | Let's select the dog barking text
caption and scroll down to audio, and we can
| | 04:52 | figure out exactly how
long that audio track is.
| | 04:56 | Click Edit Audio. This
audio is about one second long.
| | 05:02 | You can see that right there. Having
learned this information, we can close it
| | 05:06 | and adjust the duration of that text
caption to a little longer than one second.
| | 05:13 | Select it, go to Timing, and set its
display for a specific time, that being 1.1
| | 05:20 | seconds, and then Enter.
| | 05:24 | Drag that text caption all the way to
the edge of the Timeline and have it
| | 05:28 | snap right to the end.
| | 05:30 | Lastly, we'll do the same with the button.
| | 05:32 | Select the button and go down to timing.
| | 05:37 | We want it to pause after 5 1/2 seconds--
hit Enter--and have it appear on the
| | 05:45 | stage for seven seconds.
| | 05:49 | This didn't stick because I have to
extend the duration of the button before I
| | 05:53 | extend where the pause ends.
Let's set that again to 5 1/2 seconds.
| | 06:01 | We can even make it a
little longer. There we go.
| | 06:06 | Let's preview this and see what happens.
| | 06:10 | We'll preview the project. "Welcome to
the Hansel and Petal virtual flower show,
| | 06:18 | enjoy the flowers and the music."
| | 06:22 | Now, we've said all of our statement,
and we'll click to continue.
| | 06:27 | (Dogs barking.)
| | 06:30 | Ah, that timing is a lot better.
| | 06:34 | Now, we know how we can edit audio to
make it sound better in our presentations.
| | 06:38 | Having edited this audio and adjusted the
timing, let's save this file as Chapter 6_d.
| | 06:50 | When we record our audio with
microphones, we're prone to mistakes.
| | 06:54 | That's human nature. Because we can now
edit our audio directly inside of Captivate,
| | 06:59 | it makes it so much easier to fix the
mistakes that we made and end up with
| | 07:04 | professional results.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Splitting audio among slides| 00:00 | Many times we import audio files
that are longer than the slide durations
| | 00:04 | that we already have.
| | 00:05 | In this lesson, we're going to see how
we can import audio and distribute it
| | 00:09 | across multiple slides.
| | 00:11 | We're going to be using the Chapter 6_d
file that we built earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:16 | If you don't have it open, please
open it now and go to slide number 1.
| | 00:20 | The first thing we need to do is
to remove the background audio.
| | 00:24 | Under Audio, choose Remove and then Background.
| | 00:30 | Yes, I would like to
remove the background audio.
| | 00:34 | I know you like that song, and that's okay.
| | 00:37 | We're going to put it back in, but we're
going to put it in starting on slide 2,
| | 00:42 | and then we're going to distribute
it across those slides that follow.
| | 00:46 | Select slide number 2 and then
choose Audio > Import to > Slide.
| | 00:55 | Choose the MP3 file called
60 second background and then choose Open.
| | 00:59 | Captivate is going to parse this song,
and then it's going to present us with some options.
| | 01:06 | It will have figured out that
it's too big to fit on this slide.
| | 01:10 | We now have three options for
importing this audio that's too big.
| | 01:15 | I could extend the duration of my one slide.
| | 01:18 | That's the first option.
| | 01:20 | I don't care to do that because I want to
distribute that audio over multiple slides.
| | 01:25 | We have two methods of doing that.
First, I could distribute the audio file over
| | 01:30 | several slides and allow
me to choose the timing.
| | 01:34 | The other option is to retain the
current slide durations and then distribute
| | 01:39 | that audio over several slides.
| | 01:41 | I'm going to choose the second option,
because I want to show you how you can
| | 01:45 | synchronize the transitions
of the slides with the audio.
| | 01:49 | Choose the second option and then click OK.
| | 01:53 | The audio consists of my speech at
the beginning followed by the sound.
| | 01:59 | You can see right now that
we're looking at slide number 1.
| | 02:03 | Let's move to slide number 2,
which is where our song begins.
| | 02:07 | From here, we want to modify the
timings so that the slide transitions
| | 02:12 | correspond to the beats of the music.
| | 02:15 | First, let's play the music to get
a sense of where those beats are.
| | 02:18 | (Music playing.)
| | 02:31 | Playing that music I can
hear where the transitions are.
| | 02:35 | If you're not musically inclined, you
should still be able to identify the
| | 02:39 | natural changes in the song.
| | 02:41 | What we're going to do now is to use
those natural changes in the song to
| | 02:46 | control the transitions
that occur on the slides.
| | 02:49 | If I move my view all the way to the
right, I can see that bunched up after this
| | 02:55 | slide are slides 3, 4, 5,
and 6. There they are.
| | 03:01 | There is slide 3, 4, 5, and 6.
| | 03:06 | What I want to do is to
realign where those slides begin.
| | 03:11 | I could do it manually by dragging the slides
around, but there is an easier way to do it.
| | 03:16 | Once again, I'm going to play the music,
but this time I'm going to use this
| | 03:20 | button right here, which is the Start
next slide at cursor position button.
| | 03:25 | This is another key
command that you should remember.
| | 03:28 | It's the same as saving, which is Command+S or
Ctrl+S, but in this case it means synchronize.
| | 03:35 | I'm going to use the button for clarity.
| | 03:38 | The procedure, again, is to begin
playing the music, and then when you want the
| | 03:42 | slides to change, you click this button here,
or use Command+S or Ctrl+S. Here we go.
| | 03:49 | (Music playing.)
| | 04:05 | Now, I'm out of slides, so I'll stop.
| | 04:08 | I'll save and close and preview my work.
| | 04:10 | Now, you can see that each of the slides
has audio on it. Going down to slide 6
| | 04:18 | we can see that it's very long.
| | 04:20 | It's over a minute long.
| | 04:23 | Go all the way out to the end,
and you can see that there is a lot of empty
| | 04:25 | space there, and this is because
initially all of the slides were extended, but
| | 04:30 | then we brought them back in.
| | 04:34 | We'll reduce the duration of slide 6 to match
the length of the music, and there you see it.
| | 04:43 | Now, let's preview.
| | 04:45 | We'll preview our project
to see the full results.
| | 04:50 | "Welcome to the Hansel &
Petal virtual flower show.
| | 04:55 | Enjoy the flowers and the music."
| | 04:57 | Once we click, we'll hear some
barks, and then our songs will play.
| | 05:02 | (Dogs barking.)
| | 05:03 | (Music barking.)
| | 05:18 | So you can see how the transitions in the
slides are now corresponding to the music.
| | 05:23 | This happens because we took the
time to play the music while we were
| | 05:27 | synchronizing the transitions using the
Command+S, Ctrl+S, or clicking that button.
| | 05:32 | Let's close the preview and save our project.
| | 05:38 | We'll save it as Chapter 6_e.
| | 05:45 | Being able to distribute multiple
slides isn't just for slideshows.
| | 05:49 | You can use it when importing any
long audio that needs to distribute
| | 05:52 | across multiple slides.
| | 05:54 | If you happen to be reading a script, you
can do the same thing while recording audio.
| | 06:00 | Under Audio, choose Record to, and then
Slides. This will allow you to record that
| | 06:06 | audio to multiple slides.
| | 06:08 | We don't have that option right now
because I happen to be on slide number 6,
| | 06:12 | which is the last slide in the stack.
| | 06:14 | Having the ability to synchronize the
slides with the audio makes it possible
| | 06:18 | for you to use a much more relaxed workflow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding video to a slide| 00:00 | In this lesson, we'll explore
adding video to our Captivate projects.
| | 00:03 | We're going to be using the Chapter 6_
e file that we created in a previous
| | 00:07 | part of this chapter.
| | 00:09 | Please open it now
and then go to the last slide.
| | 00:13 | Right-click or Ctrl+Click on the last
slide, and then Insert a new Blank Slide.
| | 00:18 | We're going to insert some video on this slide.
| | 00:22 | While we do that, I'll provide some
best practices for encoding video for
| | 00:25 | your Captivate projects.
| | 00:27 | We insert video one of two ways.
| | 00:29 | In this lesson, we're going to look at
inserting a self-contained video file
| | 00:33 | that will play on the slide by itself.
| | 00:36 | From the Insert menu, choose FLV or F4V File.
| | 00:43 | Captivate can only display Flash video,
and again, that's the FLV format or the F4V format.
| | 00:50 | You might be wondering, well,
where do I get these kinds of things?
| | 00:52 | I don't understand that. That's okay.
| | 00:55 | Captivate will allow you to convert
other video formats; however, for the moment
| | 01:00 | we're going to be using
strictly the FLV or F4V format.
| | 01:04 | Flash video files can live either on
your own computer or be deployed on a web
| | 01:09 | server somewhere else.
| | 01:11 | In this lesson, we're going to be
using a video file that's on your computer.
| | 01:15 | We'll browse to it shortly.
| | 01:16 | I'd like to discuss for a moment, however,
the already-deployed-to-a-web-server,
| | 01:20 | Flash Video Streaming Service,
or Flash Media Server option.
| | 01:24 | If you have video that's stored on an
outside server and you know the complete
| | 01:30 | URL to it, then you can enter it there.
| | 01:33 | That video must be a FLV file if it's
going to be an HTTP call to it. Or if it's
| | 01:40 | going to be a media streaming service,
it needs to be a fully qualified folder
| | 01:45 | name that can pick up that service,
and it must use the RTMP protocol.
| | 01:51 | This means that if you're using a
service like YouTube to stream your videos,
| | 01:54 | you're not going to be able to pick
up those videos using this method.
| | 01:58 | You're going to have to get your hands
on the actual FLV file, or the direct path
| | 02:04 | to it, to be able to use this option.
| | 02:07 | That having been said, let's
use a video file on our computer.
| | 02:11 | We'll browse to the Movies folder.
| | 02:16 | That's in your Project folder, in the
Chapter 6 folder, and you'll notice that
| | 02:21 | there is one F4V file there.
| | 02:24 | It's called Amaryllis.
| | 02:25 | Select it and then open it.
| | 02:28 | Now click OK to import the video.
| | 02:31 | I shot this video in high-definition.
| | 02:34 | I did my editing in Premiere, and then
I exported it to 800 pixels wide so that
| | 02:39 | it would fit in my project.
| | 02:41 | It's important when you're working with
your video editing software to be aware
| | 02:45 | of the usage size for that video.
| | 02:48 | I knew that I'd be using it on slides that
were 800 pixels wide, so I encoded it that way.
| | 02:54 | If I make it bigger, it's a waste of
time, and it's not going to increase the
| | 02:57 | quality of the result.
| | 02:59 | Secondly, no matter what your video
editing source is, you've got to be able to
| | 03:03 | export it to this FLV format.
| | 03:07 | I said earlier that I use
Premiere for my video editing.
| | 03:10 | That has a direct connection to the
Adobe Media Encoder and also can export FLV
| | 03:16 | and F4V files on its own.
| | 03:18 | If you don't have Premiere, and you
have another part of the Creative Suite, or
| | 03:22 | the Technical Communication Suite, or
Captivate--and I know you have Captivate--
| | 03:27 | then you also have the Adobe Media Encoder.
| | 03:30 | You can use the Adobe Media Encoder
to transcode your video from whatever
| | 03:34 | original format it's in into FLV and F4V.
| | 03:38 | Just be sure to be aware of the final
size of your slide so that your video will
| | 03:44 | match it when you import it.
| | 03:46 | When we import an FLV or in F4V file
onto our slide, you'll notice a few things.
| | 03:51 | First of all, it has its own player.
| | 03:55 | This means that the video will
appear as an object on your slide.
| | 03:59 | I also know that this video is over two
minutes long, but take a look at the Timeline.
| | 04:04 | The Timeline is still at three seconds.
| | 04:07 | That means that the slide doesn't
know the duration of this video.
| | 04:11 | I have to ensure that the slide stops
so that the viewer has a chance to
| | 04:14 | actually see the movie.
| | 04:16 | When they're done, they can continue.
| | 04:18 | This means that we need to put a
button that will allow us to continue after
| | 04:22 | we've watched the movie.
| | 04:23 | Let's put a button on the slide now.
| | 04:26 | Select your Button tool, drag it down
into the lower right-hand corner, change
| | 04:33 | it's caption to "Continue when finished,"
| | 04:40 | and that's all we need.
| | 04:41 | Just slide it to the left, so that it fits.
| | 04:45 | Let's put a text caption on the top,
so that they know what this is.
| | 04:49 | Insert a text caption and
not Condensed. I want Bold.
| | 04:55 | Its Caption type should be Transparent.
| | 04:58 | Select your text and type in "Amaryllis Care",
and we'll put that on the top of the slide.
| | 05:06 | Hit Escape when you're done
editing and drag it up. Perfect!
| | 05:12 | Let's preview our results.
| | 05:13 | We're going to preview from this slide.
| | 05:21 | There is our video, and you
notice that it's not playing.
| | 05:25 | It's not playing, because in order to
play the video you've got to actually
| | 05:27 | push the Play button.
| | 05:30 | Here is the Play button.
We'll watch just a brief amount of this video.
| | 05:34 | (James: So now we're going to talk about
taking care of our amaryllis for the winter.)
| | 05:39 | (James: An amaryllis is a plant
that's a bulb, as you can see here.)
| | 05:43 | (James: And they sit inside of pots,
usually small pots about the size of the bulb.)
| | 05:47 | And that's enough of that for now.
| | 05:48 | You can watch the rest of it at your leisure.
| | 05:51 | The controls that are on this particular
skin for the video have a Pause button,
| | 05:55 | a Stop button, a Play button, and the
ability to turn the audio on and off.
| | 06:00 | Let's look at the preview now.
| | 06:03 | The last thing I'd like to look at
is the controls that we have over how
| | 06:06 | the video displays.
| | 06:08 | Select the video itself, and then
under the General area, you can see that we
| | 06:12 | have Auto Play and Auto Rewind as choices.
| | 06:16 | If you want the video to play without
the user having to push the play button,
| | 06:19 | then of course turn on Auto Play.
| | 06:22 | There are a few skins that you can
choose, and you'll get a preview of them
| | 06:26 | by picking them here.
| | 06:27 | Each of these skins has slightly
different controls. So haloSkin2, for instance,
| | 06:33 | includes a scrubbing bar, and then
haloSkin3 includes all of the controls.
| | 06:40 | Let's leave this with
haloSkin3 and enable Auto Play.
| | 06:44 | That having been done, let's
save our file as Chapter 6_f.
| | 06:54 | Importing FLV and F4V files allows you
to create an object on your slide that
| | 06:59 | the user can interact with directly.
| | 07:01 | There is another way that we can present
the video, and that's to put it on the slide.
| | 07:05 | We'll take a look at that in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing slide video| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see how
we can import video onto our slides but
| | 00:04 | make them an integral part of the
slide rather than a component on the slide.
| | 00:08 | We are going to start with Chapter 6_e.
| | 00:11 | If you have Chapter 6_f open,
then close it and reopen Chapter 6_e.
| | 00:17 | We developed Chapter 6_e
earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:20 | Let's go down to the last slide in the project.
| | 00:22 | It's slide number 6.
| | 00:24 | Select it and then right-
click and Insert a Blank Slide.
| | 00:29 | We will do that one more time on slide 7.
| | 00:36 | Now we have two blank
slides at the end of the project.
| | 00:39 | Select slide number 7, and from
the Insert menu, choose Slide Video.
| | 00:45 | The video file we are looking for is in
the Movies folder, in the Project folder,
| | 00:49 | in CH 06 Exercise Files.
| | 00:52 | You'll notice now that we can
import more than just FLV and F4V.
| | 00:57 | In fact, we can import AVI
files, MP4, MOV, and 3GP video.
| | 01:03 | This expands what you can do with
respect to video inside of Captivate, and makes
| | 01:08 | it so that you can begin with
the video files you already have.
| | 01:12 | You can see that I have a
QuickTime movie file available.
| | 01:15 | Choose it and then choose Open.
| | 01:17 | You will get this warning about non-Flash video.
| | 01:23 | Captivate is letting you know that it
will now convert that video to FLV or F4V
| | 01:29 | without you having to set
up the Adobe Media Encoder.
| | 01:33 | It will do it on its own,
and there's no controls.
| | 01:35 | All you have to do is say
yes, but don't say yes now.
| | 01:39 | I've already done the conversion,
and I have the video ready for us.
| | 01:44 | I wanted to show you this so that when
you are using your non-Flash video, you
| | 01:48 | can still import it into Captivate;
| | 01:51 | you will just have to take this extra
step to launch the Adobe Media Encoder
| | 01:55 | and encode the video.
| | 01:57 | Once again, Captivate will
control that process for you.
| | 02:00 | Click No, so that we can choose the
already-encoded Flash video version of this video.
| | 02:06 | From the Insert menu, choose Slide Video and
in this case Amaryllis.f4v. Now choose Open.
| | 02:17 | Captivate knows that there's more
than one slide after the slide where we
| | 02:22 | are putting the video.
| | 02:23 | Because there's more than one slide
available, Captivate will ask you if you
| | 02:27 | want to distribute this
video over multiple slides.
| | 02:31 | At the moment, I don't want to do that, as
we will be looking at that in the next lesson.
| | 02:36 | For now, choose Match the slide's
duration with the video duration.
| | 02:41 | Captivate will extend the length of
this slide, which is currently three seconds, to
| | 02:45 | match the duration of the video.
| | 02:47 | Make this choice and click OK.
| | 02:52 | You can see that the slide has been
extended to 137.8 seconds, and that the
| | 02:56 | video is 137.8 seconds.
| | 02:59 | It's showing me a poster frame from
the middle of the video, and although it's
| | 03:02 | not the most appealing picture of me,
it reminds me that there is in fact a
| | 03:06 | video on this stage.
| | 03:08 | When we preview, we will be
able to see the video in action.
| | 03:11 | There are no controls for the video itself.
| | 03:14 | All of the controls to start and
stop the video are going to be the Slide
| | 03:18 | controls that exist for the actual slide.
| | 03:21 | Remember that when we import video
as slide video, the video actually
| | 03:25 | becomes part of the slide.
| | 03:27 | This means also that we can access
the Timeline and add other objects.
| | 03:31 | We can add callouts, we can add all
kinds of things to enhance the video itself
| | 03:37 | and then match it up with the Timeline.
| | 03:40 | Let's save this project now, and we'll see how
we can do synchronization in the next lesson.
| | 03:46 | Say File and Save As, in this case we are
going to call it Chapter 6_g, and click Save.
| | 03:58 | Importing video as slide video is
different from importing video onto the slide
| | 04:04 | because of the way that it
gets presented to the user.
| | 04:07 | Depending on your project, you're
going to choose one of these two methods
| | 04:10 | to display the video.
| | 04:12 | If you want the user to be able to have
total control over that video by itself,
| | 04:16 | then you'll want to import an
FLV or F4V file onto the slide.
| | 04:21 | If you're going to want to control
additional behaviors for the video and
| | 04:25 | include other content that might be pop-
up or enhancement or other types of things,
| | 04:29 | you're going to want to
import the video as slide video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Synchronizing video| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see
how we can distribute our video across
| | 00:03 | multiple slides and synchronize
content on the slides with that video.
| | 00:07 | We will be using the Chapter 6_g file
that we developed earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:12 | Please open it now, if you don't have
it opened, and then go to slide number 7.
| | 00:16 | On slide 7, we already have our slide video.
| | 00:19 | What I would like to do is to
distribute that across two slides.
| | 00:23 | The first slide will be our
introduction slide, and then the second slide will
| | 00:27 | be the actual getting-the-job done slide.
| | 00:30 | To distribute video across slides,
select the video, and then under the
| | 00:35 | Properties panel, we are going
to choose Video > Edit Video Timing.
| | 00:39 | If you don't have the Properties
panel available, then you can recover it by
| | 00:43 | switching back to the Classic workspace.
| | 00:46 | The Edit Video Timing panel allows us to
distribute the video across multiple slides.
| | 00:52 | I want to split this video at 1:28.
| | 00:56 | We can move our playhead forward by
scrolling to the right until we see 1:28
| | 01:01 | in the time ruler at the top.
| | 01:02 | See it about here, and then simply
click, and that will establish our time.
| | 01:08 | You can see that our playhead is set to 1:28.
| | 01:11 | In our preview, you can see that we
are in the middle of the transition.
| | 01:15 | You can use this Preview panel to preview
the video and prove that you are where you want to be.
| | 01:20 | We will set the playhead back to 1:24,
and we will play a few seconds of the video.
| | 01:25 | Push the Play button to play the video.
| | 01:28 | (James: So, let's proceed
with our removing of the foliage.)
| | 01:32 | And we will pause there.
| | 01:34 | This is the point where I
want to split the slides.
| | 01:37 | Roll your playhead back to 1:28,
and then let's scroll to the end of the video.
| | 01:44 | This indicator is a Slide Change Indicator.
| | 01:47 | I would like to drag that
all the way back to 1:28.
| | 01:51 | Click and hold, and we will drag to the left.
| | 01:54 | I want to go all the way to a 1:28, which
is where our playhead is, and then release.
| | 02:01 | Having done that, this exposes another
button right here, and this button is the
| | 02:06 | Insert next slide into the session.
| | 02:08 | This is the action that actually
splits the video across multiple slides.
| | 02:13 | Since we have a slide 8
that's black, this is available.
| | 02:18 | If we didn't have a blank slide 8, then
we wouldn't be able to distribute the
| | 02:22 | video onto another slide.
| | 02:24 | This means you've got to be prepared
before you go and start splitting your video.
| | 02:28 | Always ensure that you have a blank
slide, or at least another slide, onto
| | 02:32 | which the video can flow.
| | 02:34 | Now I know where I want my next slide
to begin, so I can click this button to
| | 02:38 | extend the video onto the next slide.
| | 02:42 | Having done that, my video is now
split between slide 7 and slide 8.
| | 02:47 | Slide 8 has automatically
been extended to fit the video.
| | 02:52 | I'm all set, so we will click OK to
close the Edit Video Timing panel.
| | 02:57 | Now you can see slide 8 has video on it.
| | 03:01 | However, slide 7 is still 137.8 seconds long.
| | 03:05 | The video that's on slide 7
is now only 88 seconds long.
| | 03:10 | We need to adjust the length of slide 7,
so that it will have a smooth transition
| | 03:15 | between slide 7 and slide 8.
| | 03:18 | Select the slide on the Timeline and
change its display time to 88 seconds.
| | 03:24 | We can do that in the
Properties panel, under General.
| | 03:27 | 88.0 is the same length as the slide video.
| | 03:33 | Once you have made that change, hit Enter.
| | 03:36 | Let's preview from slide 7 to
see how the transition takes place.
| | 03:41 | Preview > From this Slide, and then Pause.
| | 03:50 | In the control bar, we can move the
Progress Indicator towards the middle, and
| | 03:54 | it will show us when the slides
transition from slide 1 to slide 2 in this block,
| | 03:58 | which is actually slide 7 and slide 8.
| | 04:01 | Click and drag to the right.
| | 04:03 | There is the switch-over between one and two.
| | 04:07 | Position the playhead just before the
transition between slide 1 and 2 and then Play.
| | 04:13 | (James: --moving of the foliage. So I want to
cut off these leaves with a nice sharp implement, and I--)
| | 04:19 | So that's a pretty smooth
transition between slide 1 and slide 2.
| | 04:23 | Using that Video Timings panel allows
us to make that smooth transition, so that
| | 04:28 | when the user is playing the entirety
of the video, they're not going to notice
| | 04:32 | that jarring change
between one slide and another.
| | 04:35 | Let's close the Preview panel now.
| | 04:37 | I would like to highlight a portion of
the video, and that would be the portion
| | 04:41 | where I hold up my kitchen
shears and snip them in close-up.
| | 04:45 | This actually takes place
at the beginning of slide 8.
| | 04:48 | We will go to slide 8 now and then
hit your Spacebar to preview the video.
| | 04:53 | (James: So I want to cut off these leaves with a
nice sharp implement. And I had mentioned these
| | 05:00 | (sharp shears earlier.
These happen to be kitchen shears)
| | 05:04 | Stop it there where you
can see me going snip snip.
| | 05:07 | So this is around nine seconds.
| | 05:11 | Click and hold and drag back to nine seconds.
| | 05:16 | To get that timing, you've
got to do a little dance.
| | 05:19 | You've got to start and stop the video until
you see the thing that you want to emphasize.
| | 05:24 | There it is right there.
| | 05:25 | So it's back at 9 seconds.
| | 05:28 | You may have to do that several times to
find exactly where that content is that
| | 05:31 | you want to emphasize.
| | 05:33 | I'm going to put my playhead just before 9
seconds, and I'm going to add a text caption.
| | 05:38 | With my playhead just before 9
seconds, I will insert a text caption,
| | 05:45 | hit Escape, and then move the text
caption up to the right of my head here,
| | 05:50 | change its style to include the lower
left-hand pointer and then double-click,
| | 05:56 | and we will change the text.
| | 05:58 | The text is going to say "Kitchen Shears."
| | 06:05 | I want the caption to last only two seconds.
| | 06:09 | You can see that the caption lasts for three
seconds if you hover over it in the Timeline.
| | 06:13 | Select it on the Timeline and
reduce its duration to two seconds.
| | 06:18 | You can do that over here in the
Properties in the Timing panel.
| | 06:22 | Change three seconds to two seconds.
| | 06:26 | Also, under Transition, we
want it to fade in and fade out.
| | 06:30 | This will happen by default.
| | 06:32 | Let's roll our playhead back to
the beginning and preview the result.
| | 06:35 | We will preview now from this slide.
| | 06:44 | (James: --moving of the foliage.)
| | 06:46 | (So I want to cut off these leaves with a
nice sharp implement. And I had mentioned these)
| | 06:51 | (sharp shears earlier. These happen to be kitchen shears,)
| | 06:54 | (but they work really well. You can use
scissors or if you've got garden sheers, you can.)
| | 06:59 | And we will stop there.
| | 07:01 | Let's close the Preview
panel now and save our project.
| | 07:03 | We will save it as "Chapter 6_h."
| | 07:15 | Importing video as slide video
allows you not only to distribute that
| | 07:19 | video across multiple slides, but it
also allows you to augment that video
| | 07:24 | with additional content.
| | 07:26 | I think you'll find that slide video is
a very powerful way to create not only
| | 07:31 | video-enhanced slides but
enhanced video on your slides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating closed captions| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to add
closed captioning to our slide video.
| | 00:03 | We are going to use the file called
Chapter 6_h that we developed earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:08 | If you don't have it open, please
open it now and then go to slide 7.
| | 00:12 | Select the video on the slide and
then choose Edit Video Timing from
| | 00:17 | the Properties panel.
| | 00:18 | If you don't have the Properties panel
available, you can always recover it by
| | 00:21 | going to the Classic workspace.
| | 00:24 | Switch to the Closed Captioning panel
by clicking the tab to next to Edit.
| | 00:29 | This panel allows us to add
closed captioning to our videos.
| | 00:33 | This is important because not everyone
who's going to be viewing your projects
| | 00:36 | is going to be able to hear your projects.
| | 00:39 | In some cases, for accessibility
reasons, closed captioning is required.
| | 00:43 | This is how we are going to add closed
captioning to our videos inside of Captivate.
| | 00:47 | We are going to begin our closed
captioning where I begin speaking.
| | 00:53 | Click around on the Timeline
until you hear me begin to speak.
| | 00:56 | You will find the beginning of
the speech between 4 and 5 seconds.
| | 01:00 | We will put the first phrase here.
| | 01:03 | Once you have the playhead in position,
click the Plus sign to add a closed caption.
| | 01:09 | You will see that it has a Start Time
of 4 seconds and one frame, and it has an
| | 01:14 | End Time out at 2 minutes.
| | 01:16 | We will change that in a little bit.
| | 01:18 | The first phrase that I would like
you to enter is the following, "Now we're
| | 01:23 | going to talk about taking care
of our amaryllis for the winter."
| | 01:34 | As you can imagine, it's a great idea for
you to have a script for your video in advance.
| | 01:40 | If you have a script for your video,
then you'll be able to copy and paste those
| | 01:44 | phrases directly from the script
into this Closed Captioning panel.
| | 01:48 | Let's advance the Timeline to
about 9 seconds for the next phrase.
| | 01:56 | Somewhere between here and
here is where I want it to start.
| | 02:00 | Let's back up to 7 seconds and
play it to hear the transition.
| | 02:03 | (James: Amaryllis is a plant.)
| | 02:07 | Watching the Timeline, I can see that I
want to start my next phrase right there.
| | 02:12 | Now I will add my next phrase
by clicking Add Closed Caption.
| | 02:15 | You can see now that the End Time for
the first caption automatically adjusts to
| | 02:21 | 7:9, and the starting point
of the second caption is 7:9.
| | 02:27 | The next phrase, and the last one that we
will type for this lesson, is called, "An
| | 02:31 | amaryllis is a bulb, as you can see here."
| | 02:38 | Move the playhead out to about 11
seconds, and then we'll add one more closed
| | 02:43 | caption that will remain blank.
| | 02:47 | Delete the text in the
caption by hitting the Delete key.
| | 02:50 | In order to insert gaps in the closed
captioning, you have got to insert blank captions.
| | 02:56 | Captivate will automatically extend the
duration of a caption till the end of the video.
| | 03:01 | If I want to stop captioning therefore,
I need to insert a blank caption at the
| | 03:06 | end of my caption list.
| | 03:08 | Now, I have got my captions in place,
and I need to set how they're going to
| | 03:12 | display in the Project Settings.
| | 03:14 | I access the Project
Settings by using this button here.
| | 03:18 | The caption is going to show up in
my video on top of this area here.
| | 03:23 | Because it's fairly dark, the black
text may not be appropriate, so let's
| | 03:27 | change it to white.
| | 03:30 | Select the color picker and choose white.
| | 03:32 | Times New Roman may also be difficult
to read, so let's set that to Arial.
| | 03:42 | Once we have made those choices, click OK.
| | 03:46 | Now that we have set up our closed
captioning, we can close this panel.
| | 03:51 | The closed captioning itself won't show
unless we enable the Closed Captioning
| | 03:55 | button in our Playbar.
| | 03:57 | We do this under the Project
menu by choosing Skin Editor.
| | 04:04 | You may need to move the Skin
Editor up to see the entire panel.
| | 04:07 | Captivate's default skin does not
include the Closed Captioning button.
| | 04:12 | To turn on closed captioning,
simply enable this check box.
| | 04:17 | You can see that the Closed Captioning
button has now appeared on the control.
| | 04:20 | Having made that change, we
can close the Skin Editor.
| | 04:24 | Now let's preview our project from slide 7.
| | 04:27 | Select slide 7 and Preview > From this Slide.
| | 04:31 | As soon as the video begins to
play, enable the closed captioning.
| | 04:37 | (So now we're going to talk about
taking care of our amaryllis for the winter.)
| | 04:40 | Our choice of white type has rendered
the closed captioning to be invisible
| | 04:44 | against the white background of the slide.
| | 04:47 | Let's change the background of the
slide to black, and we'll be good to go.
| | 04:54 | I can insert a rectangle
that covers the entire slide,
| | 05:01 | change its fill to black, and its transparency
to 100%, and we will send it to the background.
| | 05:14 | Now we have a nice black bar on
which to show our closed caption.
| | 05:18 | We will get rid of the
stroke around the outside.
| | 05:21 | We will draw another one on slide 8.
| | 05:29 | Because the last rectangle we drew had
these characteristics, the current one
| | 05:33 | will also have these characteristics.
| | 05:35 | Let's send it down underneath the slide
video and extend it to the full duration.
| | 05:40 | We do that with Command+E or Ctrl+E.
Back on slide 7, we'll do the same thing
| | 05:48 | with this rectangle: Command+E or
Ctrl+E to extend it, and we will Preview.
| | 05:58 | Turn on your closed captioning.
| | 06:00 | (So now we're going to talk about taking care
of our amaryllis for the winter.)
| | 06:05 | (An amaryllis is a plant. It's a bulb, as you can see here.
And they sit inside of pots. Usually small pots--)
| | 06:12 | Great! Let's close the preview now.
| | 06:14 | We will save this as Chapter 6_i.
| | 06:26 | Closed captioning is an important part of
making your projects accessible to all users.
| | 06:31 | If you're in an HR Department, you're
probably going to make extensive use
| | 06:34 | of closed captioning.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Adding Interactive ElementsAdding buttons| 00:00 | In this chapter, we are going to be
exploring interactive elements with Captivate.
| | 00:03 | We are going to begin with buttons.
| | 00:06 | I would like you to open the Chapter
7 file that's in your Projects folder
| | 00:09 | inside of your Chapter 7
folder in your Exercises folder.
| | 00:12 | I have opened it recently, so
it's here on my Welcome screen.
| | 00:15 | You may have to browse for it from the
File menu or you can double-click it from
| | 00:19 | your operating system.
| | 00:21 | You may be presented with this window.
| | 00:23 | It's warning us that there are a
lot of unused items in the library.
| | 00:26 | And that's okay because I've already
included a number of images that we will be
| | 00:30 | using from the library.
| | 00:32 | Let's click OK to continue.
| | 00:33 | We are going to build a brief interactive
tour of the Hansel and Petal flower shop.
| | 00:39 | We are going to include a welcome
page that you're looking at now, plus a
| | 00:43 | details page for the store,
for displays and for gifts.
| | 00:47 | If I preview this project now, it's
simply going to display all four of the
| | 00:51 | slides, one after the other.
| | 00:53 | There's no interactivity in it yet.
| | 00:54 | And now is the time to add it.
| | 00:56 | I would like to create some navigation
buttons that will allow us to navigate to
| | 01:00 | different portions of the presentation.
| | 01:02 | You can see that I've included a store,
displays, and gifts area on the left.
| | 01:07 | We are going to be replacing this with buttons.
| | 01:09 | To begin, let's add a button.
| | 01:12 | You can insert a button here under the
Insert menu and that's a Standard Object.
| | 01:18 | You may want to remember that
keyboard shortcut of Command+Shift+B on a
| | 01:22 | Macintosh or Ctrl+Shift+B
on a Windows computer.
| | 01:26 | When you create your new button, you
may find you get the success, failure and
| | 01:30 | hint captions already built.
| | 01:32 | You can turn those off under the
Properties panel, down under Options.
| | 01:37 | The button comes in as the default button
style, as defined by our Object Style Manager.
| | 01:41 | We are going to modify it right now.
| | 01:43 | Let's take a look at the different types of
buttons that we can create with Captivate.
| | 01:47 | In the Properties panel, over on
the top, you'll see Button Type.
| | 01:51 | Now, if you don't have the Properties
panel available to you, you can always
| | 01:54 | switch to the Classic
workspace and it will be there.
| | 01:57 | There are 3 different button
types that you can choose.
| | 01:59 | There is a Text Button that allows you to
enter some text that will display on the button.
| | 02:04 | There is a Transparent Button that will
not have any text on it but it will look
| | 02:08 | like an area that you can click on.
| | 02:10 | And then, lastly an Image Button.
| | 02:13 | Text buttons are a way for you to
quickly build a button that's obviously a
| | 02:16 | button and it will behave as such.
| | 02:18 | People recognize these buttons and
generally know what to do with them.
| | 02:20 | We are going to use an
Image Button in this case
| | 02:22 | because I want it to match
what's already on the stage.
| | 02:25 | In order to do this effectively, you
have got to build those button images in an
| | 02:29 | external image editor.
| | 02:31 | I happen to use Photoshop but you can
choose your favorite editor for this task.
| | 02:35 | I've already done that.
| | 02:36 | So I am not going to spend any
more time talking about that part.
| | 02:40 | When you switch to Image Button, you will
see that there are a lot of buttons pre-built.
| | 02:45 | If you scroll down, you can see that there's
a number of buttons provided with Captivate.
| | 02:48 | We are going to use our own right now.
| | 02:50 | To import an image, click on the
folder to the right of the drop-down.
| | 02:57 | Browse to the Image folder
| | 02:58 | that's in your Project folder in the
Chapter 7 Exercise files folder and in it
| | 03:04 | let's choose displays.png and click Open.
| | 03:09 | Now, we have built this button.
| | 03:10 | Let's move it on top of the word
"displays" already in position.
| | 03:15 | Now we have to define what
the button is going to do.
| | 03:18 | Scroll down to Action to
determine what going to happen.
| | 03:21 | In this case, I want them
to go to a specific slide.
| | 03:24 | Click on the On Success drop
down and choose Jump to slide.
| | 03:29 | You can see that there's a
lot of options available to you.
| | 03:32 | You could build navigation that goes
to the previous slide for instance or to
| | 03:35 | next slide or perhaps even to the
last slide that you have visited if
| | 03:38 | someone's jumped around.
| | 03:39 | In this case, we are
going to go to specific slide.
| | 03:42 | We could also open a URL or a file,
we could go to another project,
| | 03:46 | we could send an email.
| | 03:47 | If you are a JavaScript programmer,
you could execute some JavaScript.
| | 03:50 | And there's all kind of things that you can do.
| | 03:52 | Show and Hide are used to
turn existing buttons on and off.
| | 03:56 | I could also enable or disable buttons as well.
| | 04:00 | So there's lots of things
that we can do with buttons.
| | 04:02 | For now, we're going to use
the buttons for navigation.
| | 04:05 | Choose Jump to slide and then we need
to set which slide we are going to go.
| | 04:10 | This button I want to go to
the slide called Displays.
| | 04:14 | Under the Slide menu, choose Display.
| | 04:18 | We can repeat this process by copying and
pasting the button two more times. You can copy
| | 04:23 | under the Edit menu. Choose
Copy and then paste the same way.
| | 04:30 | Let's move it up on top of store.
| | 04:35 | And then paste again.
| | 04:36 | I'm using my keyboard this time,
Command+B. And I will put it down here.
| | 04:41 | Let's replace the images on these buttons.
| | 04:44 | We'll start with this one here. I want to
replace the image with my gifts image.
| | 04:47 | So I will scroll up and I
can see my image button.
| | 04:51 | Click on the folder.
| | 04:52 | Browse to gifts, which is right there.
| | 04:55 | Now it shows gifts and we will
change the image on this one.
| | 05:04 | This one should be store. There it is.
| | 05:08 | So, now I have got a button that says
displays, a buttons that says gifts, and a
| | 05:14 | button that says store.
| | 05:15 | Let's change our action on this button.
| | 05:19 | This one is going to jump to the
slide called Store. This one is jumping to
| | 05:25 | Display and this one is going to jump to Gifts.
| | 05:29 | One last thing is to
take a look at the Timeline.
| | 05:32 | You'll notice that the button
has two areas in the Timeline.
| | 05:35 | It has the area where it's Active
and the area where it's Inactive.
| | 05:39 | There's also a big pause
indicator right there in the middle.
| | 05:43 | When you put a button onto your stage,
the expectation is that you want the user
| | 05:47 | to interact with that button.
| | 05:49 | For this reason, Captivate automatically
stops the flow of the project until the
| | 05:54 | user interacts with the button.
| | 05:56 | Let's preview the project and see what happens.
| | 06:04 | Now, it stops and let's go to the gifts button.
| | 06:08 | And you saw that we skipped to the gifts page.
| | 06:11 | Of course, we haven't built any buttons
on the store, displays, or gift pages, so
| | 06:16 | we can go do that now.
| | 06:18 | Another thing that we have to do is to
ensure that our cursor changes to a hand
| | 06:22 | when we put it over the button.
| | 06:24 | Let's scroll down in the Properties
area and you'll see that there's a checkbox
| | 06:28 | called Show Hand Cursor Over Hit Area.
| | 06:31 | Let's enable that for all three buttons.
| | 06:39 | Next, let's select all three
buttons and copy all three buttons.
| | 06:44 | Let's paste them on to store, display, and gifts.
| | 06:48 | Switch to Store and paste,
Display and paste, and Gifts and paste.
| | 06:56 | Let's view our master slide and we can get
rid of those guides that I had placed earlier.
| | 07:01 | Under Window, choose Master Slide,
select this graphic and delete it.
| | 07:08 | Yes, I'm sure I would like to delete it.
| | 07:13 | Let's go back to Home and preview.
| | 07:15 | We will preview our project.
| | 07:21 | Now it stops. Let's go to the Store page
and we will go to the Gifts page and
| | 07:30 | we will go to the Displays page, great.
| | 07:34 | Let's close this and we
will save it as Chapter 7_a.
| | 07:46 | Buttons make it possible for you to quickly
add interactive elements to your projects.
| | 07:50 | We are going to see other methods of adding
additional interactivity later on in this chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding click areas| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are
going to build a click box.
| | 00:02 | A click box is very much like a button.
| | 00:04 | However, it's invisible, so you don't
have to worry about styling it anyway.
| | 00:09 | They behave like a button in all other respects.
| | 00:12 | We use click boxes to add
interactivity to static images. Let's do that now.
| | 00:17 | We're going to be using the Chapter
7_a file that we developed in the first
| | 00:21 | part of this chapter.
| | 00:23 | If you don't have it open, please open
it now and then go to slider number 1.
| | 00:26 | We are going to create a click box.
| | 00:29 | Although we can do it from the Insert
menu, it's here under Standard Objects,
| | 00:34 | I'm going to use the
toolbox over here on the left.
| | 00:36 | This here is the icon for
Click Box. Click it now.
| | 00:40 | Now you can see that we have a click box.
| | 00:42 | The click box, as I said before is invisible
in that you don't see it when it's on the stage.
| | 00:47 | If you look over on the right, we
can determine what action it will take.
| | 00:51 | These actions are exactly the
same as we see for other buttons.
| | 00:55 | In this case, I am going to turn
on Show Hand Cursor Over Hit Area.
| | 00:59 | However, if you leave it blank, you can
have a completely secret click area that
| | 01:03 | someone will have to know
it's there to be able to use.
| | 01:07 | Now that we've enabled that, let's move it
into the upper left-hand corner of the screen.
| | 01:10 | I would like this to
surround the Hansel and Petal logo.
| | 01:15 | What I would like to have happe,
when a user clicks it is that we will
| | 01:21 | return to the home slide.
| | 01:23 | Let's take a look at our actions.
| | 01:25 | On Success, I'm going to go to a slide and
then I will choose the slide I want to go to.
| | 01:32 | Since, I am on the Home
slide now, I can't choose that.
| | 01:36 | So, what we will do is we will is we'll cut
it and will paste it onto slide number 2.
| | 01:40 | We have got it selected, we will cut
with Command+X or Ctrl+X, go to Slide
| | 01:47 | 2 and paste with Command+V or Ctrl+V.
Now, let's jump to slider number 1- Home.
| | 01:55 | We will copy this now with Command+C
or Ctrl+C and we will paste it
| | 02:00 | onto Slides 3 and 4.
| | 02:03 | Now, let's preview our
project and see what happens.
| | 02:11 | Remember the click box is not on
slider number 1, so nothing happens up here.
| | 02:15 | We will go down to the Displays page
and hover up over Hansel and Petal.
| | 02:22 | Do you see how the cursor changes to a hand?
| | 02:25 | Click up there and we will return
to the Home slide and there we are.
| | 02:30 | So now with that click box, we have got
button navigation with store, displays,
| | 02:34 | and gifts and we have click box
navigation for the Hansel and Petal logo.
| | 02:40 | Let's close the preview now.
| | 02:42 | Now we will save this as Chapter 7_b.
| | 02:52 | Let's take a quick look at
the Timeline before we finish.
| | 02:55 | One of the differences between a click
box and a button is that we don't always
| | 02:59 | have an expectation that a user is
supposed to interact with a click box.
| | 03:04 | In many cases, click boxes
are completely invisible.
| | 03:06 | So, as I said before, they are kind of
like secret areas on the page that you
| | 03:10 | have to know where to click in
order to get it to do something.
| | 03:13 | Take a look at the Options
over on the Properties panel.
| | 03:16 | We had enabled Show Hand Cursor Over
Hit Area but you will also see Pause
| | 03:21 | project until user clicks.
| | 03:24 | This is on by default.
| | 03:26 | Looking at the Timeline, you can see
that the pause is actually at the very end
| | 03:30 | of the duration of the click box.
| | 03:32 | Comparing to the buttons, you will
see the buttons actually paused in the
| | 03:35 | middle of their duration.
| | 03:37 | You can change the timing of that by dragging
this center area to the left or to the right.
| | 03:41 | I am not going to make that change right now.
| | 03:44 | But it's something that
you can explore on your own.
| | 03:46 | If you don't want the project to pause
until the user clicks, you can disable
| | 03:50 | that function right here.
| | 03:52 | Now you can see that the pause has disappeared.
| | 03:56 | You can also mandate that the user
double-click or that we don't have any sound
| | 04:00 | when we click on it.
| | 04:02 | Lastly, you can mandate that we
right-click in order to enable it.
| | 04:06 | Let's remove that Pause project
until user clicks on the other two pages.
| | 04:10 | So we will go to Display and
disable and the same on Store.
| | 04:19 | I can do that safely because
we've already paused the buttons.
| | 04:22 | If I didn't have buttons on this slide
however, I might want to keep that Pause
| | 04:26 | project until user clicks on.
| | 04:29 | Having made those changes,
I'll save the document.
| | 04:31 | I will not rename it at this point.
| | 04:37 | Click boxes are a great way for you to add
additional interactivity to your projects.
| | 04:41 | They allow you to build both visible
and hidden interactive areas that the user
| | 04:46 | has the option to interact with.
| | 04:48 | As you can see from this project,
most projects will mix both buttons and
| | 04:53 | click boxes in order to build the
type of interactivity that's required for the project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding rollover images| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to see
how we can construct rollovers that will
| | 00:03 | display images when we put our
mouse over the specific area.
| | 00:07 | We are going to be using the Chapter 7_b
file that we built earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:12 | If you don't have it open, please
open it now and then go to slide number 1,
| | 00:15 | which is the Home slide.
| | 00:17 | Let's begin by inserting a rollover area.
| | 00:20 | Under Insert go to Standard
Objects and choose Rollover Image.
| | 00:28 | I want to choose the file
called carnations in baskets.
| | 00:32 | This is in your Images folder in the
Project folder in Chapter 7 Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:39 | Again, choose carnations in
baskets and then choose Open.
| | 00:44 | This file is quite large.
| | 00:45 | So let's fit it to the Stage
and then we'll reduce it in size.
| | 00:50 | Click and drag in the upper right-hand
corner and set it to fill this entire
| | 00:55 | over area here. Great.
| | 00:59 | This is the image that's going to
display when our mouse goes over this blue box,
| | 01:03 | which is the rollover area.
| | 01:06 | We need to move the rollover area now,
so that it's sitting on the displays button.
| | 01:12 | The rollover area is underneath the picture.
| | 01:14 | So we will slide the
picture to the right a little bit.
| | 01:16 | This will expose the rollover area.
| | 01:18 | We can select it and then we
can move it over here by displays.
| | 01:23 | Make it to be a little bit smaller, so it's
not touching the store or the gifts button.
| | 01:28 | And then I would like to resize it
to fit the button that it covers.
| | 01:32 | If I right-click on the rollover area,
you'll see also Auto-adjust Rollover Area.
| | 01:39 | Select it now.
| | 01:40 | this will make the rollover area
exactly fit the button that's underneath it.
| | 01:45 | You can use this auto-fit to be able
to stack buttons in rollover areas and
| | 01:50 | images in rollover areas and other
types of objects with rollover areas.
| | 01:55 | Now we have got our rollover area in position
and we have our content that we will display.
| | 02:01 | Let's slide this back so that it
fits appropriately on our stage.
| | 02:05 | And I want to make one other
adjustment to the rollover area itself.
| | 02:09 | You can see that it has a blue outline and
I would like to change that to have no outline.
| | 02:15 | Select it once again and under Fill
and Stroke, change the Width to zero.
| | 02:21 | Having made that change, let's preview our work.
| | 02:30 | We don't see anything until we move
our mouse over the displays button.
| | 02:35 | Then the flowers will appear.
When I move my mouse off they will disappear.
| | 02:41 | Let's repeat the process for store and gifts.
| | 02:47 | With nothing selected we will
insert another rollover image.
| | 02:54 | Pick the file called flower
storefront 02 and then Open.
| | 03:00 | Again, we will fit it to the stage, so
I will select it and Fit to the Stage.
| | 03:04 | Slide it off to the side, so that we
can get at the rollover area and put
| | 03:09 | that on top of store.
| | 03:14 | Once again, we will Auto-
adjust and set the outline to zero.
| | 03:24 | Let's shrink this is a little bit. There we go.
| | 03:35 | And the last one that we
will build is for gifts.
| | 03:45 | We will pick baskets and merchandise.
| | 03:48 | And once again, we will have to
Fit to Stage and reduce it in size.
| | 03:54 | Slide it off to the side, grab the
rollover area and put that on top of gifts,
| | 04:02 | and adjust it to fit.
| | 04:08 | Set this back again so that it's
fills the space and once again we will
| | 04:13 | change the stroke to zero.
| | 04:15 | These three images we can align, so if
we select all of them, right-click, under
| | 04:25 | Align we can align their centers and
also align their middles. This is great.
| | 04:35 | Let's preview and see how this works.
| | 04:41 | Once again, nothing happens until we
mouse over store, displays, and gifts.
| | 04:47 | There is our store, there is our
display, and there are some gifts.
| | 04:55 | Now that we have got our rollover areas
built, let's save this file as Chapter 7_c.
| | 05:07 | Rollovers are an easy way for you to
add interactivity to your presentations
| | 05:12 | that you build in Captivate.
| | 05:13 | Use them to provide additional imagery
or information for the people who are
| | 05:17 | viewing your presentations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Highlighting objects| 00:00 | In this lesson we'll be creating
highlight boxes that allow us to emphasize
| | 00:03 | certain areas of our slides.
| | 00:05 | We are going to be using the Chapter 7_c
file that we saved earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:10 | If you don't have it open, please open it
now and then let's go to slide number 4.
| | 00:16 | I'd like to add an image
from the Library onto the slide.
| | 00:20 | Choose the Library panel here.
| | 00:22 | If you don't have the Library panel
available, you can always recover it by
| | 00:25 | switching back to the Classic workspace.
| | 00:27 | I'd like to add the image called
gift ,erchandise to this slide.
| | 00:31 | Open up your Images group and you'll
find it down here. Gift merchandise.
| | 00:36 | You can select it and
then drag it onto the Stage.
| | 00:40 | You can drop it in this
upper left-hand corner here.
| | 00:42 | The upper left hand corner of the image
will correspond to where we release the mouse.
| | 00:47 | This image is too big to fit on the
Stage, so we'll have it automatically fit
| | 00:50 | the stage with our Properties panel.
| | 00:53 | Looking at the Image Edit area, you
will see that we have the Fit to Stage
| | 00:56 | button, which we've been using all along.
| | 00:59 | Now, let's reduce this slightly, so that we
can see the word Gifts at the top of the slide.
| | 01:04 | Hold down your Shift key and then drag and
then slide it off to the middle of the slide.
| | 01:10 | Now, let's emphasize some of these gifts.
| | 01:12 | We can do that using a
tool called a highlight box.
| | 01:15 | We are going to do this in
combination with the Timeline.
| | 01:18 | First, we need to add a highlight box
to this page. The Highlight Box tool is
| | 01:23 | here and you can also get it under
Standard Objects by choosing Insert >
| | 01:28 | Standard Objects, and Highlight Box.
| | 01:30 | I will use the toolbox right now.
| | 01:34 | The highlight box has
appeared on the Stage right here.
| | 01:38 | Let's put it in this cube and have it
outline the contents of this cube right there.
| | 01:44 | You'll notice that it exists
on the Stage for three seconds.
| | 01:48 | By default, these highlight boxes
will take up as much time as they have
| | 01:51 | available on the Stage.
| | 01:53 | I'd like to add two more
highlight boxes to the Stage right now.
| | 01:58 | There's one and we'll put it in this cube,
click-and-drag over there, and have it
| | 02:04 | surround the contents of that cube.
| | 02:07 | Then we will put one on this cube. Great!
| | 02:18 | Now that we put the highlight boxes
on the Stage, let's adjust their timing.
| | 02:22 | Again they appear for the full duration,
but I don't want them all to be there
| | 02:26 | for the same amount of time.
| | 02:27 | We also have another timing
consideration and that's our buttons.
| | 02:31 | Let's make the Timeline taller so
that we can see all of the objects on
| | 02:34 | the Stage right now.
| | 02:35 | Click-and-drag the border between the
slide and the Timeline and drag it up.
| | 02:42 | Now I can see all of the
objects on the Timeline.
| | 02:45 | I'd like to extend the amount
of time that the slide exists.
| | 02:49 | At the very bottom, I can click in the lower
right-hand corner and I can drag to the right.
| | 02:55 | So let's make this to live for seven seconds.
| | 03:00 | Now, let's extend all of the objects
except the highlight boxes so that they're
| | 03:05 | on the Stage all the time.
| | 03:07 | Select the Gifts caption on the bottom,
hold down your Shift key, select the
| | 03:12 | Click box, and then use Ctrl+E or
Command+E to extend all of these objects for
| | 03:19 | the complete length of the Timeline.
| | 03:21 | Lastly, we will grab gift
merchandise and do the same.
| | 03:25 | You'll use that Ctrl+E or Command+E
frequently as you work with the Timeline.
| | 03:30 | So don't forget that key command.
| | 03:33 | Now, I'd like to extend the buttons so
that they pause out at the end of the slide.
| | 03:38 | You can grab this vertical line
right here next to the Pause button,
| | 03:42 | click-and-drag it to the right, and
we'll set it out there around six-and-a-half
| | 03:48 | seconds, and release.
| | 03:49 | I'm going to do the same with
button 11 and button 12. Select it
| | 03:55 | and click-and-drag.
| | 04:00 | Let's take a look at the properties of
this button here and go down to Timing.
| | 04:06 | We can see how this has changed to pause
after six-and-a-half seconds and we can
| | 04:10 | enter that information
directly for the third button.
| | 04:13 | Click on the third button and change the
pause after to 6.5 seconds and then hit Enter.
| | 04:21 | Now that we have made these
adjustments we have six-and-a-half seconds over
| | 04:24 | which the highlight boxes
can appear and disappear.
| | 04:28 | Select the highlight box in the upper
left-hand corner of the image first and
| | 04:31 | let's reduce the time that
it's on the Stage to 2 seconds.
| | 04:35 | You can click-and-drag and set it to 2 seconds.
| | 04:39 | Now, take the second one that we drew,
which was this one, and drag it to the
| | 04:43 | right so that it starts
at one-and-a-half seconds.
| | 04:46 | I also like it to exist for only
two-and-a-half seconds, so I can
| | 04:50 | click-and-drag to the left.
| | 04:52 | So it survives for only two-
and-a-half seconds as well.
| | 04:54 | We'll take the last one that we drew,
which was this one, and we'll slide it to
| | 04:59 | the right and we'll have it
start at three-and-a-half seconds.
| | 05:06 | Again, we'll reduce its
duration to two-and-a-half seconds.
| | 05:09 | This time we'll do it with the Timing panel.
| | 05:12 | Currently, it displays for three seconds.
| | 05:14 | We'll reduce that to two-and-a-half.
| | 05:18 | Let's take a look at our
transitions on these highlight boxes.
| | 05:21 | You can see that they have been
automatically set to fade in and fade out and
| | 05:25 | that those fades will take a half-a-second.
| | 05:27 | What we should see is that these
highlight boxes now appear and then disappear
| | 05:31 | and they will fade in and fade out.
| | 05:33 | The last thing I'd like to do is to
get rid of the blue outline that's there.
| | 05:37 | So select all three of these boxes.
| | 05:39 | We've got one selected now. Hold down
your Shift key and select the second one
| | 05:44 | and then the third one. Change the
width of the fill and stroke to 0.
| | 05:49 | Now, let's preview our results.
| | 05:52 | In this case, let's preview from this slide.
| | 06:00 | You can see that those subtle areas
have appeared and then disappeared to call
| | 06:04 | the attention of the viewer
to that particular content.
| | 06:07 | Our slide stopped here because we
set the pause point for our buttons at
| | 06:12 | six-and-a-half seconds.
| | 06:13 | Let's close the preview and save the project.
| | 06:16 | Let's save as Chapter 7_d.
| | 06:27 | Highlight areas are a way for you to
emphasize specific content whether it's
| | 06:30 | in an image, in some text or in a placed
slide that you may have borrowed from PowerPoint.
| | 06:35 | By themselves they're not very exciting,
but in combination with the Timeline
| | 06:39 | they can be very effective at calling
attention to specific areas of a slide.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding rollover slidelets| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to take a
look at a feature of Captivate called
| | 00:02 | a rollover slidelet.
| | 00:04 | A rollover slidelet is different from a
rollover image in that when you use a
| | 00:08 | rollover image you're able to display one image.
| | 00:12 | In the case of a rollover slidelet,
however, you're able to display just about
| | 00:16 | anything that you can put on a slide
and have that appear and disappear.
| | 00:21 | This means that you have a lot more
flexibility when creating the type of
| | 00:25 | rollover content that might
include more than just an image, but also
| | 00:28 | might include some text or perhaps other
types of objects that you would want to display.
| | 00:33 | We are going to be using the Chapter 7_d
file that we built earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:38 | If you don't have it open, please open it
now and then let's go to slide number 3.
| | 00:42 | I would like to add an image to this
slide and that's in your Library already.
| | 00:47 | It's called wide shot inside flower shop.
| | 00:50 | Open your Library and if you don't have
it available, you can always recover it
| | 00:54 | by switching to the Classic workspace.
| | 00:57 | Here's wide shot inside flower
shop and let's drag it onto the Stage.
| | 01:03 | Once again it's too big so we will
reduce it to fit and then shrink it some more.
| | 01:10 | Be sure to hold down your Shift key
so that you will maintain proportions.
| | 01:15 | Make it about that big and we
will stick it just about there.
| | 01:20 | I'd like to leave some room at the
bottom, so we'll have some space where
| | 01:24 | our slidelet can be.
| | 01:25 | Let's insert the slidelet now.
| | 01:27 | There's an Insert Slidelet tool here and
we can also get it from the Insert menu.
| | 01:33 | This is located under the Standard
Objects and you'll see Rollover Slidelet.
| | 01:40 | The rollover slidelet has two areas.
| | 01:42 | It has the rollover trigger area, which
is highlighted in blue, and it has the
| | 01:46 | window that will be shown
when we roll over that area.
| | 01:50 | When you create the new slidelet they are
nested together, so I need to split them apart.
| | 01:54 | First I will take the
display area and move it down here.
| | 02:00 | Let's make it to run
across the bottom of the screen.
| | 02:03 | It can overlap the picture a little bit.
| | 02:06 | The next thing it will do is it will
put the slidelet rollover area right here.
| | 02:11 | Select the trigger area and drag it
over right about there and we can make it
| | 02:16 | a little bit bigger.
| | 02:17 | I'd like not to show the border, so we
will turn it off and now let's concern
| | 02:23 | ourselves with the slidelet itself.
| | 02:25 | Select it and now let's look at the Timeline.
| | 02:29 | Where did all of our stuff go?
| | 02:31 | Well, when you're in the slidelet,
you're looking at a complete slide that will
| | 02:36 | be exposed by that rollover action.
| | 02:39 | This slide is currently empty.
| | 02:41 | So we need to put some things in it.
| | 02:43 | Let's switch to our Library and
I would like to grab bulbs on display.
| | 02:49 | We will grab bulbs on
display and drag it onto the Stage.
| | 02:53 | Now select the Properties and we are
going to crop it. Use the Crop Image
| | 02:58 | function and what I'd like to do
is to focus on this giant bulb here.
| | 03:09 | We need not to constrain proportion, so
deselect that and you can make it taller
| | 03:14 | and a little wider to get
the entirety of the plant.
| | 03:25 | We're ready to go. Click OK and
this image is still quite large.
| | 03:32 | Let's Fit to Stage so that we can select it now.
| | 03:37 | Here's our cropped image fit to the Stage.
| | 03:40 | Reduce it so it fits in the slidelet.
| | 03:42 | Hold down your Shift key and then you
can reduce and now the image fits entirely
| | 03:49 | within the slidelet.
| | 03:53 | Our image needs to get put into the
slidelet now and so we can do that by
| | 03:58 | selecting it and then cutting with
Command+X or Ctrl+. And then select the slidelet.
| | 04:06 | Once we have selected the slidelet we
can paste the image into the slidelet.
| | 04:10 | We'll do that with Ctrl+V on a Windows
computer or Command+V on a Macintosh.
| | 04:16 | Now that we have the image in the
slidelet we can slide it off to the left.
| | 04:25 | Now, it's where I want it to be.
| | 04:27 | We can insert other content
into the slidelet as well.
| | 04:31 | Select the slidelet and right-click.
| | 04:33 | There's an Insert menu that includes
some of the Standard Objects as well as
| | 04:37 | image animation, Flash video,
or text animation and widgets.
| | 04:43 | Let's insert a text caption.
| | 04:47 | Type the phrase "Bulbs can be big too!"
| | 04:55 | And then select all with Command+A or
Ctrl+A and we will make it to be 40 points.
| | 05:02 | Hit Escape to get out of Editing, and
we will slide it up into the middle.
| | 05:08 | Lastly we will change our caption type
from HaloBlue to Glass Green. Slide that
| | 05:15 | up a little bit more. All right!
| | 05:18 | Now, we have our slidelet that
consists of this text caption and this image.
| | 05:24 | It will be triggered when we
roll over this area right here.
| | 05:27 | Let's preview from here and see what we get.
| | 05:30 | We will hover over the slidelet and you
see that displays with the blue outline.
| | 05:40 | It then disappears.
| | 05:41 | We will try to trigger it again. There we go.
| | 05:44 | It appears, and then it will disappear.
| | 05:47 | Let's go take a look at
the timing for the slidelet.
| | 05:52 | The slidelet persists for three seconds.
| | 05:55 | You can change the amount of time
that the slidelet exists on the Stage by
| | 05:58 | dragging here left or right.
| | 06:01 | You could also select the slidelet
and adjust its timing properties.
| | 06:05 | Let's extend it to 5 seconds.
| | 06:07 | Of course having done that, we
want to extend these elements as well.
| | 06:15 | Select them both and use Command+E
on a Macintosh or Ctrl+E on a Windows
| | 06:20 | computer to extend them.
| | 06:22 | Let's go back to the rollover area for
the slidelet and show you one more feature.
| | 06:26 | The slidelet can also act like a button.
| | 06:29 | Once you put your mouse over the
slidelet you could click and if you were to click,
| | 06:34 | then you could choose any one
of the button actions that might appear.
| | 06:37 | You can also assign a keyboard shortcut.
| | 06:40 | Lastly, the rollover itself
can also trigger a behavior.
| | 06:46 | So think about that.
| | 06:47 | You have the ability to assign different
responses to clicking and to rolling over.
| | 06:54 | If you don't need all of those options
then you may want it to stick around.
| | 06:58 | In this case it won't behave like a button.
| | 07:01 | It'll simply behave like a rollover area.
| | 07:03 | In the rollover you can
determine a response behavior.
| | 07:06 | However, nothing will happen
when you click on the rollover area.
| | 07:11 | Let's leave it this way because I
don't need it to be something that's going
| | 07:14 | to respond to a click.
| | 07:16 | Having made that change we will preview
one more time. And when we roll over now,
| | 07:27 | it will last for six
seconds before it disappears.
| | 07:31 | Let's close the preview and save.
| | 07:33 | We will call this Chapter 7_e.
| | 07:46 | We've barely scratched the
surface with rollover slidelets.
| | 07:50 | You can do a lot of things with the
rollover slidelet that you can't do with
| | 07:53 | the rollover image.
| | 07:55 | Use rollover slidelets to add more
content and more information to your rollover areas.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding pop-up captions| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to see how
we can add pop-up captions to our slides.
| | 00:04 | A Pop-up Caption is a text area that
appears when you hover over certain content.
| | 00:09 | When we use Pop-up Captions we tend to
treat him like a speech bubble that you
| | 00:13 | might see in a cartoon.
| | 00:14 | Captions can have little
triangular tabs that stick off the sides.
| | 00:18 | These can help you to pinpoint the
exact area to which that caption refers.
| | 00:23 | Let's see how we can create
some Pop-up Captions now.
| | 00:26 | We're going to be using the Chapter 7_e
file that we created earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:31 | Once you've got it opened,
let's go to slide number 2.
| | 00:35 | Once again, we are going to
add an image to our slide.
| | 00:38 | Switch to the Library, and if you don't
have it available then you can switch to
| | 00:42 | the Classic workspace and get it back.
| | 00:44 | The image that I want is
called flower storefront.
| | 00:47 | It's in your library already.
| | 00:49 | Select it and then drag it onto
the Stage and release it about here.
| | 00:54 | We'll need to reduce it to fit, so under
Properties > Fit to Stage and then we'll
| | 01:00 | reduce it some more from
the upper left-hand corner.
| | 01:02 | Hold down your Shift key and
drag it down on to the right.
| | 01:08 | Set it to be about there and then
we'll make it a little bit bigger.
| | 01:10 | And this time, drag in the lower left-
hand corner. Hold down your Shift key
| | 01:15 | and then expand it.
| | 01:17 | That's about right.
| | 01:18 | Now let's add our pop-up caption. Under
Insert choose Standard Objects and then
| | 01:24 | choose Rollover Caption.
| | 01:26 | While I've been using pop-up and
rollover interchangeably, the actual name of
| | 01:30 | this object is a rollover caption.
| | 01:34 | The rollover caption consists of two pieces.
| | 01:37 | It consists of the rollover
area and the caption itself.
| | 01:42 | Let's move the caption out of the
way while we adjust the rollover area.
| | 01:46 | If your text to selected, hit the
Escape key and then you can drag the
| | 01:50 | caption out of the way.
| | 01:52 | Here's our rollover area, and I'd
like to highlight the baskets. Adjust it
| | 02:02 | so that it's just the size of the baskets and
then drag the caption up to the baskets area.
| | 02:09 | You'll notice that the little
triangle is in the upper right-hand corner.
| | 02:13 | We need it to be in the upper left-hand
corner so that it's touching the basket.
| | 02:17 | You can see the Callout Type
indicator here and there are five. There is
| | 02:22 | No Callout, which is that one, but
what we want is the callout in the
| | 02:26 | upper left-hand corner.
| | 02:27 | So let's choose that now.
| | 02:29 | Ensure that the tip is
touching one of the baskets.
| | 02:33 | Now, double-click on the cption, select
all with Command+A, or Ctrl+A, and type
| | 02:40 | Top Quality Baskets.
| | 02:48 | Hit Escape to complete editing your text.
| | 02:49 | Now that we've made that
change, let's preview from here.
| | 02:58 | Move your mouse over the
baskets and the caption pops up.
| | 03:02 | That caption is going to hang out there until
you move your mouse off of the rollover area.
| | 03:06 | I don't happen to like that blue
outline so I am going to go remove it now.
| | 03:13 | Select the rollover area and
then change the stroke to 0.
| | 03:18 | Let's add one more rollover caption.
| | 03:21 | Insert > Standard Objects > Rollover Caption.
| | 03:25 | In this one type "Fragrant
Bouquets" and then Escape to end editing.
| | 03:36 | Move that down here so that the tip is
touching these bouquets and then let's
| | 03:40 | adjust the size of the rollover area to
match the size of the bouquet display.
| | 03:45 | Select the rollover area, drag it to
this point, grab the lower right-hand
| | 03:50 | corner and expand it.
| | 03:52 | Lastly, we'll get rid of the outline.
| | 03:55 | We'll preview and then we'll save it.
| | 04:02 | Now I have two rollover areas. This one is
for the baskets and this one is for the bouquets.
| | 04:10 | Let's exit and save.
| | 04:17 | We'll call this Chapter 7_f and save.
| | 04:24 | Rollover captions are a great way
for you to very easily provide more
| | 04:28 | information about images and
other parts of your slides.
| | 04:32 | They are easy to build and very
effective at calling attention to specific
| | 04:36 | items on your slide.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding text areas| 00:00 | In this lesson we will take a look at
how we can use a text entry area to gather
| | 00:04 | some information from the user.
| | 00:06 | We will be using the Chapter 7_f file
that we developed earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:10 | If you don't have it open, please open
it now and let's go to slide number 1.
| | 00:16 | Although slide number 1 looks
crowded, remember that there are image
| | 00:19 | rollover areas here.
| | 00:21 | So these images that are right in the
middle don't actually show until you
| | 00:25 | rollover these areas.
| | 00:27 | I'd like to get the name of the person
who is watching the presentation, so that
| | 00:31 | I can use it in other text
areas within the presentation.
| | 00:35 | To do that, I'm going to use a text entry box.
| | 00:38 | Create a text entry box by
clicking the Text Entry Box tool now.
| | 00:43 | The text entry box appears
and it looks kind of jumbled.
| | 00:46 | I'd like to explain what the different
pieces are, although we won't be using
| | 00:50 | all of them right now.
| | 00:51 | First we need to name the item.
| | 00:53 | We will call this customer name.
| | 00:59 | Hit Enter to accept the name.
| | 01:02 | Captivate will automatically
substitute and underscore for any spaces.
| | 01:07 | Let's go to the top of our Properties
and take a look at the General area.
| | 01:12 | The General category contains some
specific controls for text entry boxes.
| | 01:17 | At the top, you will see the default text.
| | 01:19 | Type Valued Customer here, making
sure to capitalize Valued and Customer.
| | 01:28 | Hit Enter when complete.
| | 01:30 | You will notice an option
here to retain the text.
| | 01:33 | This is important because this enables
us to capture the text and then use it
| | 01:37 | elsewhere in the presentation.
| | 01:39 | I'd like to do that and in order to use it
I need to associate this text with a variable.
| | 01:45 | I'm going to do that by clicking this
Variable button here and we'll call the
| | 01:49 | variable customer_name.
| | 01:55 | I've typed the underscore
this time, and then click OK.
| | 02:00 | Now, you will see the variable
has changed to customer_name.
| | 02:03 | This will allow us to access what the
customer has put into this field later on
| | 02:07 | in the presentation.
| | 02:08 | You will see a checkbox near the
bottom that says Validate User Input.
| | 02:13 | If I wanted to, I could
enter correct entries here.
| | 02:16 | Many people will use this field in the
first slide of a presentation to build
| | 02:21 | password-controlled
access to their presentations.
| | 02:25 | In this case however you'll be hard coding
the password into the correct entries area.
| | 02:31 | To do so, click the plus sign here and you
can enter the text for any correct entries.
| | 02:37 | If we wanted the customer to type the
word hansel, then we'd just type hansel.
| | 02:41 | If I want it to be case-sensitive,
I can enable this option as well.
| | 02:46 | In this case, I'm looking to capture
the customer's name and I don't know
| | 02:49 | what it is initially.
| | 02:51 | So there are no correct entries.
| | 02:53 | I'm going to disable Validate User Input.
| | 02:57 | We have a Submit button that goes
to the right of that text entry area.
| | 03:02 | We can move it off to the right and we
can extend the size of the text entry are
| | 03:07 | so that we can read all of the copy.
| | 03:10 | I have a hint that will pop up when the
customer puts their mouse over the text entry area.
| | 03:16 | Let's change what the hint says.
| | 03:18 | double-click, select all with Command+A or
Ctrl+A, and type "Please tell us your name."
| | 03:30 | Hit the Esapec key when complete.
| | 03:33 | Let's go back to the text entry box for a
moment and scroll down to the action area.
| | 03:39 | You'll see that a shortcut has been
automatically added here and this is the Enter key.
| | 03:44 | This will trigger the Submit
button to capture the information.
| | 03:48 | We can control what happens
after a person enters information.
| | 03:52 | What I'd like to happen now is to go to
slide number 2, which is the Store slide.
| | 03:56 | So we will say Jump to slide, and
slide 2, Store, automatically appears.
| | 04:04 | I could of course choose
any other slide in the list.
| | 04:07 | Let's go to slide number 2 now and
see how we can use the information that
| | 04:11 | we have just captured.
| | 04:13 | We have two text captions and I'd like
to use the customer's name in those captions.
| | 04:18 | Select the Top Quality Baskets
caption and double-click and put your cursor
| | 04:23 | before Top Quality Baskets.
| | 04:26 | Scroll down under Format and
you'll see an X right there.
| | 04:30 | That X allows you to insert a
variable into a caption. Click it now.
| | 04:35 | We're using a user variable but there are
other variables such as system variables.
| | 04:42 | Currently, I want to use the user
variables and if I look at my list it consists
| | 04:46 | of customer_name and another
variable called Text_Entry_Box_1.
| | 04:50 | When we created our text entry box,
Captivate automatically built a variable
| | 04:54 | called Text_Entry_Box_1.
| | 04:55 | We will delete it in a minute,
but for now I want to use the one
| | 04:59 | called customer_name.
| | 05:01 | Let's set the Maximum Length to 30.
| | 05:05 | Before we leave here, let's
delete that extra variable.
| | 05:09 | Click on Variables to do that.
| | 05:11 | You'll see Text_Entry_Box_1 and we
will remove it. Then we are done.
| | 05:18 | Having entered our variable
into the caption, we can click OK.
| | 05:23 | This inserted the variable not
exactly where I was hoping it to go.
| | 05:28 | Select the variable and cut it with
Command+X or Ctrl+X and then stick it before
| | 05:34 | Top Quality Baskets.
| | 05:36 | You can paste it with Ctrl+V or Command+V.
Now type an apostrophe, S, and Return.
| | 05:44 | Let's preview the results, shall we?
| | 05:45 | I'd like to preview the entire
project to see the full flow.
| | 05:53 | There is that text area.
| | 05:55 | When I move my mouse over it, it says
"Please tell us your name," so I will type
| | 05:59 | my name and I'll Submit.
| | 06:03 | Now, I am already hovering over
Fragrant Bouquets, but we know that we just
| | 06:09 | added a variable to the text
caption that's sitting near the baskets.
| | 06:14 | Now I see it says James
Lockman's Top Quality Baskets.
| | 06:18 | How's that for
personalization and interactivity?
| | 06:22 | Let's close our preview and we will
add the variable to Fragrant Bouquets.
| | 06:29 | Double-click up here and simply select
the entirety of that phrase, copy it with
| | 06:33 | Command+C or Ctrl+C, double-click in
front of Fragrant Bouquets, and paste.
| | 06:40 | With that change having been done, let's save.
| | 06:44 | Choose Save As and this
time we'll call it Chapter 7_g.
| | 06:53 | Let's go back to slide 1 and we
will select the text entry box now.
| | 06:59 | I want to mention that you can use this
text entry box to control many different
| | 07:04 | behaviors inside of Captivate.
| | 07:07 | In addition to controlling navigation
throughout the project, you could also
| | 07:11 | have it open a URL or even execute
some advanced actions or JavaScript.
| | 07:17 | These advanced actions could
include combinations of what you see here.
| | 07:21 | Text entry boxes represent more
than just the ability to capture
| | 07:25 | information from your user.
| | 07:27 | It's also a way for you to use that
information in calculations, use that
| | 07:32 | information to control the flow of
the presentation, and to personalize the
| | 07:36 | presentation for that user.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating branching presentations| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to
explore branching in Captivate.
| | 00:03 | When we build presentations that
include navigation, we're building complexity
| | 00:08 | into the presentation.
| | 00:09 | As projects get large, sometimes we don't
remember exactly how slides connect to each other.
| | 00:15 | There is a panel that helps us to see
that and that's called the Branching panel.
| | 00:19 | We're going to be using Chapter 7_g that
we developed previously in the chapter.
| | 00:24 | If you don't have it open please open it now.
| | 00:27 | It doesn't matter what slide you're on.
| | 00:30 | We're going to use the Navigation workspace.
| | 00:34 | Change your workspace
from Classic to Navigation.
| | 00:38 | The Branching panel is down here
in the left and chances are it's off
| | 00:41 | your screen as well.
| | 00:43 | We can get it to fit though simply drag
it up, click the triangles in the upper
| | 00:48 | right to collapse it, and then
click the Branching button here.
| | 00:52 | Now the panel properly fits on our screen.
| | 00:55 | Our project consists of four slides.
There is the Home slide, the Store slide,
| | 01:00 | the Display slide, and the Gifts slide.
| | 01:03 | This branching view shows us how the
different slides relate to each other.
| | 01:07 | The Home slide, if we select it, goes
to the Store slide. You can see that
| | 01:12 | green line right there.
| | 01:14 | It goes to the Gifts slide and
it goes to the Display slide.
| | 01:20 | You can control what happens for a
specific interaction by selecting the object
| | 01:25 | and then accessing the Actions
panel directly in the navigation panel.
| | 01:31 | If you recall over in the properties
panel there is an area for action and it
| | 01:35 | allows us to choose what
happens when certain things occur.
| | 01:39 | In the case of this slide we haven't
established any action other than to
| | 01:43 | continue to the next slide, but that
presumes that we get to the end of the
| | 01:46 | slide in the Timeline.
| | 01:48 | We don't, because the buttons prevent it.
| | 01:51 | Let's take a look at the Store
slide and see where that goes.
| | 01:55 | Selecting the Store slide you can see
that there is an input that's coming
| | 01:59 | from the Home, as well as connections here
and here that are coming from the other slides.
| | 02:06 | So this slide here goes to Home, this
slide here goes to Home, you can see right
| | 02:13 | there, and this slide goes to Home as well.
| | 02:17 | You can zoom in to view the slides better here.
| | 02:21 | You can navigate around the entire
branching view by using this navigation
| | 02:25 | panel on the bottom.
| | 02:28 | Let's focus a little bit on slide number 4.
| | 02:30 | Slider number 4, which is Gifts, goes to
the Display slide, the Store slide, the
| | 02:37 | Gifts slide, and the Home slide.
| | 02:40 | These are button actions and
they exist on the slide itself.
| | 02:44 | If I select anyone of these names
it will tell me what object causes
| | 02:49 | that navigation change.
| | 02:51 | In this case, it's Click_Box.
| | 02:53 | That Click_Box is the click box that
sits right up there under the logo.
| | 02:57 | When someone clicks on it,
it jumps to the slide Home.
| | 03:01 | I could change that navigation here simply
by making a change from Home to another slide.
| | 03:08 | I could also choose a
different action if I wanted to.
| | 03:11 | Remember that the Branching panel is
only going to allow us to adjust how the
| | 03:16 | different slides relate to each other.
| | 03:18 | it's not going to give us
access to advanced actions.
| | 03:21 | To see those we'll have to look at the
Actions area of the Properties panel.
| | 03:25 | We're not going to make any changes to
our presentation in the Branching panel
| | 03:29 | so let's close it up now.
| | 03:34 | We control navigation between
slides with our interactive objects.
| | 03:38 | We can determine what happens when we
click on those various objects by using
| | 03:42 | either the Properties panel or
by using the Branching panel.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Using TemplatesRevisiting libraries| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to
take a closer look at Libraries.
| | 00:03 | The file that we're going to use
is called Chapter 8 Library.cptl.
| | 00:07 | It's located in the Project
folder in your Chapter 8 folder.
| | 00:12 | This file happens to be a
Captivate project template.
| | 00:15 | We'll take a look at project
templates later on in this chapter.
| | 00:19 | For now, I'd like to focus on the library.
| | 00:21 | Open the Library panel. If you don't
have the Library panel available you can
| | 00:27 | always recover it by switching
back to the Classic workspace.
| | 00:30 | In the library are all of the
elements that happened to be in this project.
| | 00:35 | When you opened this file, you may
have gotten a message that there are many
| | 00:38 | unused library items. That's all right.
| | 00:42 | In fact I don't want to have these
library items used, because I want them to be
| | 00:46 | available for me at any time.
| | 00:49 | Just because they're in the library
doesn't mean that they're in use in the project.
| | 00:54 | One of the things that's interesting
about Captivate is that I can create a
| | 00:57 | library in a project and then
use that library in other projects.
| | 01:03 | This library happens to
contain a number of images.
| | 01:06 | These images are used frequently by
the Hansel & Petal Company when they're
| | 01:10 | creating new content for their
training library that's available online.
| | 01:14 | Anytime you add an object to a
Captivate slide it ends up in the library.
| | 01:19 | You can also add additional items to the
library by using the Import button here.
| | 01:23 | I don't need to do that right now.
| | 01:26 | Our purpose is to expose you to this
library and let you know where it is.
| | 01:30 | We're going to be using it in
another document in another lesson.
| | 01:34 | You can close this file now without saving it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing assets| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to see how we
can use a library in one project that's
| | 00:04 | coming from another project.
| | 00:06 | We're going to start by
creating a new blank document.
| | 00:10 | You can do it from your welcome screen
by choosing Create New, blank document
| | 00:13 | which is right here, or from the File
menu you can choose New Project > Blank
| | 00:18 | Project from the top of the list.
| | 00:20 | Set the product size to 800x600 then click OK.
| | 00:26 | The library in this project is empty.
| | 00:28 | It's empty because we haven't
added any content to this project yet.
| | 00:33 | It would be handy if I could access a
library in another project. That way I can
| | 00:38 | manage that library in that one
project without having to worry about
| | 00:42 | distributing that content to many others.
| | 00:44 | Let's do that now. From the Library panel I
can choose Open Library and then Open Library.
| | 00:52 | Browse to the Project folder in Chapter 8
Exercise Files and choose Chapter 8 Library.cptl.
| | 01:02 | You'll get a new library window that will open.
| | 01:05 | Let's expand it so that we can see it.
| | 01:08 | All of the library items from the
Chapter 8 library.cptl file are now
| | 01:13 | available for us to use.
| | 01:15 | We can pin this library to the existing
panel on the right by dragging the tab
| | 01:20 | next to the other Library panel. Click
and drag to the right. When you see the
| | 01:27 | blue outline release your mouse.
| | 01:29 | Now we have both libraries
available for use in this project.
| | 01:34 | This is the empty one that represents
the contents of this project right now.
| | 01:39 | This is the library from the other file.
| | 01:41 | Let's quickly build a master slide.
| | 01:44 | Under Window choose Master Slide and
then down in the Library panel select
| | 01:50 | HandPBackground and drag it onto the stage.
| | 01:56 | Command+0 or Ctrl+0 to show the
entire stage and drag this to the
| | 02:01 | upper left-hand corner.
| | 02:03 | Switch back to slide number 1.
Now we're well on our way to building a project
| | 02:08 | that's using the library
items from another project.
| | 02:12 | Let's save this as Chapter 8_a.
| | 02:21 | The ability to open external libraries allows
groups of people to be able to work together.
| | 02:26 | You can store a library on a file server
for instance and multiple people can be
| | 02:30 | accessing that library at the
same time through the Library panel.
| | 02:34 | It's a great way for a group to
maintain branding across multiple projects
| | 02:39 | and multiple users.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating project templates| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to see
how we can create a project template.
| | 00:03 | A project template is a way for you
to design a project and then have some
| | 00:07 | placeholder areas where other
users will insert content or slides.
| | 00:12 | We're going to begin by
creating a new project template.
| | 00:16 | You can do that from your welcome
screen or from the File menu choose New Project
| | 00:20 | and Project Template.
| | 00:24 | I want the size to be 800x600.
| | 00:27 | If you don't have that chosen
please choose it now and then click OK.
| | 00:32 | I'd like to use content from
another library in this template.
| | 00:36 | I can open a library from the Library panel.
| | 00:39 | If you don't see the Library panel
then you may want to switch to the Classic
| | 00:42 | workspace where it should be.
| | 00:44 | Choose Open Library and
browse to Chapter 8 Library.cptl.
| | 00:49 | This will be in your Project
folder in Chapter 8 Exercise Files.
| | 00:56 | Select it and choose Open.
| | 00:59 | This opens the Library
from Chapter 8 Library.cptl.
| | 01:04 | Let's drag it over and pin it
next to the existing Library panel.
| | 01:08 | Click and hold on the tab and drag it
to the right, until you see the blue
| | 01:12 | outline in this panel and release.
| | 01:14 | The first thing we'll do
is to create a master slide.
| | 01:18 | Under Window choose Master Slide and then
Ctrl+0 or Command+0 to show the entire stage.
| | 01:26 | I want to put the HandPBackground
image onto the background of this slide.
| | 01:31 | Select it and drag it onto the stage.
| | 01:35 | Right-click and choose Align >
Center horizontally on the slide.
| | 01:41 | Do the same with the vertical
alignment. Right-click, Align > Center
| | 01:46 | vertically on the slide.
| | 01:48 | Now let's go to slide number 1.
| | 01:51 | Our basic project is going to
consist of a few templated items.
| | 01:55 | First of all we'll include a button.
Create a new button now by inserting a
| | 01:59 | button from the toolbar, switch to
your Properties panel, and we'll make this
| | 02:05 | to be an Image button.
| | 02:09 | We'll browse to an image. This
is located in the images folder.
| | 02:13 | Pick store.png file and then Open.
| | 02:21 | Move it up here and we'll create
two more buttons. Do the same thing.
| | 02:26 | Call them Image Buttons.
| | 02:30 | Select the gifts.png. Slide that over.
| | 02:36 | Lastly create one more button, make it an
Image button, and we'll browse to displays.png.
| | 02:49 | Set them a distance apart from each
other then hold down your Shift key and
| | 02:53 | select all three. Right-click, Align >
Align Left and then right-click, Align >
| | 03:04 | Distribute Vertically.
| | 03:07 | It's important that these three
buttons don't overlap with each other so that
| | 03:10 | they'll distribute properly.
| | 03:12 | Now we've got some navigation
buttons there and I'd like to insert some
| | 03:15 | placeholder content.
| | 03:17 | Under Insert choose
Placeholder Objects and Text Caption.
| | 03:24 | Move the text caption just to the right
of Hansel & Petal logo and a little bit
| | 03:28 | below it and then drag it across the slide.
| | 03:32 | You'll notice that this
doesn't look like a text caption.
| | 03:36 | However, we can style it in advance so
that when it does get used it will have
| | 03:40 | the appropriate styling.
| | 03:41 | I'd like this to have the
transparent styling so under General choose
| | 03:46 | transparent, leave the font as
Myriad Pro, but change it to Bold, and we'll
| | 03:52 | increase the Size to 40 points.
| | 03:56 | That's all we'll do with that for now.
| | 03:58 | The next thing I'd like to do is
to insert an image placeholder.
| | 04:02 | Under Insert choose Placeholder
Objects and before we continue, take a look at
| | 04:06 | the list of placeholder
objects that we can insert.
| | 04:10 | We've used a Text Caption, but we
could also insert a Rollover Caption, an
| | 04:14 | Image, Rollover Image, Animation, Text
Animation, Slide video, we'll use that in
| | 04:19 | a moment, or an FLV or F4V file.
| | 04:22 | Every one of these objects
will appear as that gray box.
| | 04:26 | This allows you to predetermine what
type of content is going to be in a project.
| | 04:32 | For someone to use it all they have got
to do is double-click on the placeholder
| | 04:37 | and then they'll be asked to
fill in the blanks so to speak.
| | 04:40 | Let's select Image now and we'll drag it
out so that it fits just about here and
| | 04:47 | down to the lower right-hand corner. Great!
| | 04:50 | Let's insert a placeholder slide now.
| | 04:54 | Right-click on slide number 1 and
Insert under Placeholder Slides a
| | 05:00 | Recording Slide Placeholder.
| | 05:04 | Go back to slide number 1 and
right-click Insert New Slide.
| | 05:10 | On slide 2 we'll insert some placeholder video.
| | 05:15 | Insert > Placeholder Objects. In this
case we're going to use Slide video.
| | 05:22 | I'd like the slide video
to fit the entire screen.
| | 05:27 | Let's stretch it out so that it
covers the entire slide. Great!
| | 05:32 | What we have now is a file that
can be used to create a new project.
| | 05:36 | This project will consist of three slides.
| | 05:39 | The first slide is going
to be our welcome slide.
| | 05:42 | it has some text to be filled
in and an image to be filled in.
| | 05:45 | The second slide is going to include some video.
| | 05:47 | The third slide is going
to be a screen recording.
| | 05:51 | We'll take a look at screen
recordings in another chapter.
| | 05:54 | I just want that to be
part of my project template.
| | 05:57 | Now that I have created my
project template I can save it.
| | 06:01 | Choose File > Save As and
we'll call this Chapter 8_b.cptl.
| | 06:10 | Do not change the extension of this file.
| | 06:14 | This is not a CPTX file.
| | 06:17 | It's a CPTL file and that's very important.
| | 06:21 | If you call it a CPTX file it will not
behave the way that you expect it to.
| | 06:26 | It needs to be called CPTL in order for
Captivate to understand that this is in
| | 06:31 | fact a project template.
| | 06:35 | Using project templates in conjunction
with external libraries is a way for you
| | 06:40 | not only to build projects in advance,
but also to ensure that the branding of
| | 06:46 | those projects will meet
the branding of your company.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using project templates| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to create a new
project from an existing project template.
| | 00:05 | From the File menu, choose New
Project and then Project From Template.
| | 00:11 | Choose Chapter 8_b.cptl.
| | 00:16 | This is our project template that
we built earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:19 | Once you have it selected, click Open.
| | 00:23 | You can see our placeholder
elements appearing as gray boxes.
| | 00:27 | We can replace the content in the
placeholders simply by double-clicking them.
| | 00:31 | Let's replace the content in
the text caption at the top.
| | 00:36 | Simply double-click and
then type the new caption there.
| | 00:40 | Double-click to select. Drag across.
| | 00:42 | We will type Amaryllis Training.
| | 00:49 | Hit Escape to end editing.
| | 00:52 | Let's replace this image now.
| | 00:54 | Select the image and then double-click.
| | 00:57 | You can pick any existing image from your
library or import a new file. Choose Import now.
| | 01:06 | In the Exercise Files, go to Chapter 8,
and Project, look in your Images, and
| | 01:12 | choose flower storefront. Click Open.
| | 01:16 | That image now fills the space
that we provided with the placeholder.
| | 01:21 | Of course, the proportions aren't quite
right so we may want to have it fit to
| | 01:25 | the stage instead and
then resize it appropriately.
| | 01:34 | Hold down your Shift key
to rescale proportionally.
| | 01:37 | This is an important take
away for image placeholders.
| | 01:40 | When you use image placeholders, you don't
always know the size of the images coming in.
| | 01:46 | In many cases, you will be required to
rescale or resize the images to get them
| | 01:51 | to fit appropriately.
| | 01:52 | Alternatively, you could make your
image placeholder be the same proportions as
| | 01:57 | all of the pictures that you're taking
from your digital camera for instance and
| | 02:01 | then you will be very close
and be able to scale quickly.
| | 02:03 | Let's go take a look at Slide 2.
| | 02:06 | Slide 2 has a video placeholder.
| | 02:09 | Double-click it and choose Amaryllis.f4v.
| | 02:14 | This is located in the Movies folder,
in your Exercises folder, in Chapter 8.
| | 02:22 | Once you have it selected, choose Open.
The video also gets scaled out of proportion.
| | 02:30 | Under Position & Size, click Original Size.
| | 02:34 | This will position the video at the
top left-hand corner of the screen.
| | 02:39 | Let's move it down to the bottom.
| | 02:41 | Select it and drag it down.
| | 02:44 | Let's take a look at the Timeline.
| | 02:46 | In the Timeline the video only exists
for the duration of the slide. Because we
| | 02:51 | didn't import this video through
the normal Import > Slide Video method,
| | 02:57 | we don't get the timing
automatically built for us.
| | 03:00 | When you import video onto a
template therefore, you've got to take the
| | 03:04 | additional step of editing the video timing.
| | 03:07 | In the Properties panel, you'll
see Video and Edit Video Timing.
| | 03:12 | We've examined video timing in another
chapter so I am not going to do that here.
| | 03:16 | This project is well on its way to completion.
| | 03:19 | There is the third slide there
and that's a recording slide.
| | 03:22 | We are not going to do
anything with that just yet.
| | 03:24 | We will be looking at
recordings in another chapter.
| | 03:26 | For now, let's save this project.
| | 03:29 | We'll call it Chapter 8_c.cptx.
| | 03:35 | Once again, it's important not to
change the extension on this file.
| | 03:39 | This is a Captivate project.
| | 03:41 | It's not a Captivate template.
| | 03:44 | We have seen how we can use a template
in Captivate and replace the template
| | 03:48 | objects with live content.
| | 03:50 | Even though we have to make
adjustments to the things that we put into the
| | 03:53 | content placeholders, this is still a
great way to save a lot of time and a lot
| | 03:57 | of energy in creating new Captivate projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Recording a Software SimulationPreparing simulations| 00:00 | In this lesson I am going to
talk about preparing for recording
| | 00:03 | software simulations.
| | 00:05 | A software simulation is a type of
Captivate project that allows you to simulate
| | 00:09 | interactions with a piece of software.
| | 00:12 | This can be done for training purposes.
| | 00:14 | It can also be done for assessment purposes.
| | 00:17 | When Captivate makes a software
simulation, it will attempt to record all of the
| | 00:22 | interactions that you have
with a piece of software.
| | 00:25 | This includes but isn't limited to
motion of your mouse, places where you click,
| | 00:30 | and text fields you may type in.
| | 00:33 | Captivate captures the interaction
with that software as more than simply a
| | 00:37 | screen recording that you might be
familiar with from other software.
| | 00:41 | It also includes the mouse track,
places where you click, interactions with
| | 00:46 | menus, and places where you may type content.
| | 00:50 | In addition, Captivate can capture a
voice track so that you can tell the user
| | 00:55 | what you're about to do or
what they should expect to happen.
| | 00:58 | Before we jump into actually recording
a software simulation, I would like to
| | 01:02 | talk briefly about preparing for
recording that software simulation.
| | 01:06 | I'll do that using a Captivate
presentation that I've built from a
| | 01:10 | PowerPoint presentation.
| | 01:12 | It's included in the Chapter 9 folder
in the Project folder and it's called
| | 01:16 | Recording preparation.cptx.
| | 01:19 | If you'd like to follow
along with me, please open it.
| | 01:23 | I'll preview the project
now and speak to the slides.
| | 01:26 | We are going to talk about
preparing for software simulations.
| | 01:32 | First, let's discuss your microphone.
| | 01:35 | You want to have a good
quality microphone at hand.
| | 01:38 | If you want to use a headset, that may
be convenient but please test the quality
| | 01:43 | before you purchase.
| | 01:44 | Many of the headsets that you might buy,
although they look great, often don't
| | 01:48 | sound that good when you
start to make recordings.
| | 01:51 | Macintoshes will often use a USB microphone.
| | 01:55 | Many Windows computers will have a
microphone input in addition to USB.
| | 01:59 | So you may have some more flexibility
with Windows computers and the types of
| | 02:03 | microphones that you can
connect to them. Look around you.
| | 02:07 | Is the room you're in suitable for recording?
| | 02:10 | Make sure that it's a quiet place.
| | 02:13 | Also, you can muffle the sound
reflection in the room by hanging blankets or
| | 02:17 | towels or perhaps even a
sleeping bag on the walls.
| | 02:22 | Be sure to shut off your e-mail and
phone and other types of electronics that
| | 02:25 | might interrupt the process.
| | 02:28 | Once again make sure there's no interruptions.
| | 02:31 | Let everybody around you know that
you're making a recording.
| | 02:36 | Please rehearse.
| | 02:37 | If you practice, you are more likely to
get that recording right the first time.
| | 02:41 | This can save you a lot of
effort later on in editing.
| | 02:45 | Use a script when possible.
| | 02:48 | A script makes it possible to
proceed more easily when you're doing
| | 02:51 | your demonstration.
| | 02:53 | You can create your
script while you're rehearsing.
| | 02:56 | Be sure to test your work before you record.
| | 03:00 | Please don't let you're recording be the
first time that you've seen a piece of software.
| | 03:04 | Also gather your assets
and files into one place.
| | 03:08 | This will make it possible for you to
find them much more easily and keep you
| | 03:12 | from clicking all over the
place to try and open a file.
| | 03:16 | Lastly, have some fun.
| | 03:18 | Making screen recordings can be a fun
way to help your colleagues get acclimated
| | 03:23 | to new software and new
processes in your company.
| | 03:26 | You can close the preview now.
| | 03:27 | I've provided you with this Captivate
file and the PowerPoint file that made it
| | 03:32 | if you'd like to explore what I did.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Preparing to record| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to
create a software simulation project.
| | 00:03 | Before we do that, we've
got to do little preparation.
| | 00:06 | For this exercise we're going to
simulate filling in a form on a web site.
| | 00:11 | I'm going to switch to Firefox now.
| | 00:13 | In Firefox, I'm viewing the
Two Trees Olive Oil web site.
| | 00:17 | This is at www.twotreesoliveoil.com.
You can go there too.
| | 00:22 | Once you there, click on the Contact link.
| | 00:26 | Next, we want to select Kurt James as
the person that we are going to contact.
| | 00:31 | In this software simulation, we are going
to simulate sending an e-mail to Kurt James.
| | 00:36 | We'll begin recording from here.
| | 00:38 | During the recording, I'll explain that
we are training how to fill out this form.
| | 00:43 | I'll explain what each of the fields
are and then suggests some entries that
| | 00:47 | someone could use to fill out the form.
| | 00:49 | When I'm done, I'll stop the recording.
| | 00:52 | Let's go back to Captivate so that
we can begin the recording process.
| | 00:57 | From Captivate, I would like to
create a new software simulation.
| | 01:01 | Before I create the software simulation,
however, I've got to ensure that my
| | 01:05 | microphone is going to record what I say.
| | 01:08 | We can ensure that we're going to
capture audio correctly in the Preferences.
| | 01:12 | On a Macintosh, this is located
under the Adobe Captivate menu.
| | 01:16 | On a Windows computer, it's under the Edit menu.
| | 01:20 | Under the Recording category, choose Settings.
| | 01:24 | Now choose Audio Settings.
| | 01:28 | Select your audio input device here.
| | 01:30 | Your audio input device will be the
microphone you're going to use while you're recording.
| | 01:35 | For me, I'm choosing Built-In Digital Input.
| | 01:39 | Your microphone choice will be different.
| | 01:42 | Because I know that my input requires
the CD Bitrate, I've chosen it already.
| | 01:46 | Depending on your microphone, you
might be able to choose a lower bit rate.
| | 01:51 | A lower bit rate will result in a
smaller file but higher compression.
| | 01:55 | Having made your audio quality choice click OK.
| | 01:59 | Now I can close my Preferences.
| | 02:03 | We can create a new software
simulation from the Welcome screen by choosing
| | 02:06 | Create New, and then Software Simulation.
| | 02:09 | We can also do it from the File menu.
Choose File and Record new project.
| | 02:17 | Captivate will initially disappear.
| | 02:19 | We need to establish what we're going to record.
| | 02:23 | We can record either a specific area of
the screen or we can record an application.
| | 02:29 | I'm going to choose Application in
this case because I only want to record my
| | 02:33 | interactions with Firefox.
| | 02:34 | I need to select which
application I want to record.
| | 02:39 | I'm going to choose Firefox
and Two Trees Olive Oil Company.
| | 02:45 | You can see that there's a red line
now that appears all the way around
| | 02:48 | the Firefox window.
| | 02:50 | This tells me the area
that's going to be recorded.
| | 02:53 | By default, Captivate is going
to snap to the application window.
| | 02:57 | I could also snap to the application
region, which is bigger on a Macintosh
| | 03:01 | because it includes the menu bar.
| | 03:03 | Lastly, I could choose a custom size,
which would then record only a specific
| | 03:07 | portion of the screen.
| | 03:09 | Next, I have to determine what
type of recording I'm going to make.
| | 03:12 | Captivate is very good about making
decisions between whether or not to use full
| | 03:17 | motion recording, which is like
recording a movie, and the recording that it
| | 03:22 | makes when it's capturing the different events.
| | 03:24 | It can switch back and forth as
necessary if we leave the recording on Automatic.
| | 03:29 | I'm recommending that for most of the work
that you do Automatic is going to be just fine.
| | 03:34 | Let's leave that setting on Automatic.
| | 03:37 | We can also determine
what we're going to record.
| | 03:40 | We can actually make more
than one recording at once.
| | 03:43 | A Demo recording will include the
voiceover that we're going to record, plus
| | 03:47 | all of the mouse movements, and the
interactions with menus or tabs, and anything
| | 03:52 | that we type into form fields.
| | 03:54 | If I record a Training, it will record all
of that but it will provide hints along
| | 04:00 | the way and will stop at specific actions.
| | 04:04 | If I click on the menu during the
recording, then the playback will stop and
| | 04:08 | wait for the user to click on the menu.
| | 04:09 | It will also give them hints as
to where they should be clicking.
| | 04:14 | The advantage of recording a training is
that you can have a learner go through
| | 04:18 | the process of using an application
without actually using the application.
| | 04:23 | The last type of recording
is the assessment recording.
| | 04:27 | An assessment is a way for you to
determine whether or not the learner is
| | 04:31 | actually learned how to do that process.
| | 04:34 | In an assessment, all hints
and recordings are removed.
| | 04:37 | What's left are the interactions that
the user must make in the appropriate
| | 04:41 | order to achieve the
results that were trying to train.
| | 04:45 | Let's enable Assessment and Training
in addition to Demo for this recording.
| | 04:50 | Panning will follow your mouse around
if you have a smaller recording area.
| | 04:54 | We are not going to pan because
we are recording the entire screen.
| | 04:58 | There's no need to pan around there.
| | 05:00 | If you had a smaller capture area,
however, you might enable Automatic Panning.
| | 05:04 | This will allow you to have a smaller area
of the screen that will follow the mouse.
| | 05:09 | Lastly, we want to record our audio narration.
| | 05:13 | I'm going to choose it from
the Built-in Digital Input.
| | 05:17 | Now we know how to set up our recording
to capture a demonstration, a training and
| | 05:22 | an assessment, we are going to capture
the audio as well so that we can instruct
| | 05:26 | the learner what we are about to do and
what we are doing while we are doing it.
| | 05:30 | We are going to actually make
the recording in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Recording simulations| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to
actually record our simulation.
| | 00:03 | In the previous lesson we set up
Captivate to make the recording.
| | 00:07 | Before I hit Record I want to give you
some advice about making the recording itself.
| | 00:11 | When you're narrating be sure to speak
in advance of any clicks that you make.
| | 00:16 | It will make it much easier to edit
later and won't result in words being
| | 00:20 | split between slides.
| | 00:22 | Make sure that you isolate
typing and clicking from speaking.
| | 00:26 | Again, it will make it
much easier to edit later on.
| | 00:29 | Speak more slowly and
deliberately than you think you should.
| | 00:33 | You'll discover that your recording
will be much easier to understand than if
| | 00:36 | you're going along at high speed.
| | 00:38 | When you click or type or select
something with your mouse, wait for the sound
| | 00:43 | of the camera before you proceed.
| | 00:46 | Captivate provides some audible
feedback to let you know that it has taken a
| | 00:49 | picture of what you've just done.
| | 00:52 | You can take screenshots when
you're recording interactive content, for
| | 00:55 | instance rollovers or Flash movies
that won't register as obvious places for
| | 00:59 | Captivate to take a screenshot.
| | 01:02 | To take that manual screenshot you can
use the Print Screen key on a Windows
| | 01:06 | computer or Command+F6 on a Macintosh.
| | 01:10 | When you finished with the
recording, type the End key in Windows or
| | 01:14 | Command+Enter on a Macintosh or Ctrl+
F2 on Windows or Command+F2 on Macintosh
| | 01:21 | to stop the recording.
| | 01:23 | You could also simply switch the
application to Captivate by using Command+Tab
| | 01:27 | on the Mac or Ctrl+Tab in Windows.
| | 01:30 | I know that it sounds like a lot of
things you got to worry about, but it's not
| | 01:33 | as difficult as it sounds.
| | 01:35 | Let's make our recording now.
| | 01:37 | As soon as I click Record, I'm going
to get a countdown and then Captivate is
| | 01:41 | going to record everything I say and do.
| | 01:45 | When I'm done, I'll choose
Command+F2 to stop my recording.
| | 01:49 | Captivate wants us to calibrate our audio.
| | 01:51 | This is always a good idea.
| | 01:54 | I'm calibrating my audio for use with Captivate.
| | 01:58 | Now I'm ready to go.
| | 02:03 | In this training we're going to learn
how to use the Two Trees Olive Oil Company
| | 02:07 | contact form to reach out to Kurt James.
| | 02:11 | Browse to the twotreesoliveoil.com web site
and then click on Contact and then Kurt James.
| | 02:17 | That will take you to this form.
| | 02:19 | The first thing you've got to do is
enter your name in the Name field.
| | 02:23 | Although it's not required, it's a
courtesy that Kurt will appreciate.
| | 02:31 | Next, we need your email address.
| | 02:33 | Select the Email field and
then type your email address.
| | 02:44 | The third thing you need to do is
to supply a subject for the message.
| | 02:48 | For these purposes enter "Great job, Kurt."
| | 02:55 | We can scroll down to see the Message field.
| | 03:03 | Type "I love your products."
| | 03:09 | If you want, you can send a
copy of the email to yourself.
| | 03:12 | For this training please enable that option.
| | 03:18 | Lastly, send the email.
| | 03:22 | Now the email has been sent.
| | 03:24 | Thank you for using this contact form.
| | 03:27 | When finished, you'll type the End key
in Windows or Command+Enter on a Mac or
| | 03:31 | any of those other
keystrokes that I had talked about.
| | 03:34 | In the upper right-hand corner of the
screen, you'll see the Captivate icon has
| | 03:37 | appeared and it is stopped.
| | 03:40 | Select it to return to Captivate.
| | 03:43 | We've now successfully created
our software simulation recording.
| | 03:47 | There are three files that Captivate's
created and we need to save each one in turn.
| | 03:52 | The one called training is our training version.
| | 03:54 | So let's save that.
| | 03:55 | We'll put it in the Chapter 09
folder in our Project folder.
| | 04:03 | We'll call it contact_
training and then click Save.
| | 04:12 | Let's switch to the assessment.
| | 04:14 | We'll call it contact_
assessment and Save. Lastly the demo.
| | 04:39 | Making the recordings really
wasn't that difficult, was it?
| | 04:42 | In the next lesson we'll
cover editing the simulations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing simulations| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to edit a
software simulation recording that we have
| | 00:04 | made with Captivate.
| | 00:05 | We are going to use the contact_demo file
that we recorded earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:10 | If you don't have it open, please open it now.
| | 00:12 | Then go to slide number 1.
| | 00:15 | Let's change our view to Best Fit.
| | 00:19 | Now we can see all of the
elements in our captured recording.
| | 00:23 | On slide number 1, we have many of the
elements that you're likely to be editing
| | 00:27 | in your own recordings.
| | 00:28 | For instance, we have a Mouse track.
| | 00:31 | That's this blue curve right here.
| | 00:33 | The Mouse track will show a mouse as it
moves from one place to another during
| | 00:38 | the Captivate recording playback.
| | 00:40 | We also have a highlight area that
shows where we want people to click.
| | 00:45 | That's this small box right here.
| | 00:47 | In addition, there is a text caption
that goes along with that highlight box.
| | 00:52 | Lastly, there is the audio track.
| | 00:54 | I want to make adjustments to
each of these four elements.
| | 00:58 | Let's begin with the audio track.
| | 01:00 | I know that when I made the recording I
stopped and then restarted the recording.
| | 01:04 | That's okay because I can edit out
that false start. Let's do that now.
| | 01:10 | Selects the soundtrack along the bottom,
and then in the Properties panel, in
| | 01:14 | the Audio group you'll see Edit Audio.
| | 01:18 | Let's play this so that you can
hear the false start. (Recording:
| | 01:23 | In this recording, you're going
to lean how to use--) (Recording:
| | 01:27 | In this training?) There we go.
| | 01:30 | Let's zoom out so that we
can see more of the waveform.
| | 01:36 | This is a false start right here.
| | 01:37 | I would like to remove that so what
I'll do is to click here and drag all the
| | 01:42 | way back to the beginning.
| | 01:44 | This will leave me a little bit of silence
before I begin speaking in the recording.
| | 01:48 | Once we have made that selection,
we can delete that part of the sound.
| | 01:53 | Having made that change,
let's close Audio Editing.
| | 01:57 | I would like to save the changes.
| | 02:00 | Let's scroll to the end of the slide in the
Timeline to see the effect of that change.
| | 02:04 | You can see that there's about five
seconds of silence that we would like to remove.
| | 02:08 | I need to move the highlight box, the
caption and the Mouse track to the left to
| | 02:12 | align with the end of the audio.
| | 02:15 | Select all three of those beginning
with the Mouse track, hold down the Shift
| | 02:20 | key and click, and then keeping
the Shift key down click again.
| | 02:26 | Now grab the Mouse track and slide it
to the left until its right hand edge
| | 02:31 | aligns with the end of the audio track.
| | 02:34 | Once you have got aligned up,
release the Mouse track.
| | 02:38 | Now we need to shorten the slide duration so
that it aligns with the end of the audio track.
| | 02:44 | Great!
| | 02:45 | Now, let's adjust the highlight box.
| | 02:47 | Select the highlight box in the Timeline.
| | 02:50 | Let's zoom in on that up here.
| | 02:51 | I would like the highlight box to
completely surround the name field.
| | 03:00 | Adjust the size of the highlight box so
that it's a little bit bigger than the field.
| | 03:07 | Next, I would like to move
the Text_Caption to the right.
| | 03:10 | I want the point to be touching the
lower right-hand corner of the name field.
| | 03:14 | We are almost done.
| | 03:19 | The last thing we need to do
is to adjust the Mouse track.
| | 03:23 | This is the first time
that we've seen a Mouse track.
| | 03:25 | So let's explore it in some detail.
| | 03:28 | Select the Mouse track on the Timeline.
| | 03:31 | You can choose how the Mouse
track will appear as a cursor.
| | 03:34 | The Mouse track represents a cursor
movement from one place to another.
| | 03:39 | In the Options panel, you can choose
which cursor will show on the Mouse track.
| | 03:43 | Captivate automatically detects the
cursor while it's doing the recording.
| | 03:47 | However, you can adjust
that cursor after the fact.
| | 03:51 | If you'd like to change it to a normal
mouse pointer, for instance, then you
| | 03:54 | could do that by choosing this one here.
| | 03:57 | You can see how the cursor
changes to that normal mouse pointer.
| | 04:01 | Captivate records the appearance of
the cursor at the time of the click.
| | 04:05 | Since we hit clicked in the text entry box,
the resulting cursor is a text-entry cursor.
| | 04:11 | If you like, you can switch it back to
the text-entry cursor or leave it as a
| | 04:15 | normal mouse cursor.
| | 04:17 | I'm going to set it back
to the text-entry cursor.
| | 04:20 | You can adjust the starting and
ending point for the Mouse track as well.
| | 04:24 | If Captivate doesn't have a starting
point, it will choose the upper left-hand
| | 04:28 | corner of the screen as a starting point.
| | 04:30 | The ending point is going
to be where you clicked.
| | 04:33 | Captivate will show the actual
mouse click at the very end of the path.
| | 04:37 | Let's move the end of the Mouse track
to the left so that the end of the track
| | 04:41 | is fully within the box.
| | 04:43 | Click-and-drag on the Mouse track and
drag it to the left and put it about there.
| | 04:49 | You have a few controls over the Mouse track.
| | 04:52 | If you want a cursor to be more visible,
you could double the size of the cursor
| | 04:56 | by clicking this option here.
| | 04:59 | Now you can see that it's twice as big.
| | 05:00 | We'll set it back to its normal size.
| | 05:04 | You could also have a Straight Pointer
Path rather than the curved pointer path.
| | 05:08 | You can also control the speed of the path,
and whether or not we hear a mouse click.
| | 05:13 | You can set the mouse click to
be either single or double click.
| | 05:17 | Alternatively, you could play
another sound when the click took place.
| | 05:22 | I'm going to leave this as a Single-click.
| | 05:25 | Lastly, the mouse click will show as a blue dot.
| | 05:28 | I could change the shape of that
dot by importing a different shape.
| | 05:32 | I'm going to leave this alone.
| | 05:35 | Having made my changes, I would like
to preview the project. (Recording:
| | 05:40 | In this training, we're going to
learn how to use the Two Trees Olive Oil
| | 05:44 | Company form to reach out
to Kurt James.) (Recording:
| | 05:49 | Browse to the Two Trees Olive Oil
Company web site and then click on Contact,
| | 05:54 | and then Kurt James.) (Recording:
| | 05:56 | That will take you to this form.) (Recording:
| | 05:59 | The first thing you've got to do is enter
your name in the name field.) (Recording:
| | 06:03 | Although it's not required, it's a
courtesy that Kurt will appreciate.) (Recording:
| | 06:07 | So select the Name field, and then
type your name.) We'll stop now.
| | 06:13 | You can see now that our audio has
been repaired, our Mouse track ends in the
| | 06:17 | field appropriately, the highlight is
around the field appropriately, and the
| | 06:22 | caption is in the lower
right-hand corner of the field.
| | 06:26 | Let's exit editing now.
| | 06:28 | Let's go to slide 2 to see one
more new element in our recording.
| | 06:33 | When you type text in a field,
it gets recorded as a movie.
| | 06:37 | You can see that there's an object on
the Timeline that's called Typing Text.
| | 06:42 | If you select it, you'll see that there's
really not much that can be done with it here.
| | 06:47 | If you've made some changes to that text, you
may want to convert that too a text animation.
| | 06:53 | Let's see how we can do that now.
| | 06:55 | Move your playhead to the right to
where the text appears (Recording:
| | 06:58 | So select the Name field,
and then type your name.)
| | 07:02 | And stop it right there where the text appears.
| | 07:05 | Now select the Typing Text and right-click.
| | 07:09 | You can replace that now with text animation.
| | 07:16 | That text animation will replace
that text that's currently on the field.
| | 07:19 | The default effect is Typing Text With Sound so
you do have that appearance of someone typing.
| | 07:26 | Checking the Properties, you can
see that you can change the text that
| | 07:29 | gets entered there.
| | 07:31 | You can also adjust the
font and the size of the type.
| | 07:34 | Let's make it a little bit larger.
| | 07:37 | We'll make it 12 point type
in this case and then click OK.
| | 07:46 | The default duration for
the animation is 3 seconds.
| | 07:49 | Let's reduce that so that
it ends where the audio ends.
| | 07:56 | Lastly, we'll reduce the duration of the
slide to match all of the other elements.
| | 08:01 | Let's preview slide
number 2 to see how this works.
| | 08:05 | In this case we preview
from this slide. (Recording:
| | 08:07 | So select the Name field
and then type your name.)
| | 08:18 | Now we have animated text
that we can adjust as necessary.
| | 08:22 | Let's close this Preview
panel and save our work.
| | 08:24 | I will call it contact_demo_a and then save it.
| | 08:39 | When you make your recording with
Captivate, you will need to edit that
| | 08:42 | recording in order to get optimal results.
| | 08:44 | There will be some cases, however, where you
can use them directly without any adjustment.
| | 08:48 | It's been my experience that every
recording requires at least a little bit of
| | 08:52 | tweaking to get it perfect.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting click-through trainings| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to adjust
the training file that was created when we
| | 00:04 | recorded our simulation.
| | 00:05 | We will be using the
contact_training file to do that.
| | 00:09 | If you don't have it open, please open it now.
| | 00:12 | When Captivate records trainings,
it creates click boxes for all of the
| | 00:16 | places that you click.
| | 00:18 | In addition, it builds success and
failure captions and it also builds text areas.
| | 00:24 | We need to make some adjustments in
order to make our training more effective.
| | 00:28 | Let's begin with the audio on slider number 1.
| | 00:31 | Select the audio and then choose
Edit Audio from the Properties panel.
| | 00:36 | If your Properties panel isn't
available then you can get it by switching to
| | 00:39 | the Classic workspace.
| | 00:44 | I know because I edited this audio
when we edited the demo file that I need to
| | 00:49 | remove this area over here.
| | 00:52 | I'll position my cursor and drag to
the left and then remove the audio.
| | 00:57 | I can use my Delete button
or my Cut button to do that.
| | 01:01 | Now that that's gone, I'll save and close.
| | 01:06 | Now I need to adjust the duration of the slide.
| | 01:10 | Select the click box and drag it all
the way back to where the sound ends.
| | 01:16 | And then do the same with the slide.
| | 01:21 | Let's scroll down to the middle of the screen.
| | 01:27 | Captivate has created for us a click
box and a hint and failure caption.
| | 01:32 | We need to adjust both the
captions and the click box.
| | 01:36 | The captions should say "Click the Name field."
| | 01:39 | Let's change that now.
| | 01:41 | Select the hint caption,
double-click, and type Name field.
| | 01:51 | Do the same with the failure caption.
| | 01:59 | Hit Escape to cancel editing the text.
| | 02:01 | Now reduce the width of that caption.
| | 02:07 | Do the same with the other caption.
| | 02:12 | Select them both and drag them to the
right a little bit more. There we go.
| | 02:20 | Now we need to adjust the size of the click box.
| | 02:24 | Select the click box and make it to be
just a little bit bigger than the Name field.
| | 02:36 | We have to increase the size of the
click box because the user's expectation is
| | 02:41 | that they can click anywhere on the
name field to be able to enter text.
| | 02:45 | Captivate builds a very small click box,
which is right around the area where you click.
| | 02:50 | Let's move now to slider number 2.
| | 02:53 | On slider number 2, we have some typing text.
| | 02:56 | We need to remove the typing text
and replace it with a text entry area.
| | 03:01 | Select the Typing Text in the
Timeline and then right-click and replace it
| | 03:05 | with Text Animation.
| | 03:10 | Now hit the Delete key to
remove the text animation.
| | 03:14 | Yes, we would like to delete the selected items.
| | 03:19 | We need to draw a text
entry box on the name field.
| | 03:22 | Use the Text Entry Box tool
to create a text entry box.
| | 03:27 | In the General Properties, we
need to remove Validate User Input.
| | 03:32 | We also need to remove the
Hint Caption and the button.
| | 03:39 | Scroll up to see the text entry box.
| | 03:42 | Let's call the text entry box Name
and we will associate it with a variable.
| | 03:51 | The associated variable will be called Name.
| | 03:57 | Type in Name and click OK.
| | 04:01 | Now let's put that text entry
box so that fills the Name field.
| | 04:08 | Let's reduce the size of that text
so that its Myriad Pro 12 points.
| | 04:14 | We can do that in the
Character area of the Properties.
| | 04:18 | The last thing we will do is to
adjust its duration on the Stage.
| | 04:22 | Before we do that I would like to
remove the typing in this audio right here.
| | 04:26 | Select the audio and edit the audio.
| | 04:30 | Drag to the right and I know that
there's typing here. Let's remove it.
| | 04:36 | Click-and-drag and then delete.
| | 04:41 | Now that we have made
the change, save and close.
| | 04:44 | We will reduce the slide
duration to match our audio.
| | 04:51 | We also need to extend the text entry
box so that it lasts for the entire slide.
| | 04:56 | Select it and then extend
it to the end of the slide.
| | 05:00 | We need to move its pause point all
the way to the end of the slide as well.
| | 05:06 | Scroll down to Timing and adjust
Pause After to match the display duration,
| | 05:12 | which is 3.6 seconds.
| | 05:16 | Now let's go to Slide 3 to see how we
can use this information that we have just
| | 05:20 | captured in the Name field.
| | 05:23 | You can see that there's already
a name that's in the Name field.
| | 05:26 | This is because Captivate makes
screen captures as it goes along and James
| | 05:31 | Lockman was the name that was in
that field when it captured the screen.
| | 05:34 | We are just going to cover
it up with a white rectangle.
| | 05:39 | Select the Rectangle tool and draw a
rectangle that we will use to cover up the text.
| | 05:47 | Change the Fill to white, and
solid white and the Stroke to 0.
| | 05:56 | The last thing we need to do to bring
the information from the previous slide to
| | 05:59 | this slide is to create a new caption.
| | 06:03 | Change its Style to transparent,
reduce the Size of the type to 12 points, and
| | 06:11 | make it left-hand justified.
| | 06:14 | Let's drag it onto the Name field now.
| | 06:19 | We need to reduce its width to
be the width of the Name field.
| | 06:24 | The last thing we need to do with
this caption is to fill it with a
| | 06:26 | variable called Name.
| | 06:28 | Double-click, select all with Command+
A or Ctrl+A, scroll down to Format, and
| | 06:37 | choose Insert Variable which is the X here.
| | 06:40 | This is a user variable we
are looking for and its name.
| | 06:43 | We will set its maximum
length to 30 and click OK.
| | 06:49 | The steps that we've just taken for
Slides 1, 2, and 3 will need to be repeated
| | 06:54 | for the remainder of the training.
| | 06:56 | While this may seem tedious,
the results are very satisfying.
| | 07:00 | Let's take a look at the
results of the first three slides.
| | 07:03 | We will preview the project to see the results.
| | 07:06 | (Recording: In this training, we're going to learn how to use
the Two Trees Olive Oil Company form to reach out to Kurt James.)
| | 07:19 | (Recording: Browse to the Two Trees Olive Oil Company
web site and then click on Contact and then Kurt James.)
| | 07:26 | (Recording: That will take you to this form.)
| | 07:28 | (Recording: The first thing you've got to
do is enter your name in the name field.)
| | 07:32 | (Recording: Although it's not required,
it's a courtesy that Kurt will appreciate.)
| | 07:37 | Now the program has stopped and it's
waiting for us to click in the Name area.
| | 07:42 | Move your cursor over the Name field.
| | 07:45 | You can see that the hint caption pops up
| | 07:47 | that says "Click the Name field."
| | 07:50 | Click somewhere else, however, so
click out in this area instead.
| | 07:55 | The failure caption will pop up
reminding you to click the Name field.
| | 07:59 | Now click the Name field.
| | 08:01 | Select the Name field and then type your name.
| | 08:04 | Now the program is
waiting for some entry from us.
| | 08:07 | I will type a totally
different name and then Enter.
| | 08:14 | Next, we need your email address.
| | 08:17 | Select the Email field and
then type your email address.
| | 08:20 | You've noticed that the James
Lockman name has reappeared.
| | 08:24 | It has reappearede because we need
to extend the white box and that text
| | 08:29 | caption to fill the entire slide duration.
| | 08:32 | Now that you know what you need to do, I'm
going to leave it to you to make that change.
| | 08:37 | Let's exit our preview and save our project.
| | 08:39 | We will call it contact_training_a.
| | 08:52 | As you can see, there are several
steps that you'll need to take to turn your
| | 08:55 | Captivate training
recording into a proper program.
| | 09:00 | Although it may seem tedious now,
you'll get into the swing of it and be very
| | 09:04 | productive before you know it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. QuizzingUnderstanding assessment basics| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to
talk about quizzing with Captivate.
| | 00:03 | Quizzing is a way to determine whether
or not the person who is watching your
| | 00:06 | program has learned some
information and can let you know that they've
| | 00:10 | learned that information.
| | 00:11 | There are many different ways of
asking questions in Captivate and you may be
| | 00:16 | familiar with many of them
from when you were in school.
| | 00:19 | A quick look at the Quiz menu reveals
that there are several different types
| | 00:22 | of questions slides.
| | 00:24 | Open the Quiz menu and choose Question Slide.
| | 00:28 | There are many different types of
questions we can insert and we'll be looking
| | 00:32 | at those in detail in the question types lesson.
| | 00:35 | For now, I just want you to know that
we can insert one or more different types
| | 00:40 | of questions into our quiz.
| | 00:42 | An important aspect of a quiz is
that it's expected to report somewhere.
| | 00:48 | As a person takes a quiz, they'll
either get right or wrong answers.
| | 00:53 | In most cases, someone wants to know
whether or not the person who took that
| | 00:57 | quiz actually understood the
information and was able to answer the
| | 01:01 | questions correctly.
| | 01:02 | That process is called reporting
to a learning management system.
| | 01:06 | We'll look at learning
management systems in another chapter.
| | 01:10 | In order to understand the results of
the quiz, it's important that all of the
| | 01:14 | parts of the quiz have
names that you can understand.
| | 01:18 | This means that the quiz itself needs a
name that you can interpret, as well as
| | 01:22 | all of the questions.
| | 01:24 | In this example file that we'll be using,
I've attached names to almost all of
| | 01:28 | the elements that are going to be
used inside of the presentation.
| | 01:32 | This example file doesn't even
have any quiz elements in it yet.
| | 01:36 | When you're dealing with quizzes ,however,
it's best to be thorough to avoid confusion.
| | 01:41 | We're going to be building a quiz
that follows our brief Amaryllis Training
| | 01:46 | video that we built in an earlier lesson.
| | 01:49 | We'll set up the quiz itself in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up a quiz| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to
set up the properties of the quiz.
| | 00:03 | We'll be using the Chapter 10 file that's
in your Project folder in the Chapter 10
| | 00:07 | folder in your Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:09 | If you don't have it open, please open it now.
| | 00:12 | Let's go to the Preferences panel.
| | 00:15 | On a Macintosh it's located under the
Adobe Captivate menu and on a Windows
| | 00:19 | computer it will be in the Edit menu.
| | 00:22 | Let's examine the Quiz category.
| | 00:25 | Choose Reporting first.
| | 00:28 | At the moment we're not going to
turn on Reporting for this project.
| | 00:31 | We will look at this panel in another chapter.
| | 00:35 | In the Settings panel
we're going to name the quiz.
| | 00:38 | While you can retain the name quiz,
that's usually not very informative.
| | 00:42 | When you have multiple quizzes in a
presentation it can get quite confusing.
| | 00:47 | Let's name this quiz Amaryllis Quiz.
| | 00:52 | You can determine whether
or not the quiz is required.
| | 00:55 | There are four choices here.
| | 00:58 | The user could skip the quiz,
which is not the case in this program.
| | 01:01 | It is required, which means that they must
take it and that's going to be the case here.
| | 01:07 | We could also require that they pass
the quiz in order to continue, or we could
| | 01:12 | require that they answer all of the questions.
| | 01:15 | That's a little different from passing.
| | 01:18 | Required means they have to at least
start the quiz and get to the end of it.
| | 01:23 | They may leave some questions unanswered.
| | 01:25 | Answer All means they have to actually
answer all the questions and of course,
| | 01:30 | Pass Required means that they
have to actually pass the quiz.
| | 01:33 | We'll figure out what pass and fail are shortly.
| | 01:36 | We want this to be a required quiz.
| | 01:40 | We can set an Objective ID here.
| | 01:42 | This is important for your
learning management system to be able to
| | 01:46 | identify this quiz when it's being
aggregated with many other quizzes in
| | 01:50 | the learning management system.
| | 01:52 | You might get this objective
ID from your administrator.
| | 01:55 | In other cases, you can name it yourself.
| | 01:57 | Let's call it AmaryllisQuiz, with no spaces.
| | 02:04 | You can also include an Interaction ID Prefix.
| | 02:08 | This note tells us that if we're
publishing our quiz as part of a pool of
| | 02:11 | questions, then we may want to add a
prefix so that the pool questions don't get
| | 02:16 | confused when they're being aggregated.
| | 02:19 | Let's call our prefix AmaryllisQuiz.
| | 02:22 | That way if we aggregate this quiz
with another quiz that happens to have the
| | 02:26 | same named questions
there won't be any confusion.
| | 02:33 | There are some other
settings that are important as well.
| | 02:36 | Depending on the type of quiz you
may want the answers to be shuffled.
| | 02:41 | You can enable that
function by clicking this box here.
| | 02:44 | The Shuffle Answers option can
lead to a quiz that is more fair.
| | 02:49 | Remember back in school when there
were multiple-choice quizzes and someone
| | 02:53 | always had the list of answers and
they knew question 1 was A, and question 2
| | 02:57 | was Q, and question 3 was X and
whatever the numbers were going to be.
| | 03:01 | If we shuffle our answers it makes
it very, very hard for people to cheat
| | 03:05 | using that strategy.
| | 03:06 | You've got to think about your own
objective to determine whether or not you
| | 03:10 | want to shuffle the answers.
| | 03:12 | You can determine whether you want to show
the progress as the person's taking the quiz.
| | 03:17 | If you choose to Allow Backward
Movement, then the person who is taking the quiz
| | 03:21 | will be able to go back to previous
questions and change their answers.
| | 03:25 | In many cases we want to show
the score at the end of the quiz.
| | 03:29 | I'm going to turn that on now.
| | 03:32 | I can also allow the user to review
the quiz after they've completed it.
| | 03:36 | I'm going to turn off this option.
| | 03:39 | Based on what we see here,
my quiz is called Amaryllis Quiz.
| | 03:43 | Its Objective ID is AmaryllisQuiz.
| | 03:46 | Interaction ID of course, is AmaryllisQuiz.
| | 03:49 | I'm going to show my progress, I'm going
to allow backward movement and I'm going
| | 03:53 | to show the score at the end of the quiz.
| | 03:56 | Let's take a look at what is a passing score.
| | 03:59 | If 80% or more of the total points are
earned, then that is considered a passing
| | 04:05 | grade for this quiz.
| | 04:06 | I can adjust this number at will.
| | 04:09 | If I'm not scoring on a percentage basis,
then I could look for a total number of
| | 04:14 | points required to pass.
| | 04:16 | You'll have to determine for yourself
based on the quiz how you want to record
| | 04:20 | that scoring result.
| | 04:23 | If the person passes,
what do we want to happen next?
| | 04:26 | The actions that we have available here
are similar to those that we have when
| | 04:30 | we use buttons in Captivate.
| | 04:32 | We're not limited to simply
proceeding to the next slide.
| | 04:36 | You could also open a URL
and send the user to a website.
| | 04:40 | You could send some e-mail, you could
execute a JavaScript. There are many
| | 04:44 | things that you could do including nothing.
| | 04:47 | In this case I want to Continue,
because I'm going to include a final slide at
| | 04:52 | the end of the presentation
thanking them for taking the quiz.
| | 04:56 | If the person fails, I can allow a
number of retakes or give them the option to
| | 05:01 | take the quiz forever.
| | 05:03 | Your decision to limit the number of
attempts will be based on how you're going
| | 05:07 | to use the results of that quiz.
| | 05:10 | If the person fails, what
do we want to have happen?
| | 05:13 | You could send them back to the
beginning of the quiz to take it again.
| | 05:18 | In that case you'd use a Jump to slide
and perhaps go back to the training portion.
| | 05:23 | In this case if they failed, I might
want to send them back to slide number 3 to
| | 05:28 | have them review the video.
| | 05:31 | I'll choose Jump to slide
and choose slide number 3.
| | 05:38 | The last thing in this list
are the Default Labels.
| | 05:41 | I'm not going to make any
adjustments to the labels now, but I want to
| | 05:44 | expose them to you here.
| | 05:46 | You can adjust the style for each of
the labels and the text that appears on
| | 05:51 | them when they get created by the quiz manager.
| | 05:54 | Having set up my quiz I'm going to click OK.
| | 05:58 | You can see that my Quiz Properties
panel has opened on the right and that we
| | 06:03 | have a Quiz Results slide
that has been constructed.
| | 06:08 | The Quiz Results slide is
currently at position two.
| | 06:11 | I need to move it to the end of the slide deck.
| | 06:14 | Click-and-drag on slide 2 and
drag it to the bottom of the list.
| | 06:20 | Now the slide is at the end of the
project, which is where I need it to be.
| | 06:25 | Having now completed the setup of our
quiz, let's save this as Chapter 10_a.
| | 06:43 | Although it may seem tedious to have
spent all of that time setting up the quiz,
| | 06:46 | you're going to thank yourself later.
| | 06:48 | You don't want to be in a position where
you don't know where the information is
| | 06:52 | coming from when your users are taking the quiz.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding question types| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to
add some questions to our quiz.
| | 00:03 | Before we do that, I would like
to create a quizzing master slide.
| | 00:07 | From Window choose Master Slide.
| | 00:11 | There's currently one master slide.
| | 00:13 | Let's create another one.
| | 00:15 | Right-click and choose Insert > Master Slide.
| | 00:20 | Now we will insert an image
on this page. Insert > Image.
| | 00:28 | In your Exercise Files, in
Chapter 10/Project/Images, you'll find
| | 00:34 | HandPQuizBackground.png,
choose that and then click Open.
| | 00:41 | This will now build a background that
doesn't have the hansel & petal logo on it.
| | 00:45 | The hansel & petal logo does interfere
with some of the content that the quiz
| | 00:49 | manager will automatically build.
| | 00:51 | Let's scroll down to the end of the project now.
| | 00:54 | Select slider number 6, which is our Summary.
| | 00:58 | In the General Properties,
change the Master Slide from 1 to 2.
| | 01:03 | Now we will be able to see all of
the information that Captivate will
| | 01:06 | provide for our quizzes.
| | 01:08 | We are going to insert a few
questions after the quiz intro.
| | 01:11 | We are not going to explore every
type of question there is in this lesson.
| | 01:16 | We will look at some of the question
types that get used most frequently.
| | 01:20 | In the Quiz menu choose Question Slide.
| | 01:25 | From here, I can insert
one or more question slides.
| | 01:28 | I would like to include a Multiple
Choice question, a True/False question, a
| | 01:34 | Fill-In-The-Blank question
and a Rating Scale question.
| | 01:39 | The three questions at the top, the
Multiple Choice, the True/False and the
| | 01:43 | Fill-In-The-Blank, are all Graded questions.
| | 01:46 | You could change them to
Survey question if you like.
| | 01:49 | A Survey question is a question that
gathers information but doesn't count
| | 01:53 | against the user because
there's no right or wrong answer.
| | 01:56 | We are going to leave these
three as Graded questions.
| | 02:01 | You'll see that our Rating Scale
question is always a Survey question.
| | 02:06 | Click OK to insert these four questions.
| | 02:13 | Scroll down to see the four questions.
| | 02:18 | Select slider number 6 and in the Properties
panel let's change its Master Slide to Slide 2.
| | 02:25 | We can repeat this with
the other slides as well.
| | 02:35 | Return to Slide 6.
| | 02:38 | Captivate automatically names
each quiz question with the type of
| | 02:41 | question that's in use.
| | 02:43 | This is a multiple-choice question.
| | 02:45 | There are some details that we can
see and they are better seen in the
| | 02:48 | quizzing workspace.
| | 02:50 | Let's switch to the Quizzing workspace now.
| | 02:53 | Under Classic choose Quizzing.
| | 02:56 | Our Filmstrip is now along the
bottom as well as our Timeline.
| | 03:00 | Our Properties are on the right and
our Quiz Properties are on the left.
| | 03:04 | The Quiz Properties reflect the options
for the specific questions that we are
| | 03:08 | viewing at this time.
| | 03:10 | This is our Multiple Choice question.
| | 03:12 | Currently, it has two possible answers.
| | 03:15 | Let's increase the number of answers to three.
| | 03:19 | Type a 3 and hit Return.
| | 03:21 | You can see that automatically
Captivate has added an additional answer.
| | 03:26 | Let's see how we can now
configure the Multiple Choice question.
| | 03:29 | Select the "Type the question here"
question box, select all, and type
| | 03:36 | "An Amaryllis is what kind of plant?"
| | 03:48 | Hit Escape to end editing and spread that out.
| | 03:52 | I would like to include three possible answers.
| | 03:56 | The correct answer is bulb.
| | 03:58 | Select answer A, select all and type "bulb."
| | 04:05 | Go down the Choice B, click in there,
double click, select all and type evergreen.
| | 04:11 | We will do the same with C. Select it,
double-click, select all, and type fruit.
| | 04:21 | Hit Escape to end editing.
| | 04:23 | We determine the correct answer by
selecting the radio button next to
| | 04:27 | the correct answer.
| | 04:29 | If evergreen be the right answer,
I would click the radio button here and now
| | 04:33 | evergreen is chosen as the correct answer.
| | 04:35 | We all know based on what I said in the
video that an amaryllis is indeed a bulb.
| | 04:40 | Let's go on to the next question.
| | 04:45 | Scroll down in the Filmstrip and choose Slide 7.
| | 04:48 | We have a True/False question and
the question will be as follows.
| | 04:52 | Select the question, select all, and type
"Removing green foliage will harm the amaryllis."
| | 05:01 | Hit Escape to get out of editing.
| | 05:03 | What I would like to do now is to
move the True and False answers down.
| | 05:07 | I can select them both, click and drag down.
| | 05:15 | It turns out that removing the green
foliage will not harm the amaryllis.
| | 05:19 | So let's set that to False.
| | 05:22 | The last question is our
Fill-In-The-Blank question.
| | 05:27 | I'll leave this description as it is.
| | 05:29 | Double-click and type the following
phrase. "It is best to use sharp shears when
| | 05:38 | removing the foliage."
| | 05:42 | Select the word sharp and we will mark that
as the blank that we want people to fill in.
| | 05:48 | When the question is asked, there
will be a blank that the user will have
| | 05:51 | to type in the answer.
| | 05:53 | The correct answer is Sharp.
| | 05:56 | The last question is our Rating Scale.
| | 06:01 | In a Rating Scale you can
have multiple Survey questions.
| | 06:05 | I only want one Survey
question at this time but I could add
| | 06:09 | additional questions here.
| | 06:11 | I could also decrease the number of slots
that they will have to indicate a preference.
| | 06:15 | The default is 5.
| | 06:20 | Select the item and type
| | 06:24 | "I will use this information in my job."
| | 06:29 | Now we've made all the adjustments to our quiz.
| | 06:32 | Let's save our project as Chapter 10_b.
| | 06:43 | From the Filmstrip choose slide
number 5 and we will preview from here.
| | 06:58 | We need to click to Continue to the quiz.
| | 07:02 | An amaryllis is indeed a bulb.
| | 07:04 | I'll choose the correct answer.
| | 07:09 | I was correct. Click to continue.
| | 07:14 | Removing green foliage will harm the
amaryllis. I'll say true because I know
| | 07:19 | that's the wrong answer.
| | 07:21 | I want to see what the result is.
| | 07:26 | Oh! I was wrong. I'll continue.
| | 07:28 | I will complete the sentence
below by filling in the blank.
| | 07:34 | It's best to use kitchen shears when
removing the foliage. I'll Submit.
| | 07:41 | Oh! That was wrong too. Oh.
| | 07:44 | It supposed to be sharp. Ugh.
| | 07:46 | Better luck next time.
| | 07:49 | My last question is "I'll
use this information in my job."
| | 07:52 | Well, I somewhat agree that I'll use that
information in my job. Now I'll Submit.
| | 07:59 | It turns out that I didn't
do very well on this quiz.
| | 08:02 | I only got a third of it right, so I failed.
| | 08:05 | And that's the end of our quiz.
| | 08:09 | You can close this preview now.
| | 08:12 | While we have a quiz,
there is only a few questions in it.
| | 08:15 | We will add another specific type of
question, which is the custom short answer
| | 08:19 | question in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating custom short-answer questions| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to look
at a specific type of question called a
| | 00:03 | custom short-answer question.
| | 00:05 | We are going to be using the Chapter 10_b
file that we created earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:09 | If you don't have it open,
please open it now and switch to the
| | 00:12 | Quizzing workspace.
| | 00:14 | In the Filmstrip go down the slide number 8.
| | 00:17 | The question on this slide is
a Fill-In-The-Blank question.
| | 00:21 | In a Fill-In-The-Blank question the
student has to enter the exact phrase that
| | 00:25 | you've marked as a blank.
| | 00:27 | In many cases though you want some
flexibility as to what is correct when a
| | 00:31 | person fills in the blank.
| | 00:32 | For that reason we are going
to replace this with a custom
| | 00:35 | short-answer question.
| | 00:37 | Under Quiz choose Question Slide.
| | 00:40 | Now choose Short Answer and OK.
| | 00:46 | Our Short Answer question
has been indicated here.
| | 00:49 | We want that question to be
similar to what was in slide number 8.
| | 00:53 | Select the question,
double-click, and select all.
| | 00:57 | The question now should be please indicate
the type of shears we used in this training.
| | 01:04 | Hit Escape and extend to the box to the right.
| | 01:10 | Select the question area and move it down.
| | 01:14 | You'll notice that we can
now enter some correct entries.
| | 01:18 | Slide the view to the side and you
can see that we have a plus and minus to
| | 01:22 | add correct entries.
| | 01:26 | One correct answer would be "kitchen."
| | 01:31 | Let's add another correct answer.
| | 01:36 | That would be "sharp."
| | 01:39 | You could add additional correct answers.
| | 01:42 | This provides you with greater flexibility
than the Fill-In-The-Blank type of question.
| | 01:46 | Let's remove the Fill-In-The-Blank question now.
| | 01:50 | Select it and type the Delete key to delete it.
| | 01:57 | Let's return to slide number
5 and we'll preview our work.
| | 02:03 | Preview from this slide.
| | 02:11 | We'll click to continue to take the
quiz, and amaryllis is indeed a bulb.
| | 02:20 | I'll type Y to continue.
| | 02:23 | Removing green foliage will harm
the amaryllis? In this case, no.
| | 02:30 | I'll click to continue.
| | 02:34 | Lastly I'll indicate the type of
shears we used in the training.
| | 02:38 | I'll type "kitchen" and Submit.
| | 02:42 | That's correct, because it's one of the
two correct choices that we had created.
| | 02:48 | I'll answer this last question now.
| | 02:55 | Having answered to all of the three
graded questions correctly, my score is 100%
| | 03:00 | and I passed the test.
| | 03:02 | We can close our preview now
and then save as Chapter 10_c.
| | 03:16 | The custom short-answer question
provides you with much greater flexibility when
| | 03:20 | seeking direct feedback from your learner.
| | 03:22 | Use it in those cases when there could
be more than one response to a question.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Assessing software simulations| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to see
how we can adjust a software simulation
| | 00:03 | assessment that we had
recorded in an earlier chapter.
| | 00:07 | We are going to be using the contact_
assessment file that's located in your
| | 00:11 | Chapter 10 Project folder.
| | 00:13 | Open it now if you don't have it open.
| | 00:15 | Next, switch to the Quizzing
workspace and go to slide number 1.
| | 00:21 | Let's zoom out to show the entire stage.
| | 00:24 | We will use Command+0 or Ctrl+0 to do that.
| | 00:27 | When you build an assessment through a
software simulation recording, Captivate
| | 00:32 | is going to record all
the places where you click.
| | 00:35 | It's also going to provide a failure caption.
| | 00:39 | In addition it tags the click areas
that it builds to be part of a quiz.
| | 00:43 | Let's look at the Timeline.
| | 00:46 | In the Timeline you see a click box.
| | 00:48 | Select the click box and go down to Reporting.
| | 00:52 | This is in your Properties panel on the right.
| | 00:55 | Captivate has already identified this
click box as being something it needs
| | 00:58 | to include in a quiz.
| | 01:00 | When the user clicks on this box,
it will add 1 point to the total.
| | 01:05 | If you click in the wrong place,
Captivate will show this failure caption and
| | 01:10 | then it will continue.
| | 01:12 | Captivate will automatically
number the interaction IDs.
| | 01:15 | If you want a more meaningful name for that
interaction, then you will want to enter it here.
| | 01:21 | For this one let's call it name_click.
| | 01:25 | No spaces are allowed.
| | 01:28 | Hit Enter to commit the change.
| | 01:29 | We need to expand the click
box to cover the name area.
| | 01:33 | We'll zoom in so we can see it better.
| | 01:37 | Now we'll expand the click box.
| | 01:40 | Grab the corner and drag it
so it covers the name field.
| | 01:45 | The user expects that they should be
able to click anywhere within the name
| | 01:49 | field to be successful.
| | 01:51 | Another thing to note is that
assessments typically don't have hints.
| | 01:55 | Also, they typically
don't have success captions.
| | 01:58 | The expectation is if they've done the
correct thing then they will continue.
| | 02:03 | When we recorded this simulation,
we also recorded our voiceover.
| | 02:08 | If you don't want that audio track to
play during the assessment, then you'll
| | 02:12 | need to remove it at this stage.
| | 02:14 | You'll need to proceed through the
entire presentation and adjust all of the
| | 02:18 | click boxes so that they are of the right size.
| | 02:20 | You may also want to adjust the
failure captions so that they better reflect
| | 02:24 | what the user didn't do correctly.
| | 02:27 | Let's go back to the Filmstrip.
| | 02:29 | Let's look at slide number 2
and switch to the Timeline.
| | 02:33 | Slider number 2 has this Typing Text.
| | 02:37 | The typing text is prerecorded.
| | 02:39 | In the previous lesson we saw how we
could remove the typing text and replace it
| | 02:43 | with a text input area. Let's do that now.
| | 02:47 | We replace with text animation and
then we remove it with the Delete key.
| | 02:57 | We can now create a text entry box.
| | 03:01 | Move the text entry box down to the Name
field, drag it to the right, and we can
| | 03:07 | insert correct entries.
| | 03:09 | If you had a simulation that required
specific entries to be entered there, then
| | 03:13 | it would make sense to enter correct entries.
| | 03:16 | In this case any value is correct.
| | 03:18 | We can remove the Success,
Failure, and Hint captions.
| | 03:24 | We can also remove the button
and shut off text validation.
| | 03:32 | Going down to Reporting, you will see
that we cannot include it in the quiz
| | 03:37 | because we haven't turned on validation.
| | 03:40 | If we turn on validation, then we
can report this as a correct answer.
| | 03:44 | For this specific simulation we are not
looking for correct answers for these text areas.
| | 03:50 | We are looking for clicking in the
correct places, however, so we will
| | 03:53 | continue to score those.
| | 03:55 | I'll leave it to you to adjust the
remainder of the click boxes in this simulation.
| | 04:00 | The last thing we've got to do to make
this meaningful is to adjust our quiz
| | 04:04 | settings in the Preferences.
| | 04:06 | On a Macintosh these are
under the Captivate menu.
| | 04:09 | On a Windows computer
they are under the Edit menu.
| | 04:12 | Remember to give your quiz a
name that makes some sense.
| | 04:15 | In this case, we call it EmailQuiz.
| | 04:17 | We will also type in
EmailQuiz for the Objective ID.
| | 04:27 | In this case Pass or Fail would be
determined by a number of points.
| | 04:32 | Captivate tells us that there are nine
points to be earned in this assessment.
| | 04:36 | It's counted up all of those
click boxes and tells us the total.
| | 04:40 | Success may be 9 of 9.
| | 04:43 | So you can either type in 100% or 9 points.
| | 04:48 | You'll need to determine what the metrics
for Success for this type of assessment.
| | 04:52 | Click OK to close the Preferences.
| | 04:55 | Having made your adjustments,
let's save this as contact_assessment_a.
| | 05:06 | For making software simulation
assessments Captivate does the heavy lifting when
| | 05:11 | we record that simulation.
| | 05:13 | It doesn't mean that the job is done.
| | 05:15 | We've got to go back and ensure that
all of the areas that Captivate has
| | 05:18 | build for us automatically align with
what the user would expect in an actual simulation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Pooling and randomizing questions| 00:00 | Many times you want to create
assessments that include questions that come from
| | 00:04 | a pool of questions.
| | 00:05 | In that case the user will see some
questions from a larger group of questions
| | 00:11 | when they take the quiz.
| | 00:13 | We use pools to increase the fairness of a quiz.
| | 00:16 | Each learner is going to receive a
different set of questions, but they'll all
| | 00:20 | be from the same pool of questions.
| | 00:22 | It also allows a single learner to take
the same quiz more than one time because
| | 00:28 | they will seeing different
questions every time they take the quiz.
| | 00:31 | We will be using the Chapter 10_c file
that we developed earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:36 | If you don't have it open, please
open it now and then switch to the
| | 00:39 | Quizzing workspace.
| | 00:41 | In the Filmstrip navigate to slide 8.
| | 00:43 | I would like to insert a
pool of questions after slide 8.
| | 00:49 | Under Quiz go to the Question Pool Manager.
| | 00:54 | If I had an existing pool of questions
in another quiz, I could import them now
| | 00:59 | using Import Question Pools.
| | 01:01 | I am going to create a new
question pool, however, now.
| | 01:05 | Pool1 will be created automatically.
| | 01:07 | I create some new questions in
the pool by clicking the plus sign.
| | 01:12 | You can add any number of questions to the pool.
| | 01:15 | We will add a Multiple Choice, a
True/False, and a Matching question.
| | 01:21 | Each of these is going to be graded.
| | 01:23 | Having made those choices, click OK.
| | 01:27 | We see all three of the
questions are now listed in the pool.
| | 01:30 | Having added them to the pool I'll choose Close.
| | 01:33 | Now I can adjust the
questions that are inside of the pool.
| | 01:37 | You already know how to set up a
Multiple Choice and a True/False question.
| | 01:42 | These are questions 1 and 2.
| | 01:44 | Let's take a look at how we set up a
Matching question, which is question number 3.
| | 01:49 | Over under to the Quiz properties in
the General section you can see that you
| | 01:53 | can change the number of items
in the first and second columns.
| | 01:57 | The objective in a matching question is
to connect an item in the first column
| | 02:01 | with one or more items in the second column.
| | 02:04 | In order to get the questions correct,
you have to properly match up everything
| | 02:08 | from the left with everything on the right.
| | 02:10 | In many cases you may have more options on the
right than there are on the left. This is okay.
| | 02:16 | Let's type in some values here.
| | 02:18 | We will edit the items in Column 1.
| | 02:21 | Select the first item and select all.
| | 02:24 | Now type Cutting Implement and
Escape. Make that wider. Now it fits.
| | 02:36 | Click anywhere outside.
| | 02:37 | Now let's enter our second item.
| | 02:41 | I didn't want to move that so I'll undo,
then I will put it back, and I need to
| | 02:44 | shorten it by grabbing this
drag handle here. There we go.
| | 02:49 | I want the second item, double-
click to select it, select all.
| | 02:54 | This one, we'll call it amaryllis plant type.
| | 03:02 | Again, we will have to make it wider.
| | 03:04 | Hit Escape, make it wider,
and then reduce its height.
| | 03:10 | We'll remove the last item by
changing the number in Column 1 from 3 to 2.
| | 03:16 | Over in Column 2 we will
put in some possible answers.
| | 03:20 | For answer A we will double-click,
select all, type in bulb, and Escape.
| | 03:28 | For the second question double-click,
select all, type in kitchen shears.
| | 03:36 | And for the third one double-click,
selects all, type in airplane.
| | 03:43 | This is a completely wrong answer.
| | 03:45 | No one could possibly pick airplane.
| | 03:48 | We are putting it in there for illustration.
| | 03:50 | Now let's match up Column A with Column B.
The first question matches up with B.
| | 03:57 | Select the answer and
choose B. Do the same here.
| | 04:01 | It should be A. Now we are
done with this Matching question.
| | 04:06 | In reality you will most likely have many
more questions in Column 1 and in Column 2.
| | 04:12 | Now we have three
questions in our question pool.
| | 04:15 | We can add questions from
the pool to our quiz now.
| | 04:19 | Switch back to the Filmstrip.
| | 04:22 | You'll notice that no questions have been
added between Short Answer and Rating Scale.
| | 04:28 | We add pool questions by selecting
the slide after which we want the pool
| | 04:32 | questions to be added.
| | 04:34 | Then from the Quiz menu we
choose Random Question Slide.
| | 04:39 | This is going to be a random
question that's coming out of pool number 1.
| | 04:45 | It will pull any one of those
three questions to be inserted here.
| | 04:50 | To add another random question,
I would add an additional random question
| | 04:54 | slide from this pool.
| | 04:56 | In that case every time I took the quiz,
I would end up with two out of three questions.
| | 05:01 | Right now I'm going to get one of the
three questions at this point in my quiz.
| | 05:06 | Let's preview the result.
| | 05:10 | In the Filmstrip, choose slide
5 and then preview from here.
| | 05:21 | We click to continue and quickly
answer the questions. This is a bulb.
| | 05:31 | This will not harm the planet.
| | 05:38 | We used sharp shears.
| | 05:45 | Now here's our random question.
| | 05:48 | This time we got the multiple choice question.
| | 05:51 | We didn't fill in any of the
values for the multiple choice question.
| | 05:54 | I do know that the default
correct answer, however, is A.
| | 06:03 | Now we are looking back at
the Rating Scale question.
| | 06:09 | At the end of the day we answered
all four graded questions correctly.
| | 06:14 | The next time I took this quiz I am likely
to get a different question out of that pool.
| | 06:19 | We can close the preview
now and save as Chapter 10_d.
| | 06:23 | Of course, this quiz is incomplete.
| | 06:33 | It's going to require that you
go back and make some adjustments.
| | 06:36 | You need to actually come up with
some questions for the question pool and
| | 06:40 | adjust the background so that
it matches the other slides.
| | 06:43 | Question pools are a great way for you
to make your assessments fairer and to
| | 06:48 | allow users to be able to take that
assessment more than one time without
| | 06:52 | seeing the same quiz.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the new quiz features| 00:00 | One of the great new features in
Captivate 5.5 is its new quizzing engine.
| | 00:04 | While this may not be apparent to you
as you're designing a quiz, it will be
| | 00:07 | very apparent to the folks
who are taking your quizzes.
| | 00:10 | Let's take a look at what a quiz
looks like when it's been published
| | 00:13 | from Captivate 5.5.
| | 00:15 | This quiz is pre-built and in fact,
it's a quiz that came from the Captivate 5.
| | 00:20 | A very important thing to note is that
when you open a Captivate file from a
| | 00:24 | previous version and then you publish
from Captivate 5.5, the quizzes will take
| | 00:29 | on the new feature set.
| | 00:31 | Let's see what that looks like now.
| | 00:33 | Go ahead to slide number six
and then we'll preview from here.
| | 00:38 | An amaryllis happens to be a
bulb, so I'm going to choose bulb.
| | 00:42 | Previously in Captivate we have to click on
the radial button to the left of the answer.
| | 00:47 | Now you can click anywhere on the
answer and it's going to select that choice.
| | 00:51 | I know it's a bulb but I want
to choose the wrong answer.
| | 00:55 | Why will be apparent in a little while.
| | 00:57 | Let's choose Submit to go on.
| | 01:01 | Removing green foliage in
fact will not harm the amaryllis.
| | 01:04 | You can see I have the whole answer selectable.
| | 01:06 | I need to type a short answer, hmm!
| | 01:10 | I don't remember. How about Billy?
| | 01:14 | It's wrong. I know it's wrong.
| | 01:17 | This is a question from a question pool.
| | 01:20 | This answer happens to be true
I think, but I can't remember.
| | 01:24 | We'll just pick True and see what
happens. Looks like I got it right.
| | 01:26 | Then the last question is a rating scale
question, so we'll pick Somewhat Agree.
| | 01:31 | Now that we're at the end of the
quiz we're able to review the quiz.
| | 01:35 | Oh! I failed it.
| | 01:37 | Well, let's go Review and find out what
we did wrong, and this is another of the
| | 01:40 | great quiz features that's
built into Captivate 5.5.
| | 01:45 | Captivate veterans are
looking at this going, wow!
| | 01:49 | Where has this been all my life?
| | 01:51 | The correct answer is very
clearly indicated on this frame.
| | 01:55 | My choice, evergreen, was wrong so
have a red X next to my choice.
| | 01:59 | I know that I got the question wrong
because there's a giant red X to the upper
| | 02:03 | left-hand corner of the question.
| | 02:05 | If I get the question right,
I'll have the different indicator.
| | 02:08 | Here I got this question right,
so I see a great big checkbox.
| | 02:13 | This one I got wrong and it tells me the
correct answers are either kitchen or sharp.
| | 02:18 | Got that one right. And then lastly of
course, this is a rating scale so there
| | 02:22 | happens to be no correct
answer. And now we got to the end.
| | 02:26 | We haven't had to do anything
special to get these new features inside of
| | 02:30 | Captivate. They just happen
when you publish your quiz.
| | 02:34 | If you got existing quizzes from
previous versions, go ahead and open them in
| | 02:37 | Captivate 5.5 and then save those
quizzes to be able to take advantage of the
| | 02:42 | new features. Your learners
will appreciate that effort.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Utilizing the new quiz templates| 00:00 | Another thing that Adobe has included in
Captivate 5.5 are a number of quiz templates.
| | 00:05 | These are designed to help you get going
faster with quizzing and they provide a
| | 00:09 | nice baseline with some designs that
will make your quizzes that much more
| | 00:13 | interesting for your learners.
| | 00:15 | These quizzes can be found in the
Captivate 5.5 installation folder in the
| | 00:20 | Gallery folder and in the Quiz
folder and in the Templates folder.
| | 00:24 | You can see the path on a Macintosh right here.
| | 00:27 | It's a similar path on a Windows
computer. Just browse in your Program Files down
| | 00:32 | into the Adobe Captivate folder and
then choose Gallery/Quiz and Templates.
| | 00:37 | There are six templates that will
be installed with Captivate 5.5 and
| | 00:40 | they're indicated here.
| | 00:42 | I'm going to open up Clean_blue
and we'll see what that looks like.
| | 00:46 | Double-click it to open.
| | 00:48 | Let's zoom out so we can see the entire page.
| | 00:50 | Something that you'll notice immediately
is that this isn't actually a template.
| | 00:55 | This is an existing Captivate project. CPTX.
| | 00:58 | It is not a Captivate template file.
| | 01:01 | This means that you need to make
adjustments to this quiz and then save it to be
| | 01:05 | able to take advantage of it.
| | 01:07 | Another thing that you can do is
to copy and paste these slides onto
| | 01:11 | your existing projects.
| | 01:13 | You will need to move the master slide
as well, so just be aware that when you
| | 01:18 | move these questions over to your
project you will have to move the master slide
| | 01:22 | so that they will take on
the appropriate appearance.
| | 01:26 | In the Clean_blue example you can see
that there are pre-built designs for many
| | 01:30 | of the question types.
| | 01:32 | I've got multiple choice, true/false,
a fill in the blank area, a short answer
| | 01:38 | question, a matching question.
I also have a hotspot, a sequence, and then
| | 01:45 | there's my results page.
| | 01:47 | As you know there are some additional
question types, but this gives you the
| | 01:50 | ability to create a nice-looking
quiz that you can use right away.
| | 01:56 | In order to reuse these things, as I
said before you'll need to make adjustments
| | 02:01 | to this quiz file and then save
it to use it for your own purposes.
| | 02:05 | Of course, the first thing that you
should do is to go into the Quiz Properties
| | 02:09 | and then make adjustments there to make
it fit your learning management system.
| | 02:13 | These are what's going to be shown at
the end of the quiz and then of course in
| | 02:17 | the Preferences panel you'll find all
of the learning management hookups.
| | 02:22 | We cover that in another movie.
| | 02:24 | There's also an online
gallery of these quiz templates.
| | 02:27 | I'd like to show you where that gallery is now.
| | 02:30 | Under Quiz you'll see Download Quiz Templates.
| | 02:34 | This will open up your web browser
and take you to the Captivate 5.5
| | 02:38 | Quiz Templates page.
| | 02:39 | At the time of this recording
there are six templates available.
| | 02:43 | We've already looked at Clean Blue and
then the other choices are here.
| | 02:47 | There are four and then we'll
click and there's two more.
| | 02:50 | We do anticipate that these templates
will grow over time, so check back here
| | 02:55 | from time to time to see
updates to the quiz templates.
| | 02:58 | Since I already have these six templates
installed, I don't need to download any now,
| | 03:02 | so let's return to Captivate.
| | 03:05 | These templates are a great starting
point for you when you're building quizzes.
| | 03:09 | Of course, you can update and change
any of the art elements that are here to
| | 03:13 | match your branding.
| | 03:15 | Explore the other five templates on
your own and then start tuning them up
| | 03:19 | for your own use.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Managing AssessmentsManaging quizzes| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to
talk about managing our quiz results.
| | 00:03 | When we build a quiz in Captivate,
the objective usually isn't just to allow the
| | 00:08 | learner to take a quiz and see how they did.
| | 00:11 | We want to know after the fact
whether or not they were able to do the
| | 00:15 | assessment and get it right.
| | 00:17 | In order to do that, we've got to connect
the quiz to a learning management system.
| | 00:22 | That learning management system may be
something that you already own as part
| | 00:25 | of your HR department.
| | 00:27 | It may be something that you're
looking to purchase to be used in your HR
| | 00:31 | apartment, or if you're a smaller
company or an individual you may be looking
| | 00:35 | for a solution that doesn't
involve a large IT infrastructure.
| | 00:39 | In all cases a learning management
system is designed to capture results from
| | 00:44 | assessments and then organize them in
a way that makes it possible for you to
| | 00:48 | analyze after the fact.
| | 00:50 | When you're building your quiz in
Captivate it's important to ensure that all of
| | 00:54 | the quiz elements are properly identified.
| | 00:57 | This will make it much easier for you
to understand the results when you're
| | 01:01 | looking at those results in
your learning management system.
| | 01:04 | If you have multiple quizzes that you're
using, ensure that each one has a unique name.
| | 01:09 | Captivate will
automatically call each quiz Quiz.
| | 01:13 | This can get very confusing when you're
looking at 17 quizzes called Quiz in the
| | 01:17 | learning management system.
| | 01:18 | Once you've got your quiz properly
identified, then we can establish how we are
| | 01:22 | going to report those results to
the learning management system.
| | 01:25 | We'll look at that in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reporting results| 00:00 | In this lesson, we'll be setting up
quiz reporting in our Captivate project.
| | 00:03 | We'll be using the Chapter 11 file
that's located in your Chapter 11 folder in
| | 00:08 | your Exercises folder.
| | 00:10 | We use the Preferences
panel to set up quiz reporting.
| | 00:13 | We find the Preferences panel under the
Adobe Captivate menu on a Macintosh and
| | 00:17 | under the Edit menu on a Windows
computer. Because we have a project open,
| | 00:22 | we now have a Project Preferences
as well as the Quiz Preferences.
| | 00:28 | We need to look at the Quiz
Reporting preferences now.
| | 00:31 | Select it from the list.
| | 00:32 | At the top of the options, you'll
see Enable reporting for this project.
| | 00:36 | We need to turn that on in order to set
up the connections between this quiz and
| | 00:40 | our learning management system.
| | 00:42 | Captivate can talk to many different
kinds of learning management systems
| | 00:45 | and we've got to tell Captivate which type
of learning management system we're using.
| | 00:50 | Captivate's default behavior
is to use Acrobat Connect Pro.
| | 00:54 | Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro is an online
web conferencing and e-learning platform
| | 01:00 | that many companies use as
part of their e-learning strategy.
| | 01:04 | If you're using Connect,
your configuration is done.
| | 01:06 | All you've got to do is enable Adobe
Acrobat Connect Pro, determine what you're
| | 01:10 | going to report, and you're all set.
| | 01:13 | If you're using another type of system
then there may be additional setup options.
| | 01:17 | Related to Adobe Acrobat
Connect Pro is Acrobat.com.
| | 01:22 | That option is here and we'll be
looking at that in detail in a later lesson.
| | 01:26 | Acrobat.com is a free online service
that allows you to collaborate online.
| | 01:31 | It allows you to use Captivate and
collect reports from your quizzes.
| | 01:35 | It allows you to capture
review data from Acrobat.
| | 01:38 | There are a lot of things
that you can do with Acrobat.com.
| | 01:40 | Again, we'll look at that
in detail in a later lesson.
| | 01:44 | You could also collect the quiz results on
your own internal server, using this option here.
| | 01:49 | This requires some programming and
coding on your server and is beyond the
| | 01:53 | scope of this course.
| | 01:54 | You could also use email reporting.
| | 01:56 | If you enable email reporting then the
quiz will automatically send an email
| | 02:00 | to the address you specify here.
| | 02:02 | The results of the quiz will
be included in the message.
| | 02:05 | The last option and probably the
most widely used option is the top one.
| | 02:10 | This uses a standard method of
interchange between your quiz and your
| | 02:14 | learning management system.
| | 02:16 | Most learning management systems use
one of two methods to communicate between
| | 02:20 | the quiz and their learning management system.
| | 02:23 | Those are called SCORM or AICC.
| | 02:26 | Your learning management system
administrator will know which of these methods
| | 02:30 | is the right one for you and will be
able to help you to set up the connections.
| | 02:35 | There are a number of settings that
you'll need to choose correctly in order to
| | 02:38 | make the reporting work.
| | 02:40 | After you select your learning
management system, you've got to determine what's
| | 02:44 | going to be reported to that
learning management system.
| | 02:47 | You can report whether or not the user
completed the quiz or whether they passed the quiz.
| | 02:53 | I would like to know whether they passed it.
| | 02:55 | I could also determine whether I'm
reporting the raw score or a percentage to
| | 03:00 | the learning management system.
| | 03:01 | I don't always know what the score means
so I'll take a percentage in this case.
| | 03:06 | I can also determine how much or how
little data I am going to be sending to the
| | 03:10 | learning management system.
| | 03:12 | I can make those choices here.
| | 03:14 | I can send as little as whether the
user opened the program and used it and as
| | 03:19 | much as all of the interactions
that they had with that program.
| | 03:23 | If I leave Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro as
my report data choice, I'm going to get
| | 03:27 | the most information that I
can get out of the program.
| | 03:31 | Lastly, I can determine whether
I'm reporting just the scores or the
| | 03:35 | Interactions that the user had
with the quiz and the scores.
| | 03:40 | This could include places that they clicked.
| | 03:42 | It could include whether or not they saw
certain slides and other types of information.
| | 03:47 | If your learning management system
requires additional configuration, then your
| | 03:51 | system administrator will have you
use the panel behind this button.
| | 03:54 | We are not going to take a look at
that right now but at least you know where
| | 03:57 | that is when your administrator
tells you, "Open the LMS Customization
| | 04:01 | Settings," you'll say aha!
| | 04:02 | I know right where that is.
| | 04:03 | For now we're going to select
Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro as our
| | 04:07 | learning management system.
| | 04:09 | Later on in the chapter we'll
set up reporting to Acrobat.com.
| | 04:13 | Having enabled Acrobat Connect Pro as
my learning management system, I'm going
| | 04:17 | to choose OK and save my project.
| | 04:21 | We'll call it Chapter 11_a.
| | 04:27 | Having set up the connection between
this quiz and our learning management system,
| | 04:31 | after we publish the quiz,
the learner results will get reported to our
| | 04:35 | learning management system.
| | 04:36 | We are well on our way to
understanding how well or how poorly our learners
| | 04:40 | have done on our quiz.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Acrobat.com as a learning management system| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to enable
Acrobat.com reporting for this quiz.
| | 00:04 | We are going to be using the Chapter
11_a file that we built in an earlier
| | 00:08 | part of this chapter.
| | 00:09 | Please open it now if you
don't have it open already.
| | 00:12 | In order to enable our reporting
to Acrobat.com, we've got to go to
| | 00:16 | the Preferences panel.
| | 00:17 | The Preferences panel is located under
the Adobe Captivate menu, on a Macintosh,
| | 00:22 | or under the Edit menu on a Windows computer.
| | 00:25 | Please select Quiz >
Reporting from the category list.
| | 00:29 | Next, we need to enable Acrobat.com reporting.
| | 00:32 | I would like to know whether the
student passed or failed the quiz.
| | 00:37 | So I'll make this change now, and then
we'll configure our connection to Acrobat.com.
| | 00:43 | If you're going to use Acrobat.com as
your learning management system you must
| | 00:48 | take this configuration step.
| | 00:50 | In order to store your results in
Acrobat.com, you need to have an Adobe ID.
| | 00:56 | You can create an Adobe ID now by
clicking this button right here.
| | 01:01 | I happen to have an Adobe ID already but I
would like to show you what that form looks like.
| | 01:07 | When you go to Acrobat.com, you
need to create your Free Account.
| | 01:11 | You can do that by clicking this
link here or the link up in the upper
| | 01:15 | right-hand corner of the window.
| | 01:18 | Your Adobe ID must be a valid email address.
| | 01:22 | Acrobat.com will send an email
to that address to validate it.
| | 01:26 | So you need to be able to
access it so that you can access your
| | 01:29 | Acrobat.com account.
| | 01:30 | You'll need to enter a password as well.
| | 01:33 | Your first and last names are used
to identify you when you use your
| | 01:36 | Acrobat.com account for things like
reviewing or commenting or forms data collection.
| | 01:42 | You need to enter your birth date as well as
the region where you're going to be operating.
| | 01:47 | If you don't like to receive
communications from Adobe you can simply disable
| | 01:51 | the "I would like to
receive email communications."
| | 01:54 | Once you've entered that
information click Sign Up and you'll get the
| | 01:57 | confirmation e-mail.
| | 01:59 | I've already set up my account so
I'm going to go back to Captivate and
| | 02:03 | continue the process.
| | 02:05 | I'll enter my Adobe ID now, and my password.
| | 02:14 | Next, I the need to identify this
quiz and how it fits within my company's
| | 02:19 | learning management strategy.
| | 02:21 | For whom has this quiz been built?
| | 02:24 | In this case, it's the
company called Hansel & Petal.
| | 02:30 | Secondly, which department in Hansel
& Petal is responsible for the quiz?
| | 02:35 | In this case, it's the HR department.
| | 02:39 | Lastly, to what course does this quiz belong?
| | 02:42 | In this case, it's Amaryllis.
| | 02:46 | It could, however, be part of a
larger program, which could involve
| | 02:50 | many different flowers.
| | 02:52 | Courses often involve multiple components.
| | 02:55 | In this case, however, this
course is strictly about the Amaryllis.
| | 02:59 | Once I've got all of that
information entered, I can click Save.
| | 03:04 | Acrobat.com will now build all of
the infrastructure for reporting.
| | 03:09 | If I already have the infrastructure in
place, then it will be a very quick connection.
| | 03:14 | Once this is done, I'll click
OK to save the configuration.
| | 03:19 | Having made those changes,
now I need to save my file.
| | 03:22 | Under the File menu,
Save As. We'll call it 11_b.
| | 03:33 | Acrobat.com is not an enterprise-
level learning management system.
| | 03:37 | Nonetheless, it represents a very
handy way for you to quickly create a quiz,
| | 03:42 | get it published, and gather information,
without involving your IT department.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Getting reports from Acrobat.com| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to see
how we can publish our results from
| | 00:02 | our quizzes to Acrobat.com and then see
those results using the Quiz Results Analyzer.
| | 00:09 | In order for your projects to talk
to Acrobat.com you need to publish it.
| | 00:14 | In addition, you need to publish it to either
a standalone application or to a web server.
| | 00:21 | We'll talk about the details of
publishing your project to a web server and to a
| | 00:27 | standalone application in another chapter.
| | 00:30 | I've included the standalone
applications in the quiz apps folder in
| | 00:34 | your Chapter 11 folder.
| | 00:36 | There is a Macintosh version called
Chapter 11_b, which is right here, and there
| | 00:41 | is a Windows version called Chapter 11_b.exe.
| | 00:45 | If you're following along on a
Windows computer feel free to open the
| | 00:48 | Chapter 11_b.exe file.
| | 00:51 | I'll be looking at the Macintosh version.
| | 00:56 | When you double-click the
application it will begin to play the quiz.
| | 01:00 | Everything that we've built into
that quiz is contained into this
| | 01:03 | self-running application.
| | 01:05 | I'll continue onto the next slide.
| | 01:08 | I know that what's coming up next is the video.
| | 01:11 | I don't need to see the video
so I'm going to skip over it.
| | 01:14 | But I do need to start the
video in order to skip it.
| | 01:17 | (Male speaker: I'm going to talk about?)
| | 01:23 | There is one.
| | 01:25 | (Male speaker: I want to?)
| | 01:28 | And we're past it.
| | 01:29 | Now we'll proceed to the quiz.
| | 01:32 | An amaryllis is what kind of plant?
| | 01:34 | Well, that would be a bulb.
| | 01:41 | This will not harm the plant.
| | 01:48 | At this point I'm going to
enter a known wrong answer.
| | 01:52 | I'm going to answer this with the word white.
| | 01:57 | I know that's incorrect. That's all right.
| | 01:59 | I did this for a reason.
| | 02:04 | Now I need to match Column 1 and Column 2.
| | 02:06 | This is our random quiz question. You
may not be seeing the same question that
| | 02:11 | I'm seeing right now.
| | 02:12 | Remember, there are three
questions in the random pool.
| | 02:16 | A cutting implement are kitchen shears,
so I can simply drag kitchen shears on
| | 02:20 | top of cutting implement click-
and-drag and an amaryllis is a bulb.
| | 02:32 | I will use this information in my job.
| | 02:36 | Now I finished the quiz.
| | 02:38 | In order to post the result to Acrobat
.com, your learner needs to click the
| | 02:42 | Post Result button.
| | 02:44 | You may want to include that instruction
as either a text caption or as a voiceover.
| | 02:49 | I'll leave that to you to decide.
| | 02:52 | You need to enter your own
Acrobat.com credentials here. This will enable
| | 02:57 | the learning management system to match up
the learner with the results appropriately.
| | 03:02 | Your learner should not be entering the
ID of the person who created the quiz.
| | 03:08 | They should be using their own ID.
| | 03:14 | Our results have now been calculated and
they're ready to be sent to Acrobat.com.
| | 03:18 | I'll click Send to post them.
| | 03:21 | Now they have been posted to Acrobat.com.
| | 03:23 | Now, I failed the quiz.
| | 03:26 | When I click Continue I'll be taken back to
the video so that I can review that content.
| | 03:31 | I don't want to see the video now.
| | 03:33 | Instead I want to see my results.
| | 03:35 | To view my results I need to use the
Adobe Captivate Quiz Results Analyzer.
| | 03:40 | This application is located in your
Adobe folder in your Program Files folder on
| | 03:45 | a Windows computer or in your
Applications folder on a Macintosh.
| | 03:49 | If you want to follow along with me,
using your results you can open it now.
| | 03:53 | Just know that I'm going to log in with
my account to see the results from my quiz.
| | 03:58 | You won't be able to do that.
| | 03:59 | You can log in with your credentials to
see the results from your own quizzes.
| | 04:04 | Choose Acrobat.com as
the Source and click Sign in.
| | 04:08 | I'm using the credentials of
the person who created the quiz.
| | 04:13 | This is how Acrobat.com is going to
identify you as the person who can see the
| | 04:17 | results of this quiz.
| | 04:20 | Once I sign in I'm able
to generate some reports.
| | 04:23 | First of all I can see all of the
organizations for whom I have built quizzes.
| | 04:28 | In this case there is one, hansel & petal.
| | 04:31 | I could also see all of the
departments within hansel & petal for which
| | 04:35 | quizzes have been built.
| | 04:37 | Currently the HR department is
the only one using our services.
| | 04:40 | Lastly, I'll see all of the courses
that I will have identified in my quizzes.
| | 04:45 | Currently there is one.
| | 04:46 | It's the Amaryllis course.
| | 04:48 | Let's generate a report now.
| | 04:51 | There are new learner results and of course
I just published them, so there should be.
| | 04:55 | Yes, I would like to download them.
| | 04:58 | You can see that this reports two lessons.
| | 05:00 | The Chapter 11_b lesson is the one that is
being reported through the use of a web page.
| | 05:05 | The ProjectorApp is the one
that's being reported through that
| | 05:09 | desktop application.
| | 05:10 | This allows me to see exactly how
people are getting at those quizzes.
| | 05:15 | Let's take a look at the
results from the ProjectorApp.
| | 05:17 | It says that 2 students have taken the
quiz. One has passed and one is failed.
| | 05:23 | Double-click the ProjectorApp
to see the data for that lesson.
| | 05:27 | Looking at the results I can see
that Captivate Training has failed.
| | 05:31 | I also can see that they've taken this
quiz twice and they still are failing.
| | 05:36 | James Lockman, on the other hand,
he is pretty sharp. He passed it.
| | 05:40 | Double-click Captivate Training
to see Captivate Trainings results.
| | 05:45 | I can see how he answered each of the questions.
| | 05:48 | I can see the incorrect answer where
the student answered white, where we were
| | 05:52 | looking for kitchen and sharp.
| | 05:54 | If I want to save these results to a
comma separated file or to print them,
| | 05:58 | I could do that by using these buttons
up here. This is my Print button and
| | 06:02 | this will save as a CSV file.
| | 06:05 | I can configure how these reports are displayed.
| | 06:07 | Click on the wrench to enable or
disable columns in the reports.
| | 06:15 | You can switch between learners
by using this drop-down menu here.
| | 06:19 | As more and more learners take
the quiz, you can quickly go to the
| | 06:22 | individual's results.
| | 06:24 | Selecting James Lockman, I can see that on
this question he actually answered it correctly.
| | 06:31 | You can also use this crumb trail
to navigate to different reports.
| | 06:37 | If you'd like to download all of the
learner results as individual XML files,
| | 06:41 | you could do that by using this
button here, Download to disk.
| | 06:45 | You need to be in the Course view
however to take advantage of that.
| | 06:49 | Also within the Course view, you
could remove a course from Acrobat.com by
| | 06:53 | clicking this Delete from Acrobat.com button.
| | 06:57 | When you're finished viewing
your results you can sign out.
| | 07:01 | Using the Quiz Results Analyzer you
can sign in under multiple accounts.
| | 07:05 | You simply need to log out and then
log back in to see different results.
| | 07:08 | While using Acrobat.com as a learning
management system is not as robust as
| | 07:14 | using an enterprise level system,
| | 07:15 | it can be very effective.
| | 07:18 | Using Captivate and Acrobat.com
together makes it possible for you very quickly
| | 07:22 | to publish a quiz and gather results.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Generating SCORM-compliant output| 00:00 | In this lesson, we will see how we
can configure our project to talk to a
| | 00:03 | SCORM-compliant learning management system.
| | 00:05 | We will be using the Chapter 11_b file
that we developed earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:10 | We are going to use the Preferences panel.
| | 00:12 | This is available under the Adobe
Captivate menu on a Macintosh computer and
| | 00:15 | under the Edit menu on a Windows computer.
| | 00:18 | Once in the Preferences panel,
go to the Quiz Reporting category.
| | 00:22 | Switch your learning management system to SCORM.
| | 00:24 | SCORM is a standard method of
data interchange that's used by many
| | 00:29 | learning management systems.
| | 00:31 | In order for this to work correctly,
you have to make adjustments to the manifest.
| | 00:36 | In here, you will enter information
regarding the course and the objectives.
| | 00:40 | Most likely you will get this
information from your administrator.
| | 00:43 | You need to identify the Course,
provide a Title, perhaps even a Description.
| | 00:47 | In many cases, the description is
searchable on the learning management system.
| | 00:51 | If the course changes over time, you
will want to include the version number, so
| | 00:56 | that users can see the
different versions of the course.
| | 00:59 | If there's a specified duration, then
you will need to enter that here as well.
| | 01:03 | Under the objective area, you can
limit the amount of time that a user will
| | 01:07 | have to take the test.
| | 01:09 | Once again, you will want to talk to
your administrator to determine exactly
| | 01:12 | what these settings will be for your company.
| | 01:15 | Once you have the course
information entered, then you can click OK.
| | 01:20 | Having made that change,
let's click OK and save our project.
| | 01:24 | We will save as 11_c.
| | 01:35 | Many learning management systems use
SCORM as their standard interchange format.
| | 01:39 | If your learning management system
uses SCORM you will need to set up the
| | 01:43 | manifest appropriately, so that
your content will talk to the system
| | 01:46 | appropriately and you'll be able to
analyze the results after the fact.
| | 01:50 | You most likely have to have a
conversation with your administrator to ensure
| | 01:54 | that you've got the right
information in the right place.
| | 01:57 | Once you've done that, you'll be able
to safely publish your content to your
| | 02:00 | SCORM-compliant learning management system.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating assessment templates| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to
create an assessment template.
| | 00:03 | We are going to modify an existing
template that we built in an earlier chapter
| | 00:07 | to include assessment slides.
| | 00:09 | Let's open that file now.
| | 00:13 | Open the file called Chapter 11.cptl.
| | 00:20 | This file already has a welcome slide, a
video slide, and a recording slide placeholder.
| | 00:27 | Our assessments that we will build,
will probably have the welcome slide and
| | 00:31 | then either the recording or the video.
| | 00:34 | Having both of these in place
gives you some flexibility later.
| | 00:37 | If you don't need the recording
slide, well, you can just delete it.
| | 00:40 | If you don't need the video,
you can do the same thing.
| | 00:43 | I would like to add some
question slides now to this project.
| | 00:47 | We can do it by simply
inserting new placeholder slides.
| | 00:50 | Right-click on slider number 3 and
then choose Insert > Placeholder Slides >
| | 00:55 | Question Slide Placeholder.
| | 00:58 | You'll see that there's a key command there.
| | 00:59 | On the Macintosh it's Option+Q.
This is one of those key commands you will
| | 01:03 | probably want to remember.
| | 01:05 | We will insert that
Questions Slide Placeholder now.
| | 01:08 | I would like to insert four more and
I'll use my keyboard command to do it.
| | 01:13 | Option+Q, Option+Q, Option+Q and
Option+Q. Now I have five question slides that
| | 01:21 | follow the simulation recording and the video.
| | 01:25 | I also need to create a master
slide for those question slides.
| | 01:29 | Switch to the master slide view if you
don't have it available in the Timeline.
| | 01:33 | You can get the Master Slide view under
the Window menu and choose Master Slide.
| | 01:39 | From the Master Slide view, right-
click and choose Insert > Master Slide.
| | 01:45 | We now need the background
to go on to the master slide.
| | 01:49 | We could choose Insert Image but I
would like to use the Library to do that.
| | 01:53 | Switch to the Library panel, select
the Images folder, and then we'll import
| | 01:59 | into the Images folder.
| | 02:03 | In your Chapter 11 folder in the Images folder,
you'll see HandPQuizBackground.png. Select that now.
| | 02:13 | This is now been added to the Library.
| | 02:16 | We can drag it on to the stage to
complete our master slide. Select and drag.
| | 02:23 | Now we have our quiz master slide and
our normal presentation master slide.
| | 02:28 | Having made these changes,
let's save the project.
| | 02:31 | We are going to call this Chapter 11_d.cptl.
| | 02:37 | It's important that you do not
change the extension of this file.
| | 02:46 | Having created this file, now I can save
myself some time when I'm creating new assessments.
| | 02:52 | All I need to do is to create a new
project from this template and I have got my
| | 02:56 | slides in place, my simulation
recording in place, and my video to be able to
| | 03:00 | build my new training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. Customizing the Project InterfaceIntroducing skins| 00:00 | An important aspect of the Captivate project
is how the user interfaces with the project.
| | 00:05 | We can control that interface
using what are called skins.
| | 00:09 | Skins include a number of aspects of the
way that the user interfaces with the project.
| | 00:14 | These might include aspects
like your playback control.
| | 00:17 | It could include various buttons on
that control itself and the colors that are
| | 00:22 | used to display those controls.
| | 00:24 | In addition, we can control whether or
not borders exist and what they look like.
| | 00:29 | Lastly, we use the Skin Editor to
create what are known as tables of contents.
| | 00:34 | Once we've created a skin for our
project, we can then save that skin and then
| | 00:38 | reuse it in other projects.
| | 00:41 | Adjusting the project skin is an easy
way for you to brand your project so that
| | 00:46 | it's recognizable when people use it.
| | 00:48 | We will see how we can make
changes to the skin in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing playback controls| 00:00 | Something that we do frequently with
Captivate is to adjust the playback controls.
| | 00:04 | We do this using the Skin Editor.
| | 00:06 | Please open the file called Chapter 12_a.
| | 00:08 | It's located in your
project file in the Chapter 12 folder.
| | 00:12 | Once you have got it open,
switch to the Classic workspace.
| | 00:16 | Under your Project menu choose Skin Editor.
| | 00:21 | You may need to move it up so that
you can see all of the Skin Editor.
| | 00:24 | The Skin Editor shows you a preview of
your project on the right and on the left
| | 00:29 | you can see the various controls.
| | 00:31 | There are a number of checkboxes that
you can use to enable and disable various
| | 00:34 | functions in the playback control.
| | 00:37 | If for instance you didn't want the
playback control, then you could simply disable it.
| | 00:42 | Your project would now look like that.
| | 00:44 | You'll see that there's a border on
the bottom and we can adjust what
| | 00:47 | border exists as well.
| | 00:49 | This middle button controls the borders.
| | 00:52 | If you would like a top border,
then you can turn on the Top Border.
| | 00:55 | Now your project will
have a top and bottom border.
| | 00:58 | You can change the color of
that border to perhaps meet your
| | 01:01 | branding requirements.
| | 01:03 | Select the color now.
| | 01:05 | we can use our eyedropper to
pick a color from the project.
| | 01:09 | Select the eyedropper and click near
the upper left-hand corner of the slide.
| | 01:15 | That will now pick that color from the
gradient and apply it to the top and the
| | 01:18 | bottom of the slide.
| | 01:20 | Let's return to the playback controls.
| | 01:23 | I want my user to be able to see the playback
controls when they're watching the presentation.
| | 01:28 | I'll re-enable it now.
| | 01:30 | I don't want my user to be able to
fast forward through the presentation,
| | 01:34 | however, and so I will disable Fast Forward.
| | 01:39 | I also want them to listen to the
music and the audio in the video portion
| | 01:43 | of our presentation.
| | 01:44 | I will disable the Mute button.
| | 01:47 | I do want the closed captioning.
| | 01:49 | I can adjust my closed captioning
settings by clicking this button here.
| | 01:54 | We have seen that in an earlier lesson.
| | 01:56 | I can adjust the colors of
the playback controls as well.
| | 02:01 | Enable Playback Colors to adjust these colors.
| | 02:04 | I would like my button glow to match
the color that I've chosen for my borders.
| | 02:09 | Select Button Glow.
| | 02:11 | Use the eyedropper and then click
in the bar at the top of the screen.
| | 02:17 | When I hover over any of the buttons now,
now the glow is the same color as the border.
| | 02:23 | If I enable the Playbar Overlay, then
that will move the playbar up into the
| | 02:27 | presentation window itself.
| | 02:29 | This can be disruptive, so
I'm going to turn it off.
| | 02:33 | The last thing that we will
look at is this Playbar menu.
| | 02:36 | In it you can choose from a number of
pre-build playbars that Adobe is made
| | 02:40 | available inside of Captivate.
| | 02:42 | You can explore these options on your own.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to leave the
playbar as the Captivate Default.
| | 02:48 | Having made these changes to my
skin, I would like to save my skin.
| | 02:52 | Click the disk icon to save the skin.
| | 02:55 | Let's call this "h and p" and then click OK.
| | 03:02 | We can now use this skin in other presentations.
| | 03:06 | Having made the changes
let's close the Skin Editor.
| | 03:11 | Let's preview the project to see the changes.
| | 03:16 | (Recording: Welcome to the hansel & petal virtual
flower show. Enjoy the flowers and the music.)
| | 03:23 | You can see that the top bar has been
added now and at the bottom we have the
| | 03:28 | controls that we had established.
| | 03:30 | When I hover over these areas,
they are the appropriate color.
| | 03:34 | Let's close the preview and
we will save this as Chapter 12_b.
| | 03:46 | Use the Skin Editor to create a skin
that allows people to identify your
| | 03:50 | projects as coming from your company.
| | 03:53 | Branding is important.
| | 03:55 | Skins are a way for you to extend
your brand into the projects that you
| | 03:59 | build with Captivate.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a table of contents| 00:00 | In many projects, it's helpful to
have a table of contents that viewers can
| | 00:03 | scroll through and choose specific slides.
| | 00:06 | We can build that in
Captivate using the Skin Editor.
| | 00:09 | We are going to be using
the file called Chapter 12_b.
| | 00:13 | We created that file earlier in the chapter.
| | 00:16 | Please open it now if you
don't have it open already.
| | 00:18 | Once you have it open,
take a look at the Filmstrip.
| | 00:22 | You can see that each of the
slides in the project has a name.
| | 00:26 | As you scroll down you can see Welcome,
various bouquets by name, and then at
| | 00:31 | the bottom we have the Video
Introduction and Pruning Instructions.
| | 00:36 | If you plan to build a table of
contents, it's important to name your slides.
| | 00:41 | If you don't name your slides then
Captivate is going to automatically name your
| | 00:44 | slide with the slide number.
| | 00:46 | That's usually not very
informative for your viewer.
| | 00:49 | Let's see how we can
create a table of contents now.
| | 00:52 | From the Project menu, choose the Skin Editor.
| | 00:57 | On the right-hand side of your
buttons you'll see Table of Contents.
| | 01:01 | If you enable the Table of Contents,
it's going to show all of the slides that
| | 01:05 | will be in the Table of Contents.
| | 01:07 | If you look in the Preview, on the right,
you can see that the table of contents
| | 01:11 | has appeared to the left of our presentation.
| | 01:14 | From this panel, I can turn on and off
various slides in the table of contents.
| | 01:20 | If I don't want people to have access
to the Pruning Instructions individually,
| | 01:25 | I can remove it from the table
of contents by disabling it here.
| | 01:29 | Having made that change, that slide
will disappear from the table of contents.
| | 01:34 | By disabling the Pruning Instructions,
we are ensuring that viewers will go to
| | 01:37 | the Video Introduction before
they see the Pruning Instructions.
| | 01:41 | Having enabled the table of contents in
our skin, let's close the Skin Editor.
| | 01:46 | We can also access the table of contents from
the Project menu by choosing Table of Contents.
| | 01:53 | In either case, there are some
additional adjustments that we can make to the
| | 01:56 | table of contents through
the Settings panel here.
| | 02:00 | Click on this button to open the
Settings panel. You can see that there are a
| | 02:03 | number of options here for
personalizing the way table of contents looks.
| | 02:07 | I want to call your attention to the
item at the very top, which is the Style.
| | 02:12 | We'll move the Settings out of the
way so that we can see the change.
| | 02:16 | Switch the Style from Separate to Overlay.
| | 02:19 | Now you can see that the table of
contents is going to pop out of the
| | 02:23 | presentation on the left.
| | 02:25 | I can change its position from left to right.
| | 02:28 | Let's keep this change and
then we'll preview the results.
| | 02:31 | We'll close the Skin
Editor now. Preview the project.
| | 02:41 | (Recording: Welcome to the hansel & petal virtual
flower show. Enjoy the flowers and the music.)
| | 02:48 | You can see in the upper left-hand
corner, we've got a little double arrow
| | 02:51 | pointing to the right.
| | 02:53 | If we click it, this will
open the table of contents.
| | 02:57 | From it, we can choose specific slides.
| | 03:00 | Let's go to the Lily bouquet.
| | 03:02 | (Music playing)
| | 03:17 | We'll pause here and take a
look at the table of contents.
| | 03:21 | It's telling us that we viewed certain slides.
| | 03:25 | In addition to providing navigation, the
table of contents also helps us to keep
| | 03:29 | track of which slides we've already viewed.
| | 03:31 | If there are slides that we happen to like
or want to go back to, we can attach a star.
| | 03:36 | Attach a star to the Fuji Mum
Bouquet by selecting it here.
| | 03:41 | That might remind us to
go back and see it later.
| | 03:44 | Let's close the preview now and
then save this as Chapter 12 _c.
| | 03:57 | A table of contents is a great way for
you to enable additional navigational
| | 04:01 | controls for your users.
| | 04:03 | In addition, it provides an ability
for the user to know which slides they
| | 04:07 | viewed and perhaps even to mark slides
for review or slides that they enjoy a lot.
| | 04:13 | When appropriate, give your users
that control by enabling the table of contents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. Reviewing Your ProjectInitiating a project review| 00:00 | In this chapter, we are going to see how we
can use Captivate's built-in review mechanism.
| | 00:04 | It allows us to send our Captivate projects to
reviewers who can then comment on those projects.
| | 00:10 | When they're finished, they can send
those comments back to us and those
| | 00:13 | comments appear directly in
the Timeline in Captivate.
| | 00:16 | We're going to be using the Chapter 13
file that's in your project folder in the
| | 00:22 | Chapter 13 folder in your Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:25 | If you don't have it open now,
please open it and go to slide number one.
| | 00:30 | I'd like to send this file off
to be reviewed by a reviewer.
| | 00:34 | I'm going to use Captivate's built
-in review mechanism to do this.
| | 00:38 | Under the File menu, choose
Collaborate and Send for Shared Review.
| | 00:45 | I'm going to use the
Acrobat.com service to host the review.
| | 00:50 | I could use my own internal server but
that might require some help from IT.
| | 00:55 | I'm going to avoid that by using Acrobat.com.
| | 00:59 | Having made that choice,
I'll click Next to continue.
| | 01:03 | I need to log in to Acrobat.com.
| | 01:05 | Using this screen, I'll enter the
Adobe ID of the account I want to use to be
| | 01:10 | the Owner of the review.
| | 01:19 | If I don't have an Adobe ID, I can create
an Adobe ID by clicking on that link there.
| | 01:25 | Once I have that Adobe ID,
I can enter it into these fields.
| | 01:28 | Having done so, I'll click Sign In.
| | 01:32 | Now I need to enter the email
addresses of one or more people that I want to
| | 01:36 | review this project.
| | 01:37 | Captivate will take my project,
package it up and send it as a .crev file.
| | 01:43 | That CREV file needs to be opened in
the Adobe Captivate Reviewer application.
| | 01:48 | The Adobe Captivate Reviewer
application gets installed when you install
| | 01:52 | Captivate. However, your
reviewers may not have Captivate.
| | 01:57 | A link is included in the e-mail
that will allow them to go and get the
| | 02:00 | Reviewer application.
| | 02:02 | It's a free application
built on Adobe's AIR technology.
| | 02:06 | I'm going to invite myself to this review.
| | 02:08 | So I'll move my e-mail address
from the Cc line up to the To line.
| | 02:15 | Just cut and paste.
| | 02:17 | In a real-world situation, you'll want
to include the email addresses of the
| | 02:21 | people that you want to review the content.
| | 02:23 | Those people will also need
to have Acrobat.com accounts.
| | 02:28 | Having entered the e-mail address of
the reviewer, I'll send the email.
| | 02:33 | Captivate is now constructing this CREV
file and will push it up to Acrobat.com.
| | 02:39 | In addition, it's connecting your project
to the data that's living on Acrobat.com.
| | 02:44 | That will allow you to bring the
comments back into the project and see them
| | 02:48 | directly on the Timeline.
| | 02:50 | Depending on the size of your project, it
may take some time to upload your CREV file.
| | 02:55 | The CREV file has now
been built and has been sent.
| | 02:59 | Let's go check my email.
| | 03:01 | There is my email right there.
| | 03:04 | In it is a link to the file that's
stored on Acrobat.com. I'll click the
| | 03:08 | link to go and get it.
| | 03:11 | I need to download the
file to be able to view it.
| | 03:14 | I'm going to download it
to the Chapter 13 folder.
| | 03:19 | You need to pick the location
that you want to save the file.
| | 03:31 | Now that we've completed the
download, let's go and open that file with
| | 03:34 | the Captivate reviewer.
| | 03:37 | You can click OK to close that window.
| | 03:40 | It's safe to close this browser window now.
| | 03:43 | In my Chapter 13 folder, there is now
my project file and this review file.
| | 03:49 | Having downloaded the CREV file from
Acrobat.com, we're now ready to actually
| | 03:54 | put some comments on to this file.
| | 03:57 | We'll do that in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reviewing a project| 00:00 | Now that we've sent our file off to our
reviewer, it's time to go and fetch that file.
| | 00:04 | We begin the process by looking in our
email, and I've sent myself an email
| | 00:08 | so I'll switch to that email message now.
| | 00:11 | Here's the email that I
received from Acrobat.com.
| | 00:14 | You can see a link to the Chapter
13 CREV file and the link to the
| | 00:19 | Captivate Reviewer.
| | 00:20 | When you're sending these files to
colleagues or customers, just remind them
| | 00:24 | that before they download that CREV
file they're going to want to get the
| | 00:28 | Reviewer application.
| | 00:30 | Here's an important piece of
information for you though about the
| | 00:32 | Reviewer application.
| | 00:34 | The Reviewer application has some
issues on the Macintosh platform.
| | 00:38 | This has to do with the way that the
AIR platform maintains security when it's
| | 00:43 | running as an application.
| | 00:45 | In order to fix the problem, you
need to use the Terminal application and
| | 00:48 | enter some commands.
| | 00:50 | I've created an entry on my
blog that tells you how to do this.
| | 00:54 | My blog is located at
www.jameslockman.com/jamesblog.
| | 01:02 | Once you're there, search for
Captivate review and you'll find the entry.
| | 01:07 | Windows users should be able to proceed.
| | 01:10 | If you do find that you have
permission problems on your Windows machine then
| | 01:13 | you may need to run the
application as the Administrator.
| | 01:17 | Let's go fetch the review file now so that
we can see how to add comments to our project.
| | 01:24 | The file needs to be downloaded
to my computer in order to be used.
| | 01:28 | I'll download it now.
| | 01:38 | We'll save the CREV file
here in our Chapter 13 folder.
| | 01:43 | Now that we have the file,
we can close our browser.
| | 01:49 | In my Chapter 13 folder, you'll see
that now the CREV file has appeared.
| | 01:52 | It has a different icon.
| | 01:54 | It looks like there might be
a little talk bubble there.
| | 01:57 | That's the indication
that this is for commenting.
| | 02:00 | We can open it by double-clicking it.
| | 02:02 | Remember, in order to open this
file, you need to have the Captivate
| | 02:05 | Reviewer installed.
| | 02:07 | Your customer or your colleague, if they
don't have Captivate installed, they can get
| | 02:11 | that from the link in the email.
| | 02:15 | When you first open the Captivate
Reviewer, you'll need to identify yourself.
| | 02:19 | I've already opened it, but I'll show you
where that option is after we log into Acrobat.com.
| | 02:25 | If you're opening it for the first time,
please enter your name and your email
| | 02:30 | address, which will
identify you in the Reviewer.
| | 02:33 | It will not log you into Acrobat.com.
| | 02:36 | After you've taken that step then you can log
into Acrobat.com using your own credentials.
| | 02:42 | Do not use the credentials of
the person who created the review.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to login now as the
person to whom I sent this review.
| | 02:50 | It happens to be me.
| | 02:56 | When I click the Play button
my project will begin to play.
| | 03:00 | While it's playing, I can pause it and then
add comments at that point in the Timeline.
| | 03:06 | Let's click Play and we'll see what I mean.
| | 03:10 | Now I am at the point in the project
where I am supposed to enter my name.
| | 03:14 | I don't like the default name so I'm going
to suggest that we change the default name.
| | 03:19 | I move my mouse down on top of the
play head and you'll see that I get a plus
| | 03:24 | sign that pops up. Click the
plus sign to add a comment.
| | 03:33 | We need a new default name.
| | 03:35 | To finish I need to click Add.
| | 03:39 | This comment has now been added to the Timeline.
| | 03:41 | I'll type in my name and
continue viewing the project.
| | 03:50 | As I hover over the areas in the file,
you'll see that I'm getting actual
| | 03:54 | behavior like I would get if
I were to publish the project.
| | 03:57 | I'm viewing a fully
published project in the Reviewer.
| | 04:01 | There is the highlight over there.
| | 04:04 | Let's go and take a look at the displays.
| | 04:09 | When I hover over, I can
see that the bulbs appear.
| | 04:13 | But they disappear too quickly.
| | 04:14 | I'd like to note that as a comment.
| | 04:17 | Again, move my cursor down onto the play
bar, click plus, and I'll add a comment.
| | 04:29 | We'll take a look at the gifts page.
| | 04:36 | I can see those highlights
but I'd like to re-order them.
| | 04:39 | If I move my play head backwards I can
see how time progresses on the slide.
| | 04:45 | I want to talk specifically
about this highlight area.
| | 04:49 | I'll add another comment.
| | 04:57 | Shift this highlight to the center box.
| | 05:00 | So I have got three
comments that I'm going to publish.
| | 05:03 | I know that I've made a spelling
mistake so let's correct that in my comment.
| | 05:07 | I can view my entire comments
list by clicking on this button here.
| | 05:13 | I want to spell the word "highlight" correctly.
| | 05:16 | Because I created the comment I can
make adjustments to it. If another person
| | 05:21 | had entered this comment, I
would not be able to change it.
| | 05:26 | Now it's spelled correctly.
| | 05:28 | You can see that in the comment list I
have the time that the comment was added
| | 05:32 | as well as the person who added it.
| | 05:35 | If I want to have a conversation with
another reviewer, I could click Reply and
| | 05:39 | then enter my comment to their comment.
| | 05:42 | Let's publish our comments and now.
| | 05:45 | We do this by saving.
| | 05:48 | Now those comments have been saved.
| | 05:51 | In the next lesson we'll go back to
Captivate and see how we can view those
| | 05:54 | comments directly in the
Timeline of our project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Collecting reviewer comments| 00:00 | In the previous lesson we created some
comments and then published them using
| | 00:03 | the Captivate Reviewer.
| | 00:05 | In this lesson we're going to see how we
can bring those comments into Captivate
| | 00:09 | and see them directly in our project's Timeline.
| | 00:12 | Review the comments in the Comment panel.
| | 00:15 | Under Window choose Comments.
| | 00:18 | Because I sent this file for shared
review I have some options along the bottom.
| | 00:24 | The first thing that we need to do is
to fetch the comments from the server.
| | 00:28 | I do that by clicking Refresh Comments.
| | 00:32 | I need to enter my Adobe ID to be
able to go and get the comments.
| | 00:36 | This is the Adobe ID of the
person who initiated the review.
| | 00:40 | I know that in this lesson both the
reviewer and the person who initiated the
| | 00:45 | review are the same person.
| | 00:47 | In real life that won't be the case.
| | 00:54 | Now my comments appear in my comment list.
| | 00:56 | These of the comments that are coming
from the other reviewer and I know their
| | 01:00 | email address and I can
see the comments directly.
| | 01:03 | If I select the comment, I get
taken to it in the timeline.
| | 01:08 | You can see that right here on
the timeline. There is a dot and it
| | 01:11 | highlights that comment.
| | 01:12 | Let's choose a different comment.
| | 01:15 | This takes me directly to the slide
and the point in the timeline where the
| | 01:19 | comment is. If I want to understand the
context of the comment, all I've got to
| | 01:24 | do is to drag my playhead to
that point in the timeline.
| | 01:30 | As I hit the comment, you can see that
it will highlight and snap to the comment.
| | 01:34 | I'll make the timeline bigger,
so that we can see that better.
| | 01:41 | There my timeline has snapped to the comment.
| | 01:45 | I could also have a
conversation with these comments.
| | 01:48 | Any review process is a workflow.
| | 01:51 | It usually involves specific steps.
| | 01:54 | A reviewer makes a comment.
| | 01:56 | That comment goes to the
person who created the content.
| | 02:00 | That person may accept or reject the
comment or perhaps another person such as
| | 02:05 | an editor will do that.
| | 02:07 | That part of the workflow is
also incorporated into Captivate.
| | 02:12 | You can see that I have some buttons along
the bottom that enable this type of behavior.
| | 02:17 | As the editor I could accept this
comment by clicking the Accept button here.
| | 02:23 | I can also add an additional comment
that goes along with that acceptance.
| | 02:33 | That acceptance shows up
as a reply to the comment.
| | 02:36 | However, they'll also get the
indication that the comment was accepted.
| | 02:41 | We'll reject this one.
| | 02:43 | I select it and I'll reject it.
| | 02:54 | It's on the screen too long already.
| | 02:57 | Now that I've made some adjustments
to the comment list, I'll save the
| | 03:00 | comments back to the server.
| | 03:03 | Remember as the person who's receiving
the comments I won't have the authority
| | 03:07 | to make any changes to those comments.
| | 03:10 | Now that I've saved those comments
let's go back to the Captivate Reviewer and
| | 03:14 | we'll see what the result is there.
| | 03:17 | I'm now in the Captivate Reviewer and
I'd like to refresh my comment list.
| | 03:22 | Click on the Refresh Comments button.
| | 03:24 | Any comment that's been added since I
last opened this file will now be added
| | 03:28 | to the reviewer file.
| | 03:30 | Let's view all the comments now.
| | 03:33 | You can see that this one was accepted.
| | 03:36 | The author said Accepted.
| | 03:38 | I agree and we'll do it, and
you see a nice green checkmark.
| | 03:41 | This one on the other hand was
rejected and we see the reason why.
| | 03:44 | This establishes a very clear and
understandable workflow between the person
| | 03:48 | who's using Captivate to create this
content and the person who's going to be
| | 03:53 | using the content downstream.
| | 03:55 | That could be an editor.
| | 03:56 | It could be a student.
| | 03:57 | It could be your customer.
| | 03:58 | It could be a colleague.
| | 04:00 | They don't have to know anything about
Captivate to be able to participate in
| | 04:04 | this review process.
| | 04:06 | When the reviewer's finish
reviewing all they got to do is to quit the
| | 04:09 | Captivate Reviewer.
| | 04:10 | If they have comments that they've
made that they haven't saved, they will be
| | 04:13 | warned to publish those
comments before they quit.
| | 04:17 | Going back to Captivate, let's save our file.
| | 04:20 | We'll save it as Chapter 13_b.
| | 04:30 | I hope you'll agree that the review
workflow that's been enabled in Captivate 5
| | 04:34 | is much easier than we've seen
in earlier versions of Captivate.
| | 04:38 | We don't have to print out pages and
send the sheets of the different states of
| | 04:42 | the application and hope that people
will understand what the interactivity
| | 04:46 | means by looking at sheets of paper.
| | 04:48 | We don't have to create PDFs that emulate that
sheet of paper and don't have any interactivity.
| | 04:53 | This way we have the complete
application with all of the interactive
| | 04:57 | elements on the timeline.
| | 04:59 | This enables everyone to quickly
understand and participate in the review workflow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Publishing Your ProjectSecuring a project| 00:00 | In this lesson we'll see how we
can add some password protection to
| | 00:03 | our Captivate project.
| | 00:04 | We're going to use the Chapter 14
store file that's located in your Project
| | 00:09 | folder in your Chapter 14 folder
in your Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:13 | Please open that now.
| | 00:15 | In order to provide password protection
we need to build a slide that forces the
| | 00:19 | user to enter a value.
| | 00:21 | We're going to validate that
value against a known password.
| | 00:25 | If the user enters the right password,
then they'll be able to see the rest
| | 00:28 | of the presentation.
| | 00:29 | If the user enters the incorrect
password, then he will bypass the presentation
| | 00:34 | altogether and go right to the end.
| | 00:36 | Let's see how we do that now.
| | 00:38 | Right-click on the Home slide
and choose Insert > New Slide.
| | 00:43 | Click-and-drag Slide 2 before
Slide 1 to reorder the slides.
| | 00:50 | We'll call slide number one Password.
| | 00:53 | In the Properties panel click
on Label and type in Password.
| | 00:58 | Hit Enter to commit.
| | 01:00 | Go down to the bottom of the presentation.
| | 01:02 | After Slide 5 we'll insert one more slide.
| | 01:06 | Right-click on Slide 5.
Choose Insert > New Slide.
| | 01:11 | We'll call this slide Sorry.
| | 01:16 | On this slide we'll enter a text caption.
| | 01:19 | Please type W"e're sorry.
| | 01:20 | You need to enter the correct
password to view the presentation."
| | 01:26 | You can stylize that later if you wish.
| | 01:29 | Let's go back to slide number one.
| | 01:32 | On slide number one we need
to insert a text entry box.
| | 01:36 | This text entry box is the
place where we enter our password.
| | 01:40 | In order to compare the entry to a
password we need to enable validation.
| | 01:45 | In our Properties panel, scroll to the top.
| | 01:48 | You'll see Validate User
Input has already been checked.
| | 01:52 | If you've changed your defaults
you may not see Validate User Input.
| | 01:56 | You need to turn that on now.
| | 01:58 | Let's enter a password. Click on the plus
sign on correct entries and enter our password.
| | 02:05 | We'll make it very simple.
| | 02:06 | We'll call it Password.
| | 02:08 | You'll probably want to make
something a little more challenging than that.
| | 02:14 | If you would like it to be case-
sensitive, you can enable Case-Sensitive here.
| | 02:18 | Now I have my correct entry and
let's look at some of the other features.
| | 02:22 | Captivate has built captions for me.
| | 02:25 | I don't need a success caption.
| | 02:27 | I'd like to keep my failure
caption and my hint caption.
| | 02:31 | Select the text entry box again.
| | 02:34 | Scroll down in the Properties panel
and we'll turn off the success caption.
| | 02:40 | Next we'll expand the size of the text
entry box by dragging the drag handle on
| | 02:44 | the center left to the left.
| | 02:49 | Click somewhere in this
open space to deselect it.
| | 02:52 | For the failure caption type
"Please enter a correct password."
| | 03:02 | For the hint caption, type "Enter a password."
| | 03:10 | Select all of these elements and
we'll drag them to the right a little bit.
| | 03:18 | Now we need a text caption on the
top that says "Please enter a password."
| | 03:21 | Hit the Escape to cancel editing and
we'll move it up above the password field.
| | 03:32 | The last thing that we need to do
is to control what happens when the
| | 03:35 | user enters a password.
| | 03:37 | This we do in the action
area of the text entry box.
| | 03:40 | Select the text entry box now.
| | 03:44 | You'll see the action area here.
| | 03:46 | On success, we will Continue.
| | 03:48 | If I allow infinite attempts, then the
user will be able to try passwords forever.
| | 03:52 | I'd like to limit the attempts to 3.
| | 03:55 | Shut off Infinite and change
the number of Attempts to 3.
| | 04:01 | On the last attempt I'd like to go
directly to the end of the presentation.
| | 04:06 | Choose Jump to slide and
select 6 Sorry from the list.
| | 04:14 | We've just built some simple
password security into our project.
| | 04:17 | Unfortunately, the user will be able
to bypass the security if they have
| | 04:22 | access to the playbar.
| | 04:23 | We need to adjust the skin to
remove some parts of the playbar.
| | 04:27 | Under Project choose Skin Editor.
| | 04:31 | We'll allow the Rewind and Play, but we
don't want Forward, Back, or Fast Forward.
| | 04:38 | The play bar now does not enable
the user to be able to navigate the
| | 04:42 | presentation on their own.
| | 04:44 | They've got to enter the password in
order to pass this slide and enter the rest
| | 04:49 | of the presentation.
| | 04:50 | Having made this change,
let's close the Skin Editor.
| | 04:56 | Now we'll preview the project.
| | 05:02 | I need to enter a password in order to continue.
| | 05:05 | I'll try a known bad
password. That is incorrect.
| | 05:18 | That is also incorrect.
| | 05:19 | I know the correct response is Password.
| | 05:21 | I'm going to enter an incorrect
response so that you can see what happens
| | 05:25 | after the third attempt.
| | 05:30 | I haven't entered the correct password,
so I'm immediately taken to the end
| | 05:33 | of the presentation.
| | 05:35 | The combination of simple password
protection and the adjustments that I made to
| | 05:38 | the skin make it possible to
protect my content and my presentation.
| | 05:43 | Let's close the preview and save the project.
| | 05:50 | We'll call it Chapter 14 store_a.
| | 06:00 | Since this is a password field you may
choose to tell Captivate that this field
| | 06:04 | is indeed a password field.
| | 06:06 | If you do that then any text that gets entered
in the field will be masked in the characters.
| | 06:11 | While this isn't exactly bank level
security, it does at least provide you with
| | 06:16 | some basic means of protecting your content.
| | 06:19 | Remember you need the text entry box
with validation and a means of bypassing
| | 06:23 | the rest of the presentation, which
means a destination slide at the end.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Rescaling a project| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to see how we
can rescale our project to a different size.
| | 00:04 | Many times we have projects that we've
built to a certain screen size and we
| | 00:08 | want to adjust that project
to a different screen size.
| | 00:11 | If I do this manually, it can be
quite tedious, because I've got to go and
| | 00:14 | select all of the content
and then adjust it manually.
| | 00:18 | I can do this automatically, however,
using a function called Rescale Project
| | 00:22 | that's part of Captivate.
| | 00:23 | We'll be using the Chapter 14 store_a
file that we created earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:29 | If you don't have it open, please open it now.
| | 00:32 | Choose Modify and Rescale Project.
| | 00:34 | The Rescale Project panel allows
us to change the dimensions of our
| | 00:39 | Captivate projects.
| | 00:41 | We can enter values directly
here or a scaling percentage here.
| | 00:47 | Typically we want to maintain the
aspect ratio but that's not always the case.
| | 00:52 | If I'm moving from one screen size to
another and one is a widescreen format and
| | 00:56 | one is a standard format, then
obviously there will be some discrepancy.
| | 01:01 | I also have some preset sizes that are
popular screen sizes and popular window
| | 01:06 | sizes for different types of eLearning content.
| | 01:10 | I'm going to resize this project to 640x480.
| | 01:12 | When I make my choice about scaling, I'll
see one or the other of these two options here.
| | 01:20 | On the left, we control what
happens when our stage grows.
| | 01:24 | The default option is to rescale all of
the content to fit the new size and that
| | 01:28 | means that things will get stretched out.
| | 01:30 | Alternatively, I could keep the
project to same size, which means all of my
| | 01:34 | objects will just stay as they
are, and then the stage will grow.
| | 01:38 | At that point I'll tell Captivate
where I want to keep my content when it
| | 01:41 | stretches out the stage,
leaving all the content behind.
| | 01:45 | In this case, however,
we're going to be shrinking.
| | 01:47 | I'd like Captivate to rescale
the project to fit the new size.
| | 01:51 | I wanted to rescale all of the elements in my
project so that it looks the same but smaller.
| | 01:57 | Alternatively, I could choose to crop it.
| | 01:59 | If I choose to crop then I'll
loose information that might be on the
| | 02:02 | outside edges of my slides.
| | 02:05 | I'll stick with Rescale Project to Fit New Size.
| | 02:07 | Having made these choices,
click Finish to rescale the project.
| | 02:11 | Watch what happens on my stage and in
my filmstrip. You'll be warned that the
| | 02:17 | operation can't be undone.
| | 02:18 | I do want to continue.
| | 02:25 | If you watched what happens there,
Captivate first adjusted the dimensions of
| | 02:29 | the project and then it went back and
scaled all of the content without you
| | 02:33 | having to go and do it manually.
| | 02:35 | This is a very fast way for you to take
your existing content and then turn it
| | 02:39 | into different sized projects that
can be used on different screens.
| | 02:43 | Let's save this project
now as Chapter 14 store_b.
| | 02:54 | The Rescale Project function is a great
way for you to take existing content and
| | 02:58 | resize it for different screens.
| | 03:01 | As more and more of us are building
content that we'll play on mobile devices,
| | 03:04 | it's important to be able to reduce the
size of our projects while maintaining
| | 03:08 | the fidelity of the project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing a project| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to look at how
we can share a project using Acrobat.com.
| | 00:05 | We're going to be using the Chapter 14 store_b
file that we developed earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:11 | If you don't have it open, please open it now.
| | 00:14 | I'd like to share this file with another person.
| | 00:17 | I could pack it all up, burn
it on a DVD and mail it to them.
| | 00:21 | I could try to get all the pieces
together and put it on an FTP site and hope
| | 00:25 | that they can find it, or I could use
Acrobat.com and let Captivate do all the heavy lifting.
| | 00:30 | Let's take option 3.
| | 00:32 | From the File menu choose
Collaborate and Share Files on Acrobat.com.
| | 00:40 | You need to have an Adobe ID in
order to share files on Acrobat.com.
| | 00:44 | If you don't have an Adobe ID you can
create one now by clicking this link here.
| | 00:50 | I have an Adobe ID and so
I'm going to use it now.
| | 01:02 | Click Sign In to sign into Acrobat.com.
| | 01:05 | Captivate automatically picks the name of
the file to be the same as your project.
| | 01:10 | This makes good sense and
makes it easy to find later.
| | 01:13 | You can determine what you want to publish now.
| | 01:15 | You can upload a SWF file, a PDF file, the
Captivate file, or any combination of the three.
| | 01:22 | Right now, I'd like to upload a
Captivate file and a PDF file.
| | 01:28 | In addition, I'm going to zip those
two things together to build a single
| | 01:31 | package that's easy to download later.
| | 01:34 | Having made those choices,
we'll move on by clicking Next.
| | 01:38 | I need someone that I'm
going to send this file to.
| | 01:41 | Right now I'm going to send it to myself.
| | 01:43 | So I'll move my email address
from the Cc line up to the To line.
| | 01:50 | Captivate automatically builds an email for you.
| | 01:53 | You can change the message by
typing any message you want here.
| | 01:56 | Captivate will automatically put a
link to the file in the email message
| | 02:00 | regardless of what you type.
| | 02:02 | I'm satisfied with this brief
message, so I'll click Send.
| | 02:07 | If my project is not in a saved
state, it will ask me to save.
| | 02:11 | I indeed do want to save
before I publish the project.
| | 02:15 | The publishing process can take a little bit
of time depending on the size of your project.
| | 02:19 | It can also be dependent on the
type of file that you're publishing.
| | 02:22 | In this case, you're publishing a
PDF as well as our Captivate file, so
| | 02:26 | Captivate must build that PDF and
then inject it up into Acrobat.com.
| | 02:31 | Captivate is now completed the process
of uploading our files to Acrobat.com.
| | 02:37 | That email message that was sent
contains a link to the file which means it's
| | 02:40 | very easy to simply click
on the link and get the file.
| | 02:44 | Let's save our project
now as Chapter 14 store_c.
| | 02:55 | Sharing files using Acrobat.com is a
convenient way for you to collaborate with
| | 02:59 | other people outside of your network.
| | 03:02 | In addition, you can use it to share a
PDF file or SWF file without having to
| | 03:07 | share the original Captivate file.
| | 03:09 | That's great flexibility when
collaborating with other people.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Publishing a project| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to see how
we can publish our Captivate projects.
| | 00:03 | We'll be using a file called Chapter 14 quiz.
| | 00:06 | This is located in your Project
folder, in your Chapter 14 folder, in your
| | 00:10 | Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:12 | Please open it now.
| | 00:14 | Most people publish their
Captivate projects to SWF.
| | 00:16 | But having been said, there are
several other methods that you can use to
| | 00:20 | publish your Captivate projects.
| | 00:22 | We'll look at a few of those right now.
| | 00:24 | From the File menu, choose Publish Settings.
| | 00:30 | We need to establish some information
about the project before we publish it.
| | 00:34 | First of all, we need to determine
what exactly we're going to publish.
| | 00:38 | Secondly, we need to determine whether we
want to externalize some of those resources.
| | 00:42 | If we Externalize Resources, it allows
a programmer after the fact to change
| | 00:47 | those resources, so that the project
can be modified without having to open the
| | 00:51 | project again in Captivate.
| | 00:53 | It's a very interesting workflow
that's used by a lot of companies.
| | 00:57 | If you're publishing to Connect Pro,
you'll probably want to enable the Acrobat
| | 01:01 | Connect Pro metadata.
| | 01:03 | If you're not publishing to Connect
Pro, then you can leave this unchecked.
| | 01:07 | For the most part, we want to
include all of these are options.
| | 01:11 | If you have stereo audio and it's
important that it remains stereo audio, then
| | 01:15 | you may want to disable this option here.
| | 01:18 | I don't want to externalize any of the
resources, so I'm not going to enable
| | 01:22 | any of these options.
| | 01:23 | You may want to talk to your IT
department to figure out which if any of these
| | 01:27 | options that like to have set.
| | 01:29 | Let's look at the Project > Information next.
| | 01:33 | By default, there is nothing in here.
| | 01:35 | You need to fill this in
with information about you.
| | 01:38 | You need to do this, so that you can
be properly identified in a Table of
| | 01:41 | Contents panel or in any
metadata that resides in the project.
| | 01:47 | I've entered three pieces of
information to identify me.
| | 01:50 | The author's name, the company, and the
email address where you can reach me.
| | 01:54 | The Website, I'm going to remove.
| | 01:56 | Copyright I'm going to set at 2010.
| | 01:59 | The Project Name is the Amaryllis Training.
| | 02:06 | Under the Description, I'm going to
type hansel and petal Amaryllis Training.
| | 02:09 | Of course, your information is
going to be different than this.
| | 02:19 | You may want a longer
more descriptive description.
| | 02:23 | In many cases, content management
systems will scrub through this information to
| | 02:27 | help categorize the
projects that you're publishing.
| | 02:29 | Let's look at the SWF Size
and Quality settings now.
| | 02:33 | If there was Full Motion Recording in this
presentation, then you could compress it here.
| | 02:38 | Full Motion Recording happens
automatically when Captivate is doing
| | 02:42 | simulation recording.
| | 02:44 | In this case, we don't have any
simulation recording so it doesn't matter.
| | 02:48 | There are adjustments that you can make
here to control the quality of your output.
| | 02:53 | In the Properties panel,
I'm looking at slide number one.
| | 02:56 | Here is slide number 1, and
there is my Properties panel.
| | 02:59 | Look at the quality of the slide.
| | 03:01 | It says Low (8-bit).
| | 03:03 | Each slide in the project can
have different quality settings.
| | 03:07 | I can override the quality
settings for each individual slide by
| | 03:10 | deselecting this option here.
| | 03:13 | Now I can consistently control
the quality of the entire project.
| | 03:18 | I can choose Low or High quality output.
| | 03:22 | I can control how the bitmap files are
going to be built, and I can also control
| | 03:26 | the JPEG compression.
| | 03:27 | Alternatively, I could use this slider to
pick Low, Medium, and High quality output.
| | 03:33 | The higher the quality of the output
the larger the size of the project.
| | 03:37 | Do be considerate of bandwidth.
| | 03:39 | If you have a lot of people downloading
and you don't have a lot of bandwidth on
| | 03:42 | your server, you probably don't
want to set this at High quality.
| | 03:46 | Let's look at Start and End.
| | 03:48 | You can choose a preloader file that
might have been provided by your IT
| | 03:52 | department, or you could create one in Flash.
| | 03:55 | I don't have one so I
am going to turn that off.
| | 03:59 | I am going to allow my
project to Auto Play however.
| | 04:02 | We could password protect our project here.
| | 04:05 | This is different than the password
protection that we built in an earlier lesson.
| | 04:09 | In that case, we built some
logic to protect the project.
| | 04:13 | This password protection is different
in that once the user enters the correct
| | 04:18 | password, they'll have access
to the entirety of the project.
| | 04:22 | You can also establish an
expiration date for the project.
| | 04:25 | If the project tries to open after
that expiration date, then you display a
| | 04:30 | message and the project won't open.
| | 04:33 | The default behavior is to Fade In on the
First Slide and Fade Out on the Last Slide.
| | 04:39 | If you'd like to disable these
options, this is where you do that.
| | 04:42 | Lastly, what happens when the project ends?
| | 04:46 | The normal behavior is to stop.
| | 04:48 | If this were at a kiosk,
you may want to loop it.
| | 04:51 | In other situations, you may choose to close
it or maybe open a URL and go to a website.
| | 04:57 | You can set those options here.
| | 05:00 | Once you've set those options, we'll
click OK so that we can proceed to
| | 05:03 | actually publishing the project.
| | 05:06 | From the File menu, choose Publish.
| | 05:12 | You can see down the left-hand side,
there are a number of methods that can be
| | 05:15 | used to publish your project.
| | 05:17 | By far, the most common is to use SWF.
| | 05:20 | You can enter a project title, and
then browse to a folder where you want
| | 05:24 | this project to go.
| | 05:26 | You can determine exactly what's
going to be published at the same time.
| | 05:30 | You can create a PDF file
to write along with the SWF.
| | 05:34 | You can also export an HTML file
that can be viewed in a web browser to
| | 05:39 | display the content.
| | 05:40 | An important thing to know is that if
you publish to HTML and then try to view
| | 05:45 | your content in a web browser from
that folder, you're likely to run into
| | 05:50 | security considerations with Flash.
| | 05:52 | For best results, you'll want to
publish to a Web folder, which could be on a
| | 05:57 | Web server outside of your computer,
or it could be on the internal Web
| | 06:01 | server in your computer.
| | 06:03 | You could also create an Autorun file For a CD.
| | 06:07 | If you put this file on a CD for
instance and you want it to run when you put
| | 06:10 | the CD in, that would do that for you.
| | 06:13 | You can select Acrobat.com, and
enter your server information.
| | 06:18 | Here, you'd add the URL to the server
where you'd want to publish the content.
| | 06:23 | We're not actually going to show how
to publish to Connect. Just know that
| | 06:27 | your options are here, and in order to
connect to a server, you need to enter the URL.
| | 06:32 | Once you do that, you'll be taken
into the wizard and you can follow
| | 06:35 | the instructions there.
| | 06:38 | Other people might choose to
use FTP to produce their projects.
| | 06:42 | Using FTP is almost the
same as publishing to SWF.
| | 06:46 | In this case, however, the expectation
is that you'll be publishing to a server
| | 06:50 | that's external to your computer.
| | 06:52 | That server may also be a web server.
| | 06:55 | In this case, you'll need to set up the
destination servers, which you can do here.
| | 07:02 | You can add the details of the FTP
server by entering its name, the directory
| | 07:06 | where you want to publish it,
and the login credentials.
| | 07:11 | You'll need to get that
information from your system administrator.
| | 07:14 | Once you enter it, you can choose it
in the Server menu, and then test your
| | 07:17 | settings to ensure that
you'll be able to publish.
| | 07:20 | The last method we'll look at
right now is the Media method.
| | 07:24 | Using the Media method, we can create several
different kinds of files that are very useful.
| | 07:29 | We can create a Macintosh
or a Windows Executable file.
| | 07:33 | You can see those here.
| | 07:34 | We're actually used a Mac or
Windows Executable when we were looking at
| | 07:39 | reviewing with Acrobat.com.
| | 07:41 | You can also publish to Flash Video.
| | 07:44 | A Flash Video files certainly won't
be appropriate when you're producing
| | 07:48 | quizzes, because a video file
won't have any interactivity.
| | 07:51 | If you're building a presentation
that's more like a kiosk presentation, then
| | 07:55 | perhaps that video might be a good idea.
| | 07:59 | If you're building an executable file,
then you could choose a custom icon as well.
| | 08:04 | From all of these options, I am
going to choose the SWF output for
| | 08:07 | this demonstration.
| | 08:09 | Once again, SWF output is the
most common output that we see.
| | 08:14 | Choose SWF output and we'll
browse to the Chapter 14 folder.
| | 08:21 | Select the Project folder and you'll
see this option to Publish to Folder.
| | 08:25 | This will build a new folder inside of
our Project folder, so that all of the
| | 08:29 | files that Captivate is about to
collect won't clutter up that folder.
| | 08:33 | I'd like to choose to Export to HTML and a PDF.
| | 08:38 | At this point, I could set my
Flash Player version as well.
| | 08:42 | Captivate 5 only supports Flash Player 9 and 10.
| | 08:46 | This is because ActionScript 3 is
the basis for all Captivate 5 content.
| | 08:51 | Having made these choices, let's publish.
| | 08:56 | Because we generated a PDF, Captivate
will warn us that we need to have Adobe
| | 09:00 | Reader version 9 or any version of Acrobat
9 or later to be able to view that content.
| | 09:07 | I could view the output now,
but I care not to do that.
| | 09:10 | Instead, I'd like to look
at the folder structure.
| | 09:15 | Captivate built this
folder called Chapter 14 quiz.
| | 09:18 | When we open it, you'll see
that there is a video file.
| | 09:21 | There is an HTM file, which is an
HTML file that will display the SWF here.
| | 09:26 | There is also a SWF that's called Pool1.
| | 09:30 | This is that pool of questions in our quiz.
| | 09:32 | When the user takes the quiz, the
Pool SWF will kick out one of those three
| | 09:37 | questions and inject it
into the presentation correctly.
| | 09:41 | This PDF file requires
Reader 9 or Acrobat 9 to view.
| | 09:45 | It includes all of the interactivity
that's inside of the Captivate file in the PDF.
| | 09:51 | It represents a very interesting
way for you to move your content from
| | 09:55 | Captivate to your users.
| | 09:58 | Do be warned that sometimes your
quiz reporting won't function correctly
| | 10:02 | if it's in a PDF file.
| | 10:04 | If you're publishing a quiz like we've
just done, then you're certainly going to
| | 10:08 | want to do that to a SWF with an HTML loader.
| | 10:12 | Having made changes to our publish
settings and then published our file, let's
| | 10:16 | save our project now.
| | 10:22 | We'll call it Chapter 14 quiz_a.
| | 10:29 | Captivate provides a lot of
flexibility when publishing your projects.
| | 10:33 | Whether publishing to SWF, PDF or
a self-running application, you're going to
| | 10:38 | be able to maintain the
interactivity that your users expect from your
| | 10:42 | Captivate projects.
| | 10:43 | Publishing to video will not
maintain the interactivity, but it can be an
| | 10:47 | effective way to get your kiosk
type presentations out and running.
| | 10:52 | Regardless, at the end of every
project, you're going to need to publish.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up Flash player security| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to see how
we can adjust the Flash Player security
| | 00:03 | settings in our browser.
| | 00:04 | We need to do this because when we
produce Flash content and then play it from
| | 00:09 | our computer, the Flash security model
doesn't allow that content to talk to the Internet.
| | 00:14 | If we have content that needs to
talk to the Internet, for instance to
| | 00:17 | publish quiz results, then we need to allow
this content to be able to talk to the Internet.
| | 00:23 | We're going to use the Chapter 14
quiz.htm file that we built in an earlier lesson.
| | 00:29 | It's located in your Chapter 14
Quiz folder, in your Project folder, in
| | 00:33 | your Chapter 14 folder.
| | 00:35 | Browse to that folder now.
| | 00:37 | I'm going to show this action in Firefox.
| | 00:39 | However, the steps that you need to take are
going to be very similar in other browsers.
| | 00:44 | Double-click to open the
Chapter 14 quiz.htm file.
| | 00:48 | This will launch your default browser.
| | 00:51 | You will get a message
about Flash Player security.
| | 00:53 | Flash Player knows that the Project
file wants to talk to the Internet.
| | 00:58 | To enable this to happen,
we need to click Settings.
| | 01:04 | Firefox has prevented the site
from opening a pop-up window.
| | 01:07 | We need the pop-up window to be able
to adjust Flash's security settings.
| | 01:11 | Let's shut off pop-up
blockers just for the moment.
| | 01:15 | You do this in Firefox's Preferences panel.
| | 01:20 | Under the Content tab,
shut off Block pop-up windows.
| | 01:25 | You can then close the Preferences.
| | 01:28 | Now we need to reload this page.
| | 01:31 | This time we'll get the Flash Player
aecurity warning and now you can click Settings.
| | 01:36 | (Ruff! Ruff! Dog barking)
| | 01:37 | If you're wondering why the dog is
barking, there is a barking dog sound that's
| | 01:41 | in the project that we're publishing.
| | 01:43 | We're able to hear that happen
because Slide 1 isn't in conflict with the
| | 01:47 | security rule that we're
trying to fix right now.
| | 01:50 | In order to allow this file to work I
need to edit my trusted locations.
| | 01:55 | Click the Edit Locations button
here and choose Add Location.
| | 02:00 | Flash Player remembers the last
thing it tried to talk to the Internet.
| | 02:04 | We want to use this location
in the Trust This Location area.
| | 02:09 | However, you'll notice that
the SWF file is listed there.
| | 02:12 | I don't want the SWF file.
| | 02:14 | I want to allow all the content that's
in the folder to talk to the Internet.
| | 02:18 | This means I need to start my
selection just before the SWF file and select
| | 02:23 | backwards to select everything from the
first slash all the way down to the end
| | 02:28 | of Chapter 14 quiz and include the last slash.
| | 02:32 | I can copy it with Command+C and
then paste it into Trust This Location.
| | 02:37 | You will see something very different here.
| | 02:40 | It's going to be operating system
dependent and your folder structure may not
| | 02:45 | look exactly the same as mine.
| | 02:47 | Having copied that location, click Confirm.
| | 02:51 | Now, you can see that this folder has
been added to our trusted locations.
| | 02:55 | Now, we need to restart Firefox to
ensure that the setting is working.
| | 03:02 | Once again, double-click
the Chapter 14 quiz file.
| | 03:09 | (Ruff! Ruff! Ruff! Dog barking)
| | 03:10 | Now, the file opens without
any complaint from Firefox.
| | 03:13 | Having adjusted the Flash security
settings, you've made it possible to
| | 03:16 | view your content from your desktop computer
without having to publish it to the Internet.
| | 03:22 | You will need to take this step as
you publish your content to different
| | 03:26 | folders on your computer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to Flash CS5| 00:00 | In this lesson we're going to see how
we can export our Captivate projects to
| | 00:03 | Flash CS5 Professional projects.
| | 00:06 | We're going to be using the Chapter 14 quiz_a
file that we created earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:13 | Please open it now if you
don't have it opened already.
| | 00:16 | From the File menu choose
Export and then To Flash CS5.
| | 00:21 | Captivate will automatically use the
Captivate file name in the Flash file.
| | 00:26 | You do need to browse to a location.
| | 00:29 | In this case, let's put it in the
Chapter 14 Project files folder. There it is.
| | 00:35 | I'm going to have Captivate publish to a folder.
| | 00:37 | This allows me to keep things organized.
| | 00:40 | I can export any one or
more of these elements here.
| | 00:44 | I would like to export all of
the elements into my Flash project.
| | 00:48 | Having made those choices,
I'm going to click Export.
| | 00:52 | Let's go take a look at the results.
| | 00:54 | If you have Flash Professional
installed, then Captivate will open it
| | 00:57 | automatically for you.
| | 00:59 | Let's zoom out so we can see the entire stage.
| | 01:01 | Now, wait a minute! This is blank.
| | 01:05 | This doesn't quite look like what I
had expected when I moved my project
| | 01:09 | from Captivate to Flash.
| | 01:11 | Well, it's not entirely blank.
| | 01:13 | If you look down here under Slides and
Actions, it turns out that there are some
| | 01:18 | things going on there.
| | 01:20 | I'll move my playhead to the right a
little bit and you can see that right
| | 01:23 | there there's an action iIndicator.
| | 01:26 | That means that this file
is comprised of ActionScript.
| | 01:30 | ActionScript is what lives
under the hood in Captivate.
| | 01:33 | When it produces a file in Flash, it's
producing the ActionScript that drives
| | 01:38 | the Captivate presentation.
| | 01:39 | You can see an example of that by
simply selecting the Actions layer,
| | 01:43 | right-clicking, and going down to
the bottom and choosing Actions.
| | 01:48 | This will open up the Actions panel.
| | 01:51 | This is the opening action for the slide.
| | 01:53 | Now, if you don't know anything about
ActionScript, your eyes are all glazey and
| | 01:57 | you're about to go to sleep. That's okay too.
| | 02:00 | I'm just showing this to you so that
if you have to dig in and start to make
| | 02:04 | adjustments to ActionScript after you
export your project, now you know where it is.
| | 02:09 | Let's expand the panel a little bit on the left.
| | 02:13 | You can see all of the actions on the
slides and what frame they happen to live on.
| | 02:20 | There are a lot of actions here and
I'm not going to explore many of them.
| | 02:24 | I'll just pick this one here at Frame 240.
| | 02:28 | This happens to be a Stop action.
| | 02:30 | So if it can go to the next slide,
which is slide 3, it will do that.
| | 02:35 | It's not going to stop.
| | 02:37 | It's going to continue.
| | 02:38 | You can learn a little bit about
ActionScript and the way it works by exploring
| | 02:42 | some of these actions that
are attached to specific frames.
| | 02:45 | We're not going to spend anymore time
with this other than to show you that this
| | 02:49 | is where the actions are and if you do
need to make adjustments, you'll need to
| | 02:53 | go into the Actions panel
and then select those actions.
| | 02:57 | More often than not you're going to
be producing a Flash project and then
| | 03:00 | handing it to a developer who'll do
some more work with it using their
| | 03:04 | knowledge of ActionScript.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to video for YouTube and iOS| 00:00 | Another feature that a lot of people
have been asking for is the ability to
| | 00:03 | output my projects for use
on iOS devices and to YouTube.
| | 00:08 | Captivate 5.5 includes
both of those features today.
| | 00:12 | You'll notice that there's a big
button that says YouTube right on it.
| | 00:15 | So if you would like to publish to
YouTube all you got to do is to have a
| | 00:18 | project ready to go and then
click the Publish To YouTube button.
| | 00:22 | Before I push the button though let's
talk a little bit about what types of
| | 00:25 | projects are appropriate.
| | 00:27 | If you have any type of interactivity,
it won't work when you publish to YouTube or to iOS.
| | 00:33 | This means that your quizzes, your
simulations, or any other type of project that
| | 00:37 | involves student
interaction isn't going to work.
| | 00:40 | This particular project happens to be a
demonstration of how to use a web site to achieve a goal.
| | 00:46 | This is an appropriate type of
project for publishing to YouTube or to iOS.
| | 00:52 | Something that you might want to do is to
modify the shape of the project to fit the device.
| | 00:57 | I can do that under Modify
and then Rescale project.
| | 01:02 | In this case, I would like it
to fit in iPad before I publish.
| | 01:06 | An iPad happens to be 1024x768.
| | 01:10 | My height is okay, but my width is not.
| | 01:12 | So I'm going to reduce the shape of
the project by simply typing in 1024 here.
| | 01:18 | Hit Return to commit the number
and then ensure that you have Maintain
| | 01:23 | Aspect Ratio checked.
| | 01:24 | Once you've done that ensure that you
have Rescale Project to Fit New Size enabled.
| | 01:29 | We don't want to crop our project.
| | 01:31 | We want to actually reduce the size.
| | 01:33 | With those options enabled, click Finish.
| | 01:37 | Yes, I want to do this.
| | 01:39 | Captivate will now go through the process
of moving all of my content to the center.
| | 01:43 | It will reduce the size of my stage
and it will shrink all of my objects
| | 01:48 | proportionately so that they
will fit in the new form factor.
| | 01:51 | This is a huge timesaver when it comes
to publishing our content onto devices.
| | 01:56 | Now that I've made this change I can
publish directly to YouTube or I can make a
| | 01:59 | QuickTime file on my desktop that
I could then publish to my iPad.
| | 02:03 | Let's look at YouTube publishing first.
| | 02:05 | I'll click the YouTube button and it
will send it over to the Adobe Captivate
| | 02:10 | Video Publisher application.
| | 02:12 | I happened to have a YouTube ID,
so I'm going to log in there now.
| | 02:16 | You'll need to use your own YouTube
account to be able to publish this content.
| | 02:21 | Having done that you need to fill in
the category information for YouTube.
| | 02:25 | You might want to type in a Description
and if there's any tags you might want to
| | 02:29 | attach that as well.
| | 02:32 | This happens to me an education program
so I'll leave it alone, but there are a
| | 02:35 | number of other categories
that your project may fit into.
| | 02:39 | I'm going to make this a private
program. That gives me the ability to control
| | 02:43 | who has access to it later.
| | 02:45 | When we're talking about programs for
corporate use often times we want to
| | 02:48 | set it into a private group setting
so that only our allowed people can
| | 02:52 | access the programs.
| | 02:53 | Of course, you have to agree
to the terms and conditions.
| | 02:56 | Having done that I can upload the
program to YouTube. Great, it's done.
| | 03:03 | So once it's finished uploading the
project, you can of course copy the link and
| | 03:07 | then send it to somebody by email, you
could view it on YouTube, or you could use
| | 03:11 | their mechanism to tell someone about it.
| | 03:14 | Let's view it on YouTube now.
| | 03:19 | In order to see the video, of course
I have to sign in and you will want to do
| | 03:22 | the same thing on your account.
| | 03:24 | So once the video loads
we can begin to play it.
| | 03:28 | (Male speaker: You'll notice we just saw
the advice to use Cmd+Enter to stop recording.)
| | 03:34 | (So from this point forward, I'm going to be simulating recording
this application and you can follow along and do the same thing on?)
| | 03:40 | So there it is. As I scrub through it,
we can see different areas of the recording.
| | 03:44 | In fact, you can watch my mouse move
as I go along here and of course, if you
| | 03:48 | were watching the whole thing, you would
learn how to fill in this form and then
| | 03:52 | sends an email back to Kurt James.
| | 03:55 | Let's go back to Captivate so that we
can see how to export this project to our
| | 03:59 | desktop so that we can
put it on to our iOS device.
| | 04:02 | From Captivate you will want to publish.
| | 04:06 | In order to get it to a video
file we'll need to choose Media.
| | 04:11 | Under Select Type you want to choose
MP4 Video. This is the video format that
| | 04:18 | the iOS devices will play natively.
| | 04:21 | We have some presets that are already built to
help you get the best quality of your output.
| | 04:25 | If you scroll up in the list, you'll see iPad.
| | 04:28 | You could also choose an iPhone 3 or
an iPhone 4 and iPod as well as YouTube
| | 04:33 | Widescreen High Def and Widescreen Standard Def.
| | 04:37 | If you want to do your encoding on
your own, you can choose Custom and then
| | 04:41 | adjust the sliders below. Let's pick iPad.
| | 04:45 | Having made that choice, Captivate
automatically sets up my encoding to get good
| | 04:49 | results when I put it onto my iPad.
| | 04:51 | You will want to choose
where you want the output to go.
| | 04:55 | In this case, I'm going to put it on
my desktop and then we'll say Publish.
| | 05:01 | If you still have the Adobe Captivate
Video Publisher running, then you'll need
| | 05:04 | to close it before you can click Publish.
| | 05:08 | Now that it's finished, you could
publish to YouTube, which we've already done,
| | 05:11 | or you could open the published video.
This will open the QuickTime player on
| | 05:15 | your computer and then show the video.
| | 05:17 | If you want to load it onto your iPad,
you've got to open up iTunes to do that.
| | 05:22 | This is a great new way for you to take your
content and to get it out to your learners.
| | 05:26 | Take advantage of these new
output methods for your projects today.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionParting thoughts and goodbye| 00:00 | We've come to the end of this course
and I hope that you've enjoyed it as much
| | 00:03 | as I've enjoyed making it.
| | 00:04 | If you'd like to learn more information
about Captivate, you can visit my blog.
| | 00:09 | I post articles from time to time
about Captivate and about eLearning.
| | 00:14 | In addition, I talk about lots of
other technical and non-technical topics.
| | 00:18 | There is always something there for you
to discover whether it's something you
| | 00:21 | can use or something that might amuse.
| | 00:24 | Once again, thank you for joining me
for this Captivate 5 Essentials course.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
